Pushbutton Switches
Authorized Distributor:
In the interest of product improvement, specifications are
subject to change without notice.
Cat. No. X032-E1-08 Printed in Japan
0206-1M (H)
OMRON Corporation
Industrial Automation Company
Sensing Devices Division H.Q.
Industrial Sensors Division
Shiokoji Horikawa, Shimogyo-ku,
Kyoto, 600-8530 Japan
Tel: (81)75-344-7022/Fax: (81)75-344-7107
ASIA/OCEANIA
JAPAN
OMRON CORPORATION (Industrial)
Gate City Ohsaki, West Tower 14F, 1-11-1 Ohsaki,
Shinaga w a-ku, Tokyo, 141-0032 JAPAN
Tel: 81-3-3779-9001/Fax: 81-3-3779-9019
@OMRON CORPORATION
(Consumer & Commercial)
Gate City Ohsaki, West Tower 14F, 1-11-1 Ohsaki,
Shinaga w a-ku, Tokyo, 141-0032 JAPAN
Tel: 81-3-3779-8709/Fax: 81-3-3779-9047
CHINA
OMRON (CHINA) CO., LTD. BEIJING OFFICE
32F, Tower B, Jianwai SOHO #39,
East 3rd. Ring Road, Chaoyang District,
Beijing, 100022 CHINA
Tel: 86-10-5869-3030/Fax: 86-10-5869-3815
@OMRON ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS (HONG
KONG) LTD. BEIJING OFFICE
32/F, Tower A, Jianwai SOHO, #39, East 3rd. Ring
Road, Chaoyang District, Beijing, 100022 CHINA
Tel: 86-10-5869-3131/Fax: 86-10-5869-0228
OMRON ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS (HONG
KONG) LTD. SHANGHAI OFFICE
Room 2211, Bank of China Tower,
200 Yin Cheng Zhong Road,
PuDong New Area, Shanghai, 200120 CHINA
Tel: 86-21-5037-2222/Fax: 86-21-5037-2200
@OMRON (CHINA) CO., LTD. SHANGHAI OFFICE
Room 2503, Raffles City Shanghai (Office Tower),
No. 268 Xi Zang Middle Road, Huang Pu District,
Shanghai, 200001 CHINA
Tel: 86-21-6340-3737/Fax: 86-21-6340-3757
OMRON ELECTRONICS GUANGZHOU LTD.
Room 2103, Guangzhou China Mayors Plaza,
No. 189, Tian He Bei Road, Guangzhou CHINA
Tel: 86-20-8732-0508/Fax: 86-20-8732-1750
@OMRON ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS (HONG
KONG) LTD. SHENZHEN OFFICE
Room 106, SEG Plaza, Huaqiang North Road,
Futian District, Shenzhen, 518031 CHINA
Tel: 86-755-8346-2220/Fax: 86-755-8346-2230
HONG KONG
OMRON ELECTRONICS ASIA LTD.
Unit 601-9, Tower 2, The Gateway No. 25,
Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon HONG KONG
Tel: 852-2375-387/Fax: 852-2375-1475
@OMRON ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS (HONG
KONG) LTD.
Unit 601-9, Tower 2, The Gateway No. 25,
Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, HONG KONG
Tel: 852-2375-3827/Fax: 852-2375-1475
INDIA
OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD.
INDIA LIAISON OFFICE
M-45, Market Complex, Greater Kailash Part II,
New Delhi-110048 INDIA
Tel: 91-11-5163-8215/Fax: 91-11-5163-8218
@OMRON ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS PTE LTD,
INDIA LIAISON OFFICE
2nd Floor, Pathi Towers, No. 80-55 East End `B'
Main Road, Jayanagar IX Block, (Nr. Jayadeva Car-
diac Institute), Bangalore 560 069, INDIA
Tel: 91-80-5696-9638/Fax: 91-80-2663-1685
INDONESIA
PT. OMRON ELECTRONICS
Graha Pratama Floor 3A, JL MT Haryono Kav. 15,
Jakarta Selatan INDONESIA 12810
Tel: 62-21-8370-9555/Fax: 62-21-8370-9550
@PT. OMRON MANUFACTURING OF INDONESIA
EJIP Industr ial Park Plot 5C,
Lemahabang Bekasi 17550, Jakarta INDONESIA
Tel: 62-21-897-5108/Fax: 62-21-897-5160
SOUTH KOREA
OMRON ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS CO.,LTD.
307, Teheran Office Bldg. #707-38, Yeoksam-dong,
Gangnam-gu, Seoul KOREA
Tel: 82-2-567-5020/Fax: 82-2-567-5804
MALAYSIA
OMRON ELECTRONICS SDN. BHD.
Unit No. 1101, Level 11, Uptown 1, No. 1,
Jalan SS 21/58, Damansara Uptown,
47400 Petaling Jaya, Selangor Darul Ehsan
MALAYSIA
Tel: 60-3-7688-2888/Fax: 60-3-7688-2833
OMRON ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS PTE. LTD.
3A, Lot 4 Bangunan TH Uptown 3, Damansara
Uptown , No.3, J a la n SS 21/3 9, 4 7400 Petal ing J a ya,
Selangor Darul Ehsan, MALAYSIA
Tel: 60-3-7623-6300/Fax: 60-3-7665-0078
THE PHILIPPINES
OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD.
MANILA REPRESENTATIVE OFFICE
2nd Floor, King's Court II Bldg,
2129 Don Chino Roces Avenue, 1231 Makati City,
Metro, Manila THE PHILIPPINES
Tel: 632-811-2831/Fax: 632-811-2583
@OMRON MALAYSIA SDN BHD, PHILIPPINES
REPRESENTATIVE OFFICE
U-1103, 11th Floow, ALPAP 2 Building, Investment
Cor. Trade Drive, Madrigal Business Park, Alabang
Muntinlupa City, THE PHILIPPI NES
Tel: 632-7723-667/Fax: 632-7723-665
SINGAPORE
OMRON ELECTRONICS PTE. LTD.
55, Ubi Avenue 1, #05-01 SINGAPORE 408935
Tel: 65-6547-6789/Fax: 65-6547-6766
@OMRON ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS PTE. LTD.
140 Paya Lebar Road #04-11 A-Z Building
SINGAPORE 409015
Tel: 65-6848-8800/Fax: 65-6848-8811
TAIWAN
OMRON TAIWAN ELECTRONICS INC.
6F, Home Young Bldg., No. 363,
Fu-Shing N. Road, Taipei TAIWAN ROC
Tel: 886-2-2715-3331/Fax: 886-2-2712-6712
OMRON TAIWAN SYSTEM INC.
11F, No. 8, Chung Hsiao West Road, Sec 1, Taipei
TAIWAN
Tel: 886-2-2375-2200/Fax: 886-2-2375-2233
OMRON ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS (HONG
KONG) LTD. TAIWAN BRANCH (*)
5F-3, No. 146, Song Jiang Road, Taipei, 10458,
TAIWAN ROC
Tel: 886-2-2521-2350/Fax: 886-2-2521-0686
THAILAND
OMRON ELECTRONICS CO., LTD.
Rasa Tower 20th Floor, #555 Phaholyothin Rd.,
Chatuchak, Bangk ok 10900 THAILAND
Tel: 66-2-937-0500/Fax: 66-2-937-0501
@OMRON ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS CO., LTD.
Phaholythin Place Building, 41st Floor, 408/166,
Phaholythin Road, Samsen-nai, Phayathai,
Bangkok 10400 THAILAND
Tel: 66-2-619-0292/Fax: 66-2-619-0624-5
VIETNAM
OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD.
HANOI/HCM REPRESENTATIVE OFFICE
2, Lang Ha, 6th Floor Vinacone x Building, Ha noi
VIETNAM
Tel: 844-831-3121/Fax: 844-831-3122
AUSTRALIA
OMRON ELECTRONICS PTY. LTD.
71 Epping Road, North Ryde, Sydney NSW 2113
AUSTRALIA
Tel: 61-2-9878-6377/Fax: 61-2-9878-6981
NEW ZEALAND
OMRON ELECTRONICS LTD.
65 Boston Road, Mt Eden Auckland
NEW ZEALAND
Tel: 64-9-358-4400/Fax:64-9-358-4411
NORTH/SOUTH AMERICA
UNITED STATE S
OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
One Commerce Drive Schaumburg, IL 60173-5302
U.S.A.
Tel: 1-847-843-7900/Fax: 1-847-843-7787
@OMRON ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS LLC
55 East Commerce Drive, Suit B, IL 60173 U.S.A.
Tel: 1-847-882-2288/Fax: 1-847-882-2192
CANADA
OMRON CANADA INC.
885 Milner Av enue , Scarborough, Ontari o, M1 B 5V8
CANADA
Tel: 1-416-286-6465/Fax: 1-416-286-6648
BRAZIL
OMRON ELECTRONICA DO BRASIL LTDA.
Av. Santa Catarina, 935 04378-300
São Paulo-SP-BRAZIL
Tel: 55-11-5564-6488/Fax: 55-11-5564-7751
EUROPE
AUSTRIA
OMRON Electronics G.m.b.H
Brunner Strasse 81, Box 323, A-1230 Vienna
AUSTRIA
Tel: 43-1-801-90-0/Fax: 43-1-804-48-46
BELGIUM
OMRON ELECTRONICS NV/SA
Stationsstraat 24 B-1702 Groot-Bijgaarden
BELGIUM
Tel: 32-2-4662-480/Fax: 32-2-4660-687
CZECH REPUBLIC
OMRON ELECTRONICS Spol.s.r.o.
Jankovcova 53, 170 00 CZECH REPUBLIC
Tel: 420-234-602-602/Fax: 420-234-602-607
DENMARK
OMRON ELECTRONICS A/S
Lykkebaekvej 2, DK-4600 Koege DENMARK
Tel: 45-43-44-0011/45-43-44-0211
FINLAND
OMRON ELECTRONICS OY
Metsänpojankuja 5, FIN-02130 Espoo FINLAND
Tel: 358-207-464-200/Fax: 358-207-464-210
FRANCE
OMRON ELECTRONICS S.a.r.l.
14, Rue de Lisbonne 93561 Rosny Sous Bois
FRANCE
Tel: 33-1-4974-7000/Fax: 33-1-4876-0930
@OMRON ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS EUROPE
B.V.
14, Rue de Lisbonne 93561 Rosny Sous Bois
FRANCE
Tel: 33-1-4974-7050/Fax: 33-1-4876-2795
GERMANY
OMRON ELECTRONICS G.m.b.H.
Elisabeth-Selbert-Strasse 17, 40764 Langenfeld
GERMANY
Tel: 49-2173-6800-0/Fax: 49-2173-6800-400
@OMRON ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS EUROPE
B.V.
Gruber Strasse 60d, 85586 Poing GERMANY
Tel: 49-8121-77240/Fax: 49-8121-772440
HUNGARY
OMRON ELECTRONICS Kft.
H-1046 Budapest Kiss Erno u. 1-3 HUNGARY
Tel: 36-1-399-3050/Fax: 36-1-399-3060
ITALY
OMRON ELECTRONICS S.p.A.
Viale Certosa, 49 20149 Milano ITALY
Tel: 39-02-32681/Fax: 39-02-325154
@OMRON ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS EUROPE
B.V.
Viale Certosa, 49 20149 Milano ITALY
Tel: 39-02-3268-850/Fax: 39-02-3268-851
THE NETHERLANDS
OMRON ELECTRONICS B.V.
Wegalaan 61, 2132 JD Hoofddorp, Postbus 582
2130 AN Hoofddorp THE NETHERLANDS
Tel: 31-23-568-1100/Fax: 31-23-568-1188
@OMRON ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS EUROPE
B.V.
Wegalaan 57, 2132 JD Hoofddorp
THE NETHERLANDS
Tel: 31-23-568-1200/Fax: 31-23-568-1212
NORWAY
OMRON ELECTRONICS NORWAY AS
Ole Deviksvei 4, P. O. Box 109, Bryn, N-0611 Oslo
NORWAY
Tel: 47-2265-7500/Fax: 47-2265-8300
POLAND
OMRON ELECTRONICS SP.Z.O.O
ul. Jana Sengera "Cichego" 1, 02-790 Warsaw
POLAND
Tel: 48-22- 645-7860/Fax: 48-22-645-7863
PORTUGAL
OMRON ELECTRONICS LDA.
Rua de S. Tomé, Lote 131 2689-510 Prior-Velho
PORTUGAL
Tel: 351-21-942-9400/Fax: 351-21-941-7899
SPAIN
OMRON ELECTRONICS S.A.
c/Arturo Soria 95, E-28027 Madrid SPAIN
Tel: 34-91-377-7900/Fax: 34-91-377-7956
@OMRON ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS EUROPE
B.V.
c/Arturo Soria 95, E-28027 Madrid SPAIN
Tel: 34-91-377-7900/Fax: 34-91-377-7987
SWEDEN
OMRON ELECTRONICS AB
Norgegatan 1, P. O. Box 1275, SE-164 29 Kista
SWEDEN
Tel: 46-8-632-3500/Fax: 46-8-632-3510
@OMRON ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS EUROPE
B.V.
Norgegatan 1, S-164 32 Kista SWEDEN
Tel: 46-8-632-3500/Fax: 46-8-632-3535
SWITZERLAND
OMRON ELECTRONICS AG
Sennweidstrasse 44 CH-6312 Steinhausen
SWITZERLAND
Tel: 41-41-748-1313/Fax: 41-41-748-1345
TURKEY
OMRON ELECTRONICS LTD.
Altunizad e , Kis ikli Cad. N o: 2 A-B lok K . 2 TR- 3466 2
Uskudar - Istanbul TURKEY
Tel: 90-216-474-00-40/Fax: 90-216-474-00-47
UNITED KINGDOM
OMRON ELECTRONICS LTD.
Opal Drive, Fox Milne, Milton Keynes MK15 0DG
UNITED KINGDOM
Tel: 44-1908-258-258/Fax: 44-1908-258-158
@OMRON ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS EUROPE
B.V.
1 Bishop Square, Hatfield Business Park, Hatfield,
Hertfordshire AL10 9NE United Kingdom
Tel: 44-870-750-5661/Fax: 44-870-750-5662
NOTE:
1. Each of OMRON Sales offices has its branch offices.
2. Some of abovementioned offices do not deal all of OMRON
products.
3. Contron Corporation is an independent distributor in Korea.
4. Information subject to change without notice.
@
This company mainly deals electronic components.
For the most up-to-date office information
please visit www.omron.com
OMRON SALES OFFICES As of October 2005 (IAB/ECB)
1
Warranty and Application Considerations
Warranty and Limitations of Liability
Application Considerations
Read and Understand this Catalog
Please read and understand this catalog be fore purchasing the product. Please consult your OMR ON representativ e if you hav e
any questions or comments.
Warranty and Limitations of Liability
WARRANTY
OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year
(or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON.
OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING NON-INFRINGEMENT,
MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER
ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PR ODUCTS WILL SUIT ABLY MEET
THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED.
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
OMRON SHALL NO T BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT , OR CONSEQUENTIAL D AMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS,
OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON
CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT LIABILITY.
In no e v ent sh all the resp onsibili ty of OMR ON f or any act e xceed th e individ ual price of the pro duct on wh ich liabi lity is asse rted.
IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS REGARDING THE
PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED,
INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE
MODIFICATION OR REPAIR.
Application Considerations
SUITABILITY FOR USE
OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the combination of
products in the customer's application or use of the products.
At the custo mer 's request , OMR ON will pro vide ap plica bl e third party certifica tion doc uments ide ntifyi ng r atings and li mitati ons
of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the
products in combination with the end product, machine, system, or other application or use.
The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not intended to be an
e xhausti ve list of all possib le uses of t he produc ts, n or is it intende d to imp ly that the uses listed m a y be su itabl e f or th e products.
Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or uses not described in
this catalog.
Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical equipment, amusement
machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations.
Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property.
Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT
ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED T O ADDRESS THE RISKS , AND THAT THE OMR ON
PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE O VERALL EQUIPMENT OR
SYSTEM.
2
Disclaimers
Copyright and Copy Permission
Disclaimers
PERFORMANCE DATA
Performance data given in this catalog is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a
warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON's test conditions, and the users must correlate it to actual application
requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and Limitations of Liability.
CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons.
It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when significant construction
changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be changed without any notice. When in doubt, special
model n um be r s m ay be assigned to fix or es tablis h key sp ec ific at ions fo r y our applica tion on you r requ es t. Plea se con su lt with
your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products.
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when tolerances are shown.
ERRORS AND OMISSIONS
The inf ormation i n this catal og has been ca refully chec ke d and is bel iev ed to be accurate; howe v er , no respon sibility is assume d
for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions.
Copyright and Copy Permission
COPYRIGHT AND COPY PERMISSION
This catalog shall not be copied for sales or promotions without permission.
This catalog is protected by copyright and is intended solely for use in conjunction with the products. Please notify us before
cop ying or reproducing this catalog in any manner , for an y other purpose. If copying or transmitting this catalog to another , please
copy or transmit it in its entirety.
3
Safety Precautions
Meaning of Signal Words
The following signal word is used in this catalog.
Meaning of Alert Symbols
The following alert symbol is used in this catalog.
Alert Statement in this Catalog
The following alert statement applies to the products in this catalog. This alert statement also appears at the locations needed in
this catalog to attract your attention.
Please read the Technical Information section (page 8) and Safety Precautions for each model for other operation precautions.
@WARNING Indicates a potential ly hazardous situation which, i f not avoided, will result in minor or
moderate injury, or may result in serious injury or death. Additionally there may be
signif ic ant property damage.
Indicates the possibility of electric shock und er specific conditions.
@WARNING
Electric shock may possib ly occur. Do not perform wiring work or touch the charged parts of terminals while power
is supplied to the Switch.
4
CONTENTS
Selection Guide 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Information 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switches and Indicators with Round Bodies
A3D 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M2D 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A3C 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M2C 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A16 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A165S/W 83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A165K 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A165E 112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M16 122. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M2BJ-B 131. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A22 136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A22S/W 166. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A22K 177. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A22E 184. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M22 202. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switches and Indicators with Square Bodies
A3A 210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A3P 220. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M2P 248. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection Guide
5
Classification Pushbutton switch
Model A3A A3C A3D
Appearance
Pushbutton shape
Panel cutout
dimensions 11.5 11.5, 11.5 dia. 12 dia. 8 dia.
Pushbutton color LED-lighted: red, yellow,
green
Non-lighted: red, yellow,
green, blue, gray, black,
light gray, dark gray
LED-lighted: red, yellow,
green, white
Incandescent lamp-lighted:
red, yellow, green, blue,
white
Non-lighted: red, yellow,
green, blue, white, black
LED-lighted: red,
yellow, green, white
Indicator type (see
note) NO YES YES
Switch color Black Black Black
Form SPST-NO, SPDT SPST-NO+
SPST-NC SPST-NO
Rated load
(resistive) 6 A, 125 VAC; 4 A,
30 VDC 0.5 A, 250 VAC; 1 A,
30 VDC 0.1 A, 30 VDC
Mechanical life
expectancy Momentary operation:
1,000 x 103 operations
min.
Alternate operation: 50 x
103 operations min. (high
capacitive load), 100 x 103
operations min.
(general-purpose, micro
loads)
Momentary operation:
1,000 x 103 operations
min.
Alternate operation: 100 x
103 operations min.
Momentary operation:
1,000 x 103
operations min.
Alternate operation:
100 x 103 operations
min.
Electrical life
expectancy 50 x 103 operations min.
(high capacitive load)
100 x 103 operations min.
(general-purpose load)
1,000 x 103 operations
min. (micro load)
100 x 103 operations min. 100 x 103 operations
min.
Mounting style Snap-in panel mounting
PC board mounted,
thru-panel
Nut mounting Nut mounting
Remarks Possible to switch wide
range of loads Accessories: socket,
insulation cover
Series product: micro load
type LED & lamp for A16
can be used.
Accessories: socket,
insulation cover
Approved standards RC RC ---
Page 210 34 20
Note: Indication function only
Selection Guide
6
Classification Pushbutton switch, knob-type selector switch,
key-type selector switch Pushbutton switch
Model A16 A22 A3PA A3PJ
Appearance
Pushbutton shape
Panel cutout
dimensions 16 dia. 22 dia. 23.5 22.5 23.5 30.5
Pushbutton color LED-lighted: red, yellow,
pure yellow, green, white,
blue
Incandescent
lamp-lighted: red, yellow,
green, pure yellow, white,
blue
Non-lighted: red, yellow,
pure yellow, green, white,
blue, black
LED-lighted: red, yellow,
green, white, blue
Incandescent
lamp-lighted: red, yellow,
green, white, blue
Non-lighted: red, yellow,
green, white, blue, black
Lighted with built-in LED: red, white, green, orange
Incandescent lamp-lighted: red, green, white, blue,
orange
LED-lighted: red, yellow, green, white (split types and
2-color types also available)
Indicator type (see
note) YES YES YES
Switch color Black Black, brown Light gray, black
Form SPDT, DPDT SPST-NO, SPST-NC,
SPST-NO+SPST-NC,
DPST-NO, DPST-NC
SPDT, DPDT
Rated load
(resistive) 5 A, 125 VAC;
3 A, 250 VAC;
3 A, 30 VDC
10 A, 110 VAC;
6 A, 220 VAC 3 A, 250 VAC; 3 A, 30 VDC
Mechanical life
expectancy Pushbutton Switch
Momentary operation:
2,000 x 103 operations
min.
Knob-type Selector
Switch
250 x 103 operations min.
Key-type Selector Switch
250 x 103 operations min.
Pushbutton Switch
5,000 x 103 operations
min.
Knob-type Selector
Switch Non-lighted: 500 x
103 operations min.
Lighted: 100 x 103
operations min.
Key-type Selector Switch
500 x 103 operations min.
Momentary operation: 1,000 x 103 operations min.
Alternate operation: 200 x 103 operations min.
Electrical life
expectancy Pushbutton Switch
100 x 103 operations min.
Knob-type Selector
Switch
100 x 103 operations min.
Key-type Selector Switch
100 x 103 operations min.
Pushbutton Switch
500 x 103 operations min.
Knob-type Selector
Switch Non-lighted: 500 x
103 operations min.
Lighted: 100 x 103
operations min.
Key-type Selector Switch
500 x 103 operations min.
100 x 103 operations min.
Mounting style Nut mounting Nut mounting Snap-in panel mounting
Remarks Accessories: extractor,
legend plate, screw fitting,
panel plug, lock ring
Accessories: contact
block, lamp socket,
mounting latch, legend
plate, metallic bezel ring,
sealing cap, control box,
snap-in legend plate
Accessories: socket, mounting plate, barrier, switch
guard, protective cover
Series product: Microload version
Approved standards RR
cRR
cRC
Page 55 136 220 220
Note: Indication function only
Selection Guide
7
Classification Pushbutton switch Buzzer
Model A3PT M2BJ-B
Appearance 58.4 44.5
Pushbutton shape
Panel cutout
dimensions 29 dia. 16 dia.
Pushbutton color LED-lighted: white, red, yellow, green
Incandescent lamp-lighted:
red, green, white, blue, orange
Non-lighted
Indicator type (see
note) YES NO
Switch color Light grey Black
Form SPDT, DPDT ---
Rated load
(resistive) 3 A, 250 VAC; 5 A, 125 VAC; 5 A, 8 VDC; 5 A, 14
VDC; 4A, 30 VDC; 0.4 A, 125 VDC; 0.2 A, 250 VDC
Mechanical life
expectancy Momentary operation:
1,000,000 operations min.
Alternate operation:
200,000 operations min.
---
Electrical life
expectancy 100,000 operations min. ---
Mounting style Spring mounting Nut mounting
Snap-in panel mounting
Remarks Same as the A3PA and A3PJ Buzzer only
Accessories: snap-in mounting leaf spring, panel plug
Approved standards RC ---
Page 220 131
Note: Indication function only
Technical Information Technical Information
8
Technical Information
Terms for Configuration and Structure
A Pushbutton Switch is a switch designed so that its contacts are opened and closed by depressing and releasing a pushbutton on the Switch in
the direction of its axis. Pushbutton Switches come in two categories: lighted and non-lighted. The structure of a typical Lighted Pushbutton
Switch is shown below. Broadly speaking, Lighted Pushbutton Switches are made up of the 5 sections shown below . Non-lighted Pushbutton
Switches are made up of 4 sections, the 5 sections shown below less the light source.
Structure of Typical Lighted Pushbutton Switch
Mounting Section
Used to secure the
body of the Switch to
the mounting panel.
Pushbutton
Movable
piece
Movable
spring
Terminal
Case
Movable
contacts
Pushbutton surface (illuminated surface)
Opens and closes electric circuit.
Pushbutton
Transmits external
force/movement to
the Switch.
Light Source
Controls the light
indication.
Case
Protects internal
mechanisms.
Mounting panel
Switch
Terms for Operating Action
Operation Explanation
Momentary operation The pushbutton returns to its original position after it is released.
Alternate operation The first time the pushbutton is pressed, an internal lock mechanism holds it in the same
position. The next time it is pressed, the lock is released and the pushbutton returns to its
original position.
Push-pull operation When the pushbutton is pressed, an internal lock mechanism holds it in the same position. The
pushbutton is returned to its original position when the pushbutton is pulled to release the lock.
Push-lock, turn-reset operation When the pushbutton is pressed, an internal lock mechanism holds it in the same position. The
pushbutton is returned to its original position when the pushbutton is twisted to release the
lock.
Technical Information Technical Information
9
Terms Related to Operating Characteristics
Classification Term Abbreviation Unit Definition
Force Operating Force OF N, NmThe force (or torque) that must be applied to the pushbutton to
move it from the free position to the operating position.
Releasing Force RF N, NmThe force (or torque) that must be applied to the pushbutton to
move it from the operating limit position back to the returned
position.
Total Travel Force TTF N, NmThe force (or toque) on the pushbutton when it reaches the
stopper.
Position Free Position FP mm, (°)The position (or angle) of the pushbutton when there is no
external force applied to it.
Operating Position OP mm, (°)The position (or angle) of the pushbutton when the movable
contact changes from the free position state to the operating
position state due to an external force.
Release Position RP mm, (°)The position (or angle) of the pushbutton when the movable
contact changes from the operating position state to the free
position state due to the reduction of external force.
Total Travel Position TTP mm, (°)The position (or angle) of the pushbutton when it reaches the
stopper.
Set Position SP mm, (°)The position of an alternate operation pushbutton when it is in
the self-holding state, or the position (or angle) of a selector
switch when it is in the self-holding state.
Travel Pretravel PT mm, (°)The distance (or angle) through which the pushbutton moves
in going from the free position to the operating position.
Overtravel OT mm, (°)The distance (or angle) through which the pushbutton moves
in going from the operating position to the operating limit
position.
Movement Differential MD mm, (°)The distance (or angle) through which the pushbutton moves
in going from the operating position back to the returned
position.
Total Travel TT mm, (°)The distance (or angle) through which the pushbutton moves
in going from the free position to the operating limit position.
Releasing Travel RT mm, (°)The distance (or angle) through which the pushbutton moves
in going from the returned position to the free position.
Lock Travel Alternate LTA mm, (°)The distance (or angle) through which the pushbutton moves
in going from the free position to the set position.
Free position Operating
position Operating lim-
it position Returned
position Free
position Set
position
Terminal Symbols
Symbol Meaning
COM Common terminal
NC Normally closed terminal
NO Normally open terminal
Contact Form
Name Contact form
SPDT
SPST-NC
SPST-NO
Double-break
Technical Information Technical Information
10
General Terms
Term Explanation
Chameleon lighting Full-screen lighting in one of 3 colors: red, green, or orange. (Orange is produced by simultaneous illumination
of red and green.)
Simultaneity This term is used for switches that have more than one contact circuit. It indicates the difference in time or
position between the contacts when all the contacts of the switch are opened or closed in one operation.
LED lighting LED-lighted models are lit with an LED installed in the base of the Pushbutton Unit.
The LED is mounted internally; it cannot be removed.
LED-lamp lighting LED lamp-lighted models use the same light source as incandescent lamp-lighted models, with an LED
instead of a filament.
The Lamp (i.e., the LED lamp) and the Pushbutton Unit can be separated.
Pushbutton
Unit
LED lamp
Pushbutton
Unit
LED lamp
A16, M16 A3P
Incandescent lamp
lighting Incandescent lamp-lighted models are lit with an incandescent lamp.
The Lamp (i.e., the incandescent lamp) and the Pushbutton Unit can be separated.
Pushbutton
Unit
Incandescent
lamp
Pushbutton
Unit
Incandescent
lamp
A16, M16 A3P
Voltage Reduction
Unit For 16-dia. A16 (M16)
models, 22-dia. A22 (M22)
models, and 30-dia. A30
models
The Voltage Reduction Unit has a smoothing circuit and a resistance, and lights
the LED lamp by applying 110 (220) VAC/VDC directly to the Lamp terminals.
Matrix mounting Mounting several Switches in vertical and/or horizontal lines.
Locking Switches Switches that have the functionality to self-hold when the pushbutton is operated.
Horizontal
side-by-side mounting Mounting Switches side-by-side with the long side of the Switch (rectangular models) horizontal.
Vertical side-by-side
mounting Mounting Switches side-by-side with the long side of the Switch (rectangular models) vertical.
Technical Information Technical Information
11
Protection Ratings
Note: International protection degrees are determined by the following tests. Be sure to check the sealing capability under the actual operat-
ing environment and conditions before actual use.
IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission) Standards (IEC 60529 January
1997)
IP-jj
Degree of protection against water
Degree of protection against solid materials
International protection mark
Degree of Protection from Solid Materials
Degree Protection
0No protection
150 mm dia. Protects against penetration of any solid object, such as a hand, that is 50 mm or more in
diameter.
212.5 mm dia. Protects against penetration of any solid object, such as a finger, that is 12.5 mm or more
in diameter.
32.5 mm Protects against penetration of any solid object, such as a wire, that is 2.5 mm or more is
diameter.
41 mm Protects against penetration of any solid object, such as a wire, that is 1 mm or more in
diameter.
5Protects against penetration of dust of a quantity that may cause malfunction or obstruct
the safe operation of the product.
6Protects against penetration of all dust.
Technical Information Technical Information
12
Degree of Protection Against Water
Degree Protection Test method (with fresh water)
0No protection Not protected against
water. No test
1Protection against water
drops Protects against
vertical drops of
water towards the
product.
Water is dropped vertically
towards the product from the
test machine for 10 min. 200 mm
2Protection against water
drops Protects against
drops of water
approaching at a
maximum angle of
15° to the left, right,
back, and front of
vertical towards the
product.
Water is dropped for 2.5 min
each (i.e., 10 min in total)
towards the product inclined
15° to the left, right, back, and
front from the test machine.
200 mm
3Protection against sprinkled
water Protects against
sprinkled water
approaching at a
maximum angle of
60° from vertical
towards the product.
Water is sprinkled at a maximum
angle of 60° to the left and right
from vertical for 10 min from the
test machine
Water rate is 0.07 liter/min
per hole.
4Protection against water
spray Protects against
water spray
approaching at any
angle towards the
product.
Water is sprayed at any angle
towards the product for 10 min from
the test machine.
Water rate is 0.07 liter/min
per hole.
5Protection against water jet
spray Protects against
water jet spray
approaching at any
angle towards the
product.
Water is jet sprayed at any angle
towards the product for 1 min per
square meter for at least 3 min in
total from the test machine.
12.5 liter/min
2.5 to 3 m
Discharging nozzle: 6.3 dia.
6Protection against
high-pressure water jet spray Protects against
high-pressure water
jet spray
approaching at any
angle towards the
product.
Water is jet sprayed at any angle
towards the product for 1 min per
square meter for at least 3 min in
total from the test machine.
100 liter/min
2.5 to 3 m
Discharging nozzle: 12.5 dia.
7Protection underwater Resists the
penetration of water
when the product is
placed underwater at
specified pressure
for a specified time.
The product is placed 1 m deep in
water (if the product is 850 mm max.
in height) for 30 min. 1 m
8Protection underwater Can be used
continuously
underwater.
The test method is determined by the manufacturer and user.
Technical Information Technical Information
13
Terms Related to IEC947 and IEC950
No. Term Explanation
1Rated operating voltage (Ue) VAC: 120, 240, 380, 480, 500, 600
VDC: 125, 250, 440, 500, 600
2Rated operating current (Ie) Specified by the manufacturer on consideration of rated operating voltage (Ue), rated
frequency, rated energizing time, area of application, and type of enclosure protection.
3Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Determined by creepage distance and the dielectric strength.
The maximum Ue value must not exceed the maximum Ui value.
If there is no Ui value specified, the maximum Ue value is taken as the Ui value.
4Pollution degree 1. Either no pollutants are present, or only dried, non-conductive pollutants are present
(e.g., clean rooms).
2. Basically, only non-conductive pollutants are present, or only transient conductivity
occurs due to condensation (indoor locations, such as offices).
3. Conductive pollutants are present, or non-conductive pollutants are present in
locations where condensation is expected (e.g., factories).
4. Conductivity due to impurities is a constant possibility, or conductivity is caused by
conductive dust, rain, or snow (e.g., outdoor locations).
5Electric shock protection class Class I: These devices require grounding. Electric shock is prevented by basic
insulation and charged parts that would be subject to dangerously high
voltages if the insulation was damaged, are grounded.
Class II: Electric shocks are prevented by double insulation or enforced
insulation.
Class III: No countermeasures against electric shocks are required because
the electric circuits in use operate in a low-enough voltage range.
Class II: Electric shocks are prevented by double insulation or enforced insulation.
Class III: No countermeasures against electric shocks are required because the electric
circuits in use operate in a low-enough voltage range.
6 PTI Proof tracking index.
Specified CTI values (comparative tracking indices):
Materials satisfying the 175, 250, 300, 375, and 500 levels are denoted as PTI-175,
PTI-250, PTI-300, PTI-375, and PTI-500 respectively.
7 IP IP-jj
Degree of protection against water (See below.)
Degree of protection against solid materials (See below.)
Degree of Protection
The meanings of the IP numbers are given in the following table.
No. Degree of protection against solid materials Degree of protection against water
0No protection No protection
1Protects against penetration of any solid object, such as a
hand, that is 50 mm or more in diameter. Protects against vertical drops of water.
2Protects against penetration of any solid object, such as a
finger, that is 12.5 mm or more in diameter. Protects against drops of water approaching at a maximum
angle of 15° to the vertical.
3Protects against penetration of any solid object, such as a
wire, that is 2.5 mm or more is diameter. Protects against sprinkled water.
4Protects against penetration of any solid object, such as a
wire, that is 1 mm or more in diameter. Protects against water spray.
5Protects against penetration of dust of a quantity that may
cause malfunction or obstruct the safe operation of the
product.
Protects against water jet spray.
6Protects against penetration of all dust. Protects against high-pressure water jet spray.
Technical Information Technical Information
14
Common Precautions
For the individual precautions for a Switch, refer to the precautions
in the section for that Switch.
Cautions
Do not perform wiring or touch the charged parts of terminals while
power is being supplied to the Switch. Doing so may result in electric
shock.
Electrical Characteristics
Electrical Conditions
The switching load capacity of the Switch greatly varies between
AC and DC. Always be sure to apply the rated load. The control
capacity will drastically drop if it is a DC load. This is because a
DC load has no current zero-cross point, unlike an AC load.
Therefore, if an arc is generated, it may continue for a
comparatively long time. Furthermore, the current direction is
always the same, which results in a contact relocation
phenomena whereby the contacts easily stick to each other and
do not separate when the surfaces of the contacts are uneven.
Some types of load have a great difference between normal
current and inrush current. Make sure that the inrush current is
within the permissible value. The greater the inrush current in the
closed circuit is, the greater the contact abrasion or shift will be.
Consequently, contact weld, contact separation failures, or
insulation failures may result. Furthermore, the Switch may be
broken or damaged.
If the load is inductive, counter-electromotive voltage will be
generated. The higher the voltage is, the higher the generated
energy will be, which will increase the abrasion of the contacts
and contact relocation phenomena. Be sure to use the Switch
within the rated conditions.
Inrush Current
i (Inrush current)
o (Steady-
state current)
Approximate control capacities are given in ratings tables, but
these alone are insufficient to guarantee correct operation. For
special types of load, with unusual switching voltage or current
waveforms, test whether correct operation is possible with the
actual load before application.
When switching for microloads (voltage or current), use a Switch
with microload specifications. The reliability of silver-plated
contacts, which are used in Switches for standard loads, will be
insufficient for microloads.
When switching microloads or very high loads that are beyond
the switching capacity of the Switch, connect a relay suitable for
the load.
Type of Load vs. Inrush Current
Solenoid
(Approximately 10 to 20 times higher)
Incandescent
lamp (Approximately 10 to 15 times
higher) Motor
(Approximately
5 to 10 times
higher) Relay
(Approxi-
mately 4 to 5
times higher)
All the performance ratings given are for operation under the
following conditions unless otherwise specified.
Inductive load: A minimum power factor of 0.4 (AC) and a maxi-
mum time constant of 7 ms (DC)
Lamp load: An inrush current 10 times higher than the
steady-state current
Motor load: An inrush current 6 times higher than the
steady-state current
Note: Inductive loads can cause problems especially in DC cir-
cuitry. Therefore, it is essential to know the time constants
(L/R) of the load.
Load Connections
Do not contact a single Switch to two power supplies that are differ-
ent in polarity or type.
Connection of Different Polarities
The power supply may short-circuit if the loads are connected in the
way shown in the “incorrect” example below.
Incorrect
Correct
Load
Load
Load
Load
Even in the “correct” example, note that the insulation performance
of the switch may deteriorate and the switch life may be shortened
because loads are connected to both contacts.
Technical Information Technical Information
15
Connection of Different Power Supplies
The DC and AC power may be mixed for the circuit shown below.
Incorrect
Load
Load
Do not design a circuit where voltage is imposed between contacts,
otherwise contact weld may result.
Incorrect
Load
Contact Protective Circuit
Apply a contact protective circuit to extend the contact life, prevent noise, and suppress the generation of carbide or nitric acid. Be sure to apply
the contact protective circuit correctly, otherwise an adverse effect may occur.
The following provides typical examples of contact protective circuits. If the Limit Switch is used in an excessively humid location for switching a
load that easily generates arcs, such as an inductive load, the arcs may generate NOx, which will change into HNO3 if it reacts with moisture.
Consequently, the internal metal parts may corrode and the Limit Switch may fail. Be sure to select the ideal contact preventive circuit from the
following.
Typical Examples of Contact Protective Circuits
Circuit example Applicable
current Feature Element selection
AC DC
CR circuit
Power
supply
Inductive
load
*Yes *When AC is switched, the load
impedance must be lower than the
CR impedance.
C: 1 to 0.5 µF x switching current (A)
R: 0.5 to 1 x switching voltage (V)
The values may change according to
the characteristics of the load.
The capacitor suppresses the spark
discharge of current when the
contacts are open. The resistor limits
the inrush current when the contacts
Power
supply
Inductive
load
Yes Yes The operating time will be greater if
the load is a relay or solenoid.
Connecting the CR circuit in parallel
to the load is effective when the
power supply voltage is 24 or 48 V
and in parallel to the contacts when
the power supply voltage is 100 to
200 V.
the inrush current when the contacts
are closed again. Consider the roles
of the capacitor and resistor and
determine ideal capacitance and
resistance values through testing.
Basically, use a capacitor with a
dielectric strength between 200 and
300 V. When AC is switched, make
sure that the capacitor has no
polarity.
Diode method
Power
supply Inductive
load
No Yes Energy stored in the coil is changed
into current by the diode connected in
parallel to the load. Then the current
flowing to the coil is consumed and
Joule heat is generated by the
resistance of the inductive load. The
reset time delay with this method is
longer than that in the CR method.
The diode must withstand a peak
inverse voltage 10 times higher than
the circuit voltage and a forward
current as high or higher than the
load current.
Diode and
Zener diode
method Power
supply Inductive
load
No Yes This method will be effective if the
reset time delay caused by the diode
method is too long.
Use a Zener diode with a Zener
voltage that is approximately 1.2 ×
power supply voltage as, depending
on the environment, the load may not
operate.
Varistor
method
Power
supply
Inductive
load
Yes Yes This method makes use of
constant-voltage characteristic of the
varistor so that no high-voltage is
imposed on the contacts. This
method causes a reset time delay.
Connecting a varistor in parallel to
the load is effective when the supply
voltage is 24 to 48 V and in parallel to
the contacts when the supply voltage
is 100 to 200 V.
---
Technical Information Technical Information
16
Do not apply contact protective circuits as shown below.
This circuit effectively suppresses arcs
when the contacts are OFF. The capacitor
will be charged, however, when the
contacts are OFF. Consequently, when the
contacts are ON again, short-circuited
current from the capacitance may cause
contact weld.
This circuit effectively suppresses arcs
when the contacts are OFF. When the
contacts are ON again, however, charge
current will flow to the capacitor, which may
result in contact weld.
Power
supply Load
IncorrectIncorrect
Incorrect
Power
supply Load
Switching a D C inductive load is usually more dif ficult than switching
a resistive load. By using an appropriate contact protective circuit,
however, switching a DC inductive load will be as easy as switching
a resistive load.
Switching
Do not use the Switch for loads that exceed the rated switching
capacity or other contact ratings. Doing so may result in contact
weld, contact separation failures, or insulation failures.
Furthermore, the Switch may be broken or damaged.
Do not touch the charged switch terminals while power is
supplied, otherwise an electric shock may be received.
The life of the Switch varies greatly with switching conditions.
Before using the Switch, be sure to test the Switch under actual
conditions. Make sure that the number of switching operations is
within the permissible range.
If a deteriorated Switch is used continuously, insulation failures,
contact weld, contact failures, switch damage, or switch burnout
may result.
Do not apply excessive or incorrect voltages to the Switch or
incorrectly wire the terminals. Otherwise, the Switch may not
function properly and have an adverse effect on external
circuitry. Furthermore, the Switch itself may become damaged o r
burnt.
Do not use the Switch in locations where flammable or explosive
gases are present. Otherwise switching arcs or heat radiation
may cause a fire or explosion.
Do not drop or disassemble the Switch, otherwise it may not be
capable of full performance. Furthermore, it may be broken or
burnt.
Mechanical Conditions
Operating Force and Operating Method
Fingertip operation is an important feature of Pushbutton
Switches. In terms of Switch operation, Pushbutton Switches
differ greatly from detection switches such as Microswitches.
Operating the Switch using a hard object (e.g., metal), or with a
large or sudden force, may deform or damage the Switch,
resulting in faulty or rough operation, or shortening of the Switch
life. The strength varies with the size and construction of the
Switch. Use the appropriate Switch for the application after
confirming the operating method and operating force with this
catalog.
Hammer
Do not apply
excessive or
sudden force.
Incorrect
The pushbutton surface is composed of resin. Therefore, do not
attempt to operate the pushbutton using a sharp object, such as
a screwdriver or a pair of tweezers. Doing so may damage or
deform the pushbutton surface and result in faulty operation.
Do not use
sharp objects.
Screwdriver
Tweezers
Incorrect
Mounting
Switches can be broadly divided into two categories according to
mounting method: panel-mounting models and PCB-mounting
models. Use the appropriate model for the mounting method
required. Basically, panel-mounting Switches can withstand a
greater operating force than PCB-mounting Switches. If,
however, the panel thickness or the panel-cutout dimensions are
not suitable for the Switch, it may not be able to withstand the
normal operating force. With continuous mounting in particular,
select a panel of a thickness that is easily suf ficient to withstand
the total operating force.
Panel-mounting Switches can be divided into two categories
according to the mounting method: snap-in mounting models
and screw-mounting models. Snap-in mounting Switches are
held in place with the elasticity of resin or a metal leaf spring. Do
not attempt to modify the spring after mounting. Doing so may
result in faulty operation or damage the mounting structure.
Mount screw-mounting models using the screws and nuts
provided (or individually specified). Tighten the screws to the
specified torque. Mounting with different screws or nuts, or
tightening beyond the specified torque may result in distortion of
the inside of the case or damage to the screw section.
Snap-in Mounting Screw Mounting
Do not attempt to
modify the spring
after mounting.
Use the
screws and
nuts provided
(or specified).
Subjecting the Switch to severe vibrations or shock may result in
faulty operation or damage. Also, many of the Switches are
Technical Information Technical Information
17
composed of resin so contact with sharp objects may result in
damage to the surface. This kind of damage may spoil the
appearance of the Switch or result in faulty operation. Do not
throw or drop the Switch.
Do not drop ob-
jects or place
heavy objects on
the Switch.
Do not drop or
knock the Switch.
Do not operate the
Switch with heavy
or sharp objects.
Hammer Screwdriver
Incorrect
Incorrect
Incorrect
Mounting Precautions
Wiring
Perform wiring so that the lead wires will not be caught on other
objects as this will cause stress on the Switch terminals. Wire the
Switch so that there is slack in the lead wires and fix lead wires at
intermediate points. If the panel to which the Switch is mounted
needs to be opened and closed for maintenance purposes,
perform wiring so that the opening and closing of the panel will
not interfere with the wiring.
Incorrect
Correct
With miniature Switches, the gap between the terminals is very
narrow. Use protective or heat-absorbing tubes to prevent
burning of the wire sheath or shorting.
Protective tube
IncorrectCorrect
Soldering
There are two methods for soldering the Switch: hand soldering
and automatic soldering. In addition, automatic soldering itself
can be divided into two types : dip soldering and reflow soldering.
Use the soldering method appropriate for the mounting method.
The following table gives some examples of applications using the
types of soldering given above.
Technical Information Technical Information
18
Method Soldering
device Application
Hand soldering Soldering iron Small quantities
Different
materials
Lead wire
terminals
Automatic
soldering Dip
soldering Jet soldering
bath
Dip soldering
bath
Large quantities
of discrete
terminals
Reflow
soldering Infrared reflow
(IR) soldering
bath
Vapor-phase
(VPS) reflow
soldering bath
Large quantities
of miniature
SMD terminals
Do not use soldering flux that contains chlorine. Doing so may
result in metal corrosion.
Perform hand soldering using the appropriate soldering iron.
Perform soldering for be-
tween 3 to 5 s with a suit-
able soldering iron.
Incorrect
Correct
Incorrect
Large-
capacity
soldering
iron
Lead wire
Small-capacity
soldering iron
used for a long
time
Terminal
With the exception of PCB-mounting Switches, when performing
hand soldering, hold the Switch so that the terminals point
downwards so that flux does not get inside the Switch.
Incorrect Correct
Leave a gap of at least 1 mm between the soldered parts and the
surface of the case so that flux does not get inside the Switch.
Case
Terminal
Solder
Lead wire
1 mm min.
When applying flux using a brush, use a sponge soaked in flux as
shown below. Do not apply more than is necessary. Also, apply
the flux with the PCB inclined at an angle of less than 80° so that
flux does not flow onto the mounting surface of the Switch.
Brush
Sponge
soaked in flux
Flux
Brush
80°C
max.
Incorrect
Correct
Do not place PCBs that have had flux applied or have been
soldered on top of each other. Otherwise, the flux on the PCB’s
solder surface may stain the upper part of the Switch or even
permeate the inside of the Switch and cause contact failure.
Do not place PCBs
with solder or flux on
top of each other.
Flux
Incorrect
Technical Information Technical Information
19
When performing soldering with a dip soldering bath, ensure that
the flux does not reach a higher level than the PCB.
Incorrect
Correct
Flux is especially likely to rise up at the edges of the PCB. If the
Switch is mounted near the edge of the PCB, create a gap
between the edge by using a split PCB, and insert the PCB in the
soldering bath so that the edge that is farthest from the Switch
enters the bath first.
Create distance
Create gap
Split PCB
Flux is
more likely
to rise at
the edges.
Insert in soldering
bath from this
edge.
Storage
When the Switch is left unused or stored for long periods, the
ambient conditions can have a great effect on the condition of the
Switch. In certain environments, leaving the Switch exposed
may result in deterioration (i.e., oxidation, or the creation of an
oxide film) of the contacts and terminals, causing the contact
resistance to increase, and making it difficult to solder the lead
wires. Therefore, store in a well-ventilated room, inside, for
example, a non-hygroscopic case, in a location where no
corrosive gases are present.
If the Switch is stored in a location where it will be exposed to
direct light, colored resin in the colored plate may fade.
Therefore, do not store the Switch in locations where it will be
exposed to direct light.
20
Lighted Pushbutton Switch A3D
Lighted Pushbutton Switch with
Cylindrical 18-mm × 8-dia. Body
Good illumination with even surface brightness.
Cylindrical body means panel cutouts can be made
easily.
Combines miniature design with excellent operat-
ing sensitivity.
Ordering Information
Model Number Legend:
The model numbers used to order sets of Units are illustrated below. One set comprises the Pushbutton (LED lamp built-in) and Switch.
A 3 D J - 9 0 A 1 - 0 0 E R
(1) (2) (3)
(1) Shape of Pushbutton
Symbol Shape
J Rectangular
A Square
T Round
(3) Color of Pushbutton
Symbol Color
R Red
Y Yellow
G Green
W White
All models are illumination
only. Colored-illumination mod-
els are not available.
Non-lighted models are not
available.
An external resistor is
required. (Refer to page 28.)
Symbol Terminals Operation Contact
A Momentary
B Alternate
Solder
Minimum applicable load: 1 mA at 5 VDC
Standard load models are not available.
If PCB terminals are required, use the Socket
given under Accessories on page 22.
Momentary operation: Self-resetting
Alternate operation: Self-holding
(2) Switch Specifications
Microload (30 VDC, 0.1 A)
SPST-NO
List of Models
Appearance Model
Rectangular A3DJ
Square A3DA
Round A3DT
A3D A3D
21
Ordering as a Set
The model numbers used to order sets of Units are given in the following table. One set comprises the Pushbutton (LED lamp built-in), and
Switch.
Appearance Degree of protection Operation Model number Color symbol for
Pushbutton
A3DJ (Rectangular) IP40 Momentary A3DJ-90A1-00EjR, Y, G, W
Alternate A3DJ-90B1-00Ej
A3DA (Square) Momentary A3DA-90A1-00Ej
Alternate A3DA-90B1-00Ej
A3DT (Round) Momentary A3DT-90A1-00Ej
9 dia. Alternate A3DT-90B1-00Ej
Note: 1. Enter the desired color symbol for the Pushbutton in j.
2. All the above are solder-terminal, microload, SPST-NO, LED lamp-lighted models.
Ordering Individually
Pushbuttons and Switches can be ordered separately. Combinations that are not available as sets can be created using individual Units. Also,
store the parts as spares for maintenance and repairs.
Pushbutton (LED built-in)
Switch
A3D A3D
22
Pushbutton (All Lighted with LED Built-in)
Appearance Rectangular Square Round
Color
Red A3DJ-500R A3DA-500R A3DT-500R
Yellow A3DJ-500Y A3DA-500Y A3DT-500Y
Green A3DJ-500GY A3DA-500GY A3DT-500GY
White A3DJ-500W A3DA-500W A3DT-500W
Switch
Sealing IP40
Appearance Rectangle Square Round
Contact type Operating action Terminal type
SPST-NO Momentary Solder terminals A3DJ-7111 A3DA-7111 A3DT-7111
Alternative Solder terminals A3DJ-7121 A3DA-7121 A3DT-7121
Accessories (Order Separately)
Name Appearance Classification Model Application
precautions
Socket Wire-wrap terminal A3D-4101 Cannot be used together
with Insulation Cover
PCB terminal A3D-4102 w
ith
I
nsu
l
a
ti
on
C
over.
Solder terminal A3D-4103
Insulation Cover --- A3D-3002 Cannot be used together
with the Socket.
Tightening Tool --- A3D-3004 Do not tighten to a
torque exceeding
0.29 Nm.
Legend Plate Rectangular A3DJ-5201 One milky-white Legend
Plate is included with
Square A3DA-5201 Plate is included with
standard products.
Round A3DT-5201
standard
products
.
A3D A3D
23
Specifications
Ratings
Contact Rating: 30 VDC, 0.1 A (Minimum Appli-
cable Load: 5 VDC, 1 mA)
The above ratings conform to JIS C4505, for testing under the fol-
lowing conditions.
1. Load: Resistive load
2. Mounting conditions: No vibration or shock
3. Ambient temperature: 20 $2_C.
4. Operating frequency: 20 times/min.
Built-in LED Lamp
Item Color
Red Yellow (White)
(See note 4.) Green
Forward voltage, VFReference value (See note 3.) 1.7 V 2.2 V 2.1 V
g, F
Maximum value 2.0 V 2.5 V 2.5 V
Forward current, IFReference value 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA
,F
Absolute maximum value 50 mA 50 mA 50 mA
Permissible dissipation, PD Absolute maximum value 100 mW 125 mW 122 mW
Reverse voltage, VRAbsolute maximum value 4 V 4 V 4 V
Note: 1. The above ratings are for an ambient temperature of 25°C.
2. The built-in LED lamp has no limiting resistor and so it is necessary to connect an external resistor within the range shown in the
above table. (For details of calculation formulas, refer to page 28.)
3. Refer to the characteristic graphs of VF – IF on page 24.
4. The same LED lamp is used for both yellow illumination and white illumination and so the ratings are the same.
Characteristics
Operating frequency Mechanical: 120 operations/minute max. (See note 1.)
Electrical: 20 operations/minute max.
Insulation resistance 100 M min. (at 500 VDC)
Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between terminals of same polarity
2,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between terminals of different polarity, and between each
terminal and ground
1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between lamp terminals (See note 2.)
Vibration resistance Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude (See note 3.)
Shock resistance Destruction: 500 m/s2
Malfunction: 150 m/s2 (See note 3.)
Life expectancy Mechanical:
Momentary operation models: 1,000,000 operations min.
Alternate operation models: 100,000 operations min.
(One operation consists of set and reset operations.)
Electrical: 100,000 operations min.
Weight Approx. 3 g
Ambient operating temperature –10_C to 55_C (with no icing or condensation)
Ambient operating humidity 35% to 85%
Ambient storage temperature –25_C to 65_C
Degree of protection IP40
Electric shock protection class Class II
PTI (proof tracking index) 175
Pollution degree 3 (IEC947-5-1)
Note: 1. With alternate operation models, 60 operations/minute max. One operation cycle consists of set and reset operations.
2. The figure for dielectric strength between lamp terminals is for when the LED lamp is not mounted.
3. “Malfunction” in the above table indicates malfunctions of less than 1 ms.
A3D A3D
24
Operating Characteristics
OF max. 2.45 N
RF min. 0.196 N
TT Approx. 3.5 mm
LTA min. (See note.) 0.5 mm
PT max. 2.5 mm
Note: The figure for LTA in the table applies only to models with
alternate operation.
Contact Form
Contact name Contact form
SPST-NO COM NO
Engineering Data
LED Characteristics
Ta: Ambient Temperature
VF – IF Characteristic
for Red LED VF – IF Characteristic
for Yellow or White LED VF – IF Characteristic
for Green LED Forward Current
Reduction Curve
VF (V) VF (V) VF (V) TA (°C)
I (mA)F
I (mA)F
I (mA)F
I (mA)F
A3D A3D
25
Nomenclature
Color cap
Legend plate (milky white)
Reflective plunger
LED
Pushbutton
Shape of Pushbutton
Square (A3DA) Round (A3DT)
Rectangular (A3DJ)
Color of Pushbutton
(All models LED-lighted)
Red, yellow, green, white
Note: The LED lamp is built
into the Pushbutton.
Switch
Switch Specifications
Microload
0.1 A at 30 VDC
Minimum applicable load: 1 mA at 5 VDC
Note: The A3DJ model is shown here as a representative example.
A3D A3D
26
Dimensions
Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
Rectangular Models (A3DJ)
Round Models (A3DT)
Square Models (A3DA)
9 dia. 7.4 dia.
Terminals
Solder Terminals of SPST-NO Lighted Models
Terminal Arrangement
(Bottom View)
LED terminal (t0.3)
0.8 2
Panel Cutouts (Top View)
Rectangular models (A3DJ) Square models (A3DA) and
round models (A3DT)
8+0.2
0 dia. 15 min.
10 min.
Note: Recommended panel
thickness: 1.0 to
3.2 mm.
8+0.2
0 dia. 10 min.
Note: Recommended panel
thickness: 1.0 to
3.2 mm.
Accessory Mounting Dimensions
Socket Mounting Dimensions
Wire-wrap Terminal
A3D-4101 PCB Terminal
A3D-4102 Solder Terminal
A3D-4103
PCB Cutout (bottom view)
Four, 0.8 dia.
9 dia. 9 dia. 9 dia.
A3D A3D
27
Insulation Cover Mounting Dimensions
A3D-3002
8.9 dia.
Note: 1. The diagram above shows the rectangular model as a
representative example.
2. Unless specified, there is a tolerance of ±0.4 mm for
dimensions.
After securing the Switch to the panel using the mounting nut,
pass the lead wires through the holes in the Insulation Cover
before performing wiring. Hold the Insulation Cover so that the
cylindrical hole is facing the Switch, and insert the lead wires
from the end with the barriers.
After wiring is completed, mount the Insulation Cover by pushing
it into the Switch.
Legend Plate Mounting Dimensions
Rectangular
A3DJ-5201
Square
A3DA-5201
Round
A3DT-5201
5.8 dia.
Note: 1. The thickness is 0.8 mm.
2. Since the legend plate is made of polycarbonate, use alcohol-based paints such as melanin, phthalic acid, or acryl paint when
marking the legend.
Installation
Mounting and Replacing the Pushbutton
Mounting Direction for the Pushbutton and Switch
Projection
Switch Pushbutton
Curved claw
Align the curved claw on the outside of the protruding part of the
Pushbutton with the projection on the upper part of the Switch and
insert.
Apply a pressure between 9.8 and 24.5 N.
Note: If the terminals of the LED lamp become bent, it may be
impossible to fit them into the LED lamp terminal holes.
Ensure that the terminals are straight when they are
inserted. Be sure to insert the lamp terminals for round
models with the correct orientation. Inserting the terminals
with the reverse orientation will result in damage.
Removing the Pushbutton
Recessed
portions
Hold the recessed portions on the cap of the Pushbutton and pull.
Note: Do not use tools such as pliers to remove the Pushbutton as
this may damage the cap.
Panel Mounting
Using the Mounting Nut
Insert the Switch from the front of the panel. Mount the mounting nut
from the terminal end of the Switch and tighten it.
Tighten the nut to a torque 0.20 to 0.39 Nm.
If soldering is used, mount the mounting nut first. Lead wires and
mounds o f solder may make it impossible to mount the nut after sol-
dering.
Panel Mounting nut
Socket Mounting
After securing the Switch to the panel using the mounting nut, insert
the Socket into the Switch.
When inserting the Socket, align the positioning groove of the
Socket with the projecting part of the Switch.
Panel
Projecting part of Switch
Positioning groove of Socket
A3D A3D
28
Precautions
Refer to the Common Precautions for Pushbutton Switches on
page 14.
Correct Use
Mounting
Always make sure that the power is turned OFF before mounting,
removing, or wiring the Switch, or performing maintenance.
Do not tighten the mounting ring excessively using pliers or a similar
tool. Excessive tightening may damage the mounting ring. (T ighten-
ing torque: 0.20 to 0.29 Nm)
Wiring
When wiring, use wires of a size appropriate for the applied voltage
and carry current. Perform soldering correctly under the conditions
given below. Using the Switch with the wires soldered incorrectly
may cause the terminals to become abnormally hot and cause a fire.
1. Hand soldering: At 30 W within 5 seconds.
2. Dip soldering: At 240°C within 3 seconds.
Wait for one minute after soldering before exerting any external
force on the solder.
Use a non-corrosive rosin liquid for the flux.
Perform wiring so that the wire sheaths do not come into contact
with the Switch. If this is unavoidable, use wires that can withstand
temperatures of 100°C min.
After wiring to the Switch has been completed, ensure an appropri-
ate insulation distance.
LED
The polarity of the LED is indicated on the back of the Switch. Wire
the LED correctly according to the polarity.
The built-in LED does not have a limiting resistor. Connect a limiting
resistor.
Make sure that the limiting resistor satisfies the characteristics of
the built-in LED. The forward current of the built-in LED must be
8 mA minimum.
The resistance can be calculated by using the following expression.
R = (E –VF)/IF ()
E: Operating voltage (V)
VF: LED forward voltage (V)
IF: LED forward current (A)
Recommended Values for Limiting Resistance
Voltage Red Yellow
(White) Green
5 VDC 165 140 145
12 VDC 515 490 495
24 VDC 1,100 1,090 1,095
Note: The above values are calculated values that can be used as
reference.
Calculation Example for Limiting Resistance
Conditions: Red LED with an IF of 20 mA at 24 V and a Ta of 25°C.
From the red LED characteristic given previously, VF will be 1.7 V
when IF is 20 mA. Therefore, R = (24 V – 1.7 V)/0.02 A = 1,100 .
Thus the recommended resistance is 1.1 k at 1 W (2 x IF2R). (see
note)
Note: A factor of 2 is applied because the permissible wattage of
the resistor must be twice as large as the required wattage.
Operating Environment
Ensure that dust, metal powder, or oil do not enter the interior of the
Switch.
Using Microloads
Using a standard load switch for opening and closing a microload
circuit may cause wear on the contacts. Use the switch within the
operating range. (Refer to the diagram below.) Even when using mi-
croload models within the operating range shown below, if inrush
current occurs when the contact is opened or closed, it may cause
the contact surface to become rough, and so decrease life expec-
tancy. Therefore, insert a contact protection circuit where neces-
sary. The minimum applicable load is the N-level reference value.
This value indicates the malfunction reference level for the reliability
level o f 60% (λ 60) (conforming to JIS C5003). The equation, λ 60 =
0.5 x 1 0–4/times indicates that the estimated malfunction rate is less
than 1/2,000,000 with a reliability level of 60%.
Standard
load area
Microload
area
Invalid
area
Voltage (V)
Current (mA)
ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.
Cat. No. A031-E1-05
29
Indicator M2D
Cylindrical 8-dia. Indicator
Same basic design as the A3D Pushbutton Switch.
Good illumination with even surface brightness.
Cylindrical body means panel cutouts can be made
easily.
Ordering Information
Model Number Legend:
The model numbers used to order sets of Units are illustrated below. One set comprises the Display (LED lamp built-in) and Socket Unit.
M 2 D J - 9 0 A 1 - 0 0 E R
(1) (2) (3)
(1) Shape of Display
Symbol Shape
J Rectangular
A Square
T Round
(3) Color of Display
Symbol Color
R Red
Y Yellow
G Green
W White
All models are illumination-
only. Colored-illumination mod-
els are not available.
An external resistor is
required. (Refer to page 28.)
Symbol Terminal type
A Solder terminals
If PCB terminals are required,
use the Socket given under
Accessories on page 22.
(2) Terminal Type
List of Models
Appearance Model
Rectangular M2DJ
Square M2DA
Round M2DT
M2D M2D
30
Ordering as a Set
The model numbers used to order sets of Units are given in the following table. One set comprises the Display (LED lamp built-in), and Socket
Unit.
Appearance Degree of protection Model number Color symbol for Display
Rectangular IP40 M2DJ-90A1-00EjR, Y, G, W
Square M2DA-90A1-00Ej
Round
9 dia.
M2DT-90A1-00Ej
Note: 1. Enter the desired color symbol for the Display in j: R (red), Y (yellow), G (green), or W (white)
2. Degree of protection: IP40
Ordering Individually
Displays and Socket Units can be ordered separately. Combinations that are not available as sets can be created using individual Units. Also,
store the parts as spares for maintenance and repairs.
Display (LED built-in)
Note: Degree of protection: IP40
Socket Unit
Display (All Lighted with LED Built-in)
Appearance Rectangular Square Round
Color
Red M2DJ-500R M2DA-500R M2DT-500R
Yellow M2DJ-500Y M2DA-500Y M2DT-500Y
Green M2DJ-500GY M2DA-500GY M2DT-500GY
White M2DJ-500W M2DA-500W M2DT-500W
M2D M2D
31
Socket Unit
Sealing IP40
Appearance Rectangle Square Round
Terminal type
Solder terminals M2DJ-7001 M2DA-7001 M2DT-7001
Accessories
The accessories for the A3D Lighted Pushbutton Switch can also be used with the M2D. Refer to page 22.
Specifications
Ratings
Built-in LED Lamp
Item Color
Red Yellow (White)
(See note 4.) Green
Forward voltage, VFReference value (See note 3.) 1.7 V 2.2 V 2.1 V
g, F
Maximum value 2.0 V 2.5 V 2.5 V
Forward current, IFReference value 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA
,F
Absolute maximum value 50 mA 50 mA 50 mA
Permissible dissipation, PD Absolute maximum value 100 mW 125 mW 122 mW
Reverse voltage, VRAbsolute maximum value 4 V 4 V 4 V
Note: 1. The above ratings are for an ambient temperature of 25°C.
2. The built-in LED lamp has no limiting resistor and so it is necessary to connect an external resistor within the range shown in the
above table. (For details of calculation formulas, refer to page 28.)
3. Refer to the characteristic graph of VF – IF on page 24.
4. The same LED lamp is used for both yellow illumination and white illumination and so the ratings are the same.
Characteristics
Ambient operating temperature –10_C to 55_C (with no icing or condensation)
Ambient operating humidity 35% to 85%
Ambient storage temperature –25_C to 65_C
M2D M2D
32
Nomenclature
Color cap
Legend plate (milky white)
Reflective plunger
LED
Display
Shape of Display
Square Round
Rectangular
Color of Display
(All models LED-lighted)
Red, yellow, green, white
Note: The LED lamp is built into
the Display.
Socket Unit
Note: The M2DJ model is shown here as a representative example.
Dimensions
Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
Rectangular Models
(M2DJ-90A1-00Ej)
Square Models
(M2DA-90A1-00Ej)
Square Models
(M2DT-90A1-00Ej)
7.4 dia.9 dia.
Note: Unless specified, there is a tolerance of ±0.4 mm for dimensions.
M2D M2D
33
Terminals
Solder Terminals
0.8 2LED terminal (±0.3)
Panel Cutouts (Top View)
Rectangular models (M2DJ) Square models (M2DA) and
round models (M2DT)
8+0.2
0 dia. 15 min.
10 min.
Note: Recommended panel
thickness: 1.0 to
3.2 mm.
8+0.2
0 dia. 10 min.
Note: Recommended panel
thickness: 1.0 to
3.2 mm.
Note: If the panel is to be finished (e.g., coated), make sure that
the panel meets the specified dimensions after the coating.
Precautions
Correct Use
Refer to the Common Precautions for Pushbutton Switches on page 14.
Refer to Correct Use for A3D on page 28.
ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.
Cat. No. A122-E1-02
34
Lighted Pushbutton Switch A3C
Cylindrical 12-dia. Series with Superb
Operability, High Visibility, and Compact
Housing
Three models of Pushbuttons (round, square, and
rectangular), two types of light-emitting elements
(LED lamp and incandescent lamp), and two types
of Switches (switching standard loads and
microloads) available.
Models that can be used as an indicator also
available.
Requires only 20 mm mounting depth
Efficiency i n w iring improved by terminals arranged
on the same surface.
All LED lamps, incandescent lamps, caps, and
legends replaceable without tools.
UL (E41515) and CSA (LR45258) approved.
RC
Ordering Information
Model Number Legend
When placing your order, specify the individual component part model numbers of the Pushbutton, Lamp (lighted models only), and Switch, as
listed in the ordering tables below.
A 3 C J - 9 0 A 1 - 24E R
(1) (2) (3) (4)
(1) Shape of Pushbutton
Symbol Shape
J Rectangular
A Square
T Round
(2) Terminal Type
Symbol Type
0 Solder terminal
Microload
Standard Load
0.5 A at 250 VAC
1 A at 125 VAC
1 A at 30 VDC
Microload
0.1 A at 125 VAC
0.1 A at 30 VDC
Minimum applicable load
1 mA at 5 VDC
Momentary-action: Self-resetting
Alternate-action: Self-holding
“Colored-illumination” models
operate in the way shown
below:
Unlit Lit
White Color
The built-in LED
is colored.
(4) Lighted/Non-lighted
Symbol Type
0 Non-lighted
1 Illumination only
(5) Lighting Method
Symbol Operating voltage
05E 5 VDC
12E 12 VDC
24E 24 VDC
LED Lamp-lighted Models
Incandescent Lamp-
lighted Models
Symbol Operating voltage
06 5 VAC/VDC
14 12 VAC/VDC
28 24 VAC/VDC
(6) Color of Pushbutton
Symbol Color
R Red
Y Yellow
G Green
W White
For LED Lamp
(5) (6)
PCB terminals are also avail-
able. Refer to the Switch table
on page 37.
(3) Switch Specifications
Symbol Operation
A Momentary
B Alternate
Standard Load
SPDT
Symbol Operation
E Momentary
F Alternate SPDT
Colored-illumination models
are also available. Refer to
page 36.
Symbol Color
R Red
Y Yellow
G Green
A Blue
W White
For Incandescent Lamp
Non-lighted Models
Symbol Color
R Red
Y Yellow
G Green
W White
A Blue
B Black
For Non-lighted Models
No symbol
A3C A3C
35
Ordering as a Set
The model numbers used to order sets of Units are given in the following tables. One set comprises the Pushbutton, Lamp (lighted models
only), and Switch.
Rectangular Models
A3CJ
Square Models
A3CA
Round Models
A3CT
Lighted Pushbutton Switches (SPST-NO+SPST-NC Solder Terminals)
Contact type Standard load Microload Pushbutton color
symbol
yp
Operation
Shape Lighting
Momentary
operation
(Self-resetting)
Alternate
operation
(Self-holding)
Momentary
operation
(Self-resetting)
symbol
Rectangular (A3CJ) LED lamp A3CJ-90A1-05EjA3CJ-90B1-05EjA3CJ-90E1-05EjR: red
Y ello
g( )
p
A3CJ-90A1-12EjA3CJ-90B1-12EjA3CJ-90E1-12EjY: yellow
G:
g
reen
A3CJ-90A1-24EjA3CJ-90B1-24EjA3CJ-90E1-24Ej
G:
green
W: white
Incandescent lamp A3CJ-90A1-06j--- R: red
Y: yellow
A3CJ-90A1-14jY: yellow
G: green
A3CJ-90A1-28j
G:
green
W: white
A: blue
Non-lighted A3CJ-90A0-jA3CJ-90B0-jA3CJ-90E0-j
A
:
bl
ue
B: black (See note 3.)
Square (A3CA) LED lamp A3CA-90A1-05EjA3CA-90B1-05EjA3CA-90E1-05EjR: red
Y ello
q( )
p
A3CA-90A1-12EjA3CA-90B1-12EjA3CA-90E1-12EjY: yellow
G:
g
reen
A3CA-90A1-24EjA3CA-90B1-24EjA3CA-90E1-24Ej
G:
green
W: white
Incandescent lamp A3CA-90A1-06j--- R: red
Y: yellow
A3CA-90A1-14jY: yellow
G: green
A3CA-90A1-28j
G:
green
W: white
A: blue
Non-lighted A3CA-90A0-jA3CA-90B0-jA3CA-90E0-j
A
:
bl
ue
B: black (See note 3.)
Round (A3CT) LED lamp A3CT-90A1-05EjA3CT-90B1-05EjA3CT-90E1-05EjR: red
Y ello
()
p
A3CT-90A1-12EjA3CT-90B1-12EjA3CT-90E1-12EjY: yellow
G:
g
reen
A3CT-90A1-24EjA3CT-90B1-24EjA3CT-90E1-24Ej
G:
green
W: white
Incandescent lamp A3CT-90A1-06j--- R: red
Y: yellow
A3CT-90A1-14jY: yellow
G: green
A3CT-90A1-28j
G:
green
W: white
A: blue
Non-lighted A3CT-90A0-jA3CT-90B0-jA3CT-90E0-j
A
:
bl
ue
B: black (See note 3.)
Note: 1. Enter the desired color symbol for the Pushbutton in the j at the end of the model number.
2. There are also alternate-operation models that can be used for microloads. Refer to the Switch table on page 37.
3. Black (“B”) Pushbuttons are only available for non-lighted models.
A3C A3C
36
Illumination-only and Colored-illumination LED Models
“Illumination only” describes LED models for which the screen color is the same whether the LED is lit or not. The screen simply becomes
brighter when the LED lights.
Example: Red LED
Lit
Not lit
Red
Red
Cap (red)
Legend plate (milky white)
Reflective plunger
LED lamp (red) Lamp
Pushbutton
“Colored illumination” describes LED models for which the screen color is white when the LED is not lit and changes to the color of the LED lamp
when the LED is lit.
Example: Red LED
Lit
Not lit
White
Red
White cap (semi-transparent)
Legend plate (milky white)
Reflective plunger
LED lamp (red)
Pushbutton
Lamp
Ordering: With colored-illumination models, order the Pushbutton, Lamp, and Switch as shown in the following table.
Illuminated color Pushbutton Lamp (LED) Switch
Red IP40
A3Cj-500W A16-jDR Enter one of the
following symbols in j.
5: 5 VDC
Refer to the following
information. Order the
Switch that is
Yellow Enter one of the
following symbols in j.
J: Rectangular
A16-jDY 5: 5 VDC
12: 12 VDC
24: 24 VDC
Switch that is
appropriate for the
Pushbutton.
Green J: Rectangular
A: Square
T: Round A16-jDG
24:
24
VDC
Pushbutton
.
A3C A3C
37
Ordering Individually
Pushbuttons, Lamps, and Switches can be ordered separately. Combinations that are not available as sets can be created using individual
Units. Also, store the parts as spares for maintenance and repairs.
Pushbuttons
LED Lamp
Button color Rectangular Square Round
Red A3CJ-500R A3CA-500R A3CT-500R
Yellow A3CJ-500Y A3CA-500Y A3CT-500Y
Green A3CJ-500GY A3CA-500GY A3CT-500GY
White A3CJ-500W A3CA-500W A3CT-500W
Note: The red, yellow, and white Pushbuttons listed above can be
used with either LED lamp-lighted models or incandescent
lamp-lighted models.
Incandescent Lamp
Button color Rectangular Square Round
Red A3CJ-500R A3CA-500R A3CT-500R
Yellow A3CJ-500Y A3CA-500Y A3CT-500Y
Green A3CJ-500G A3CA-500G A3CT-500G
White A3CJ-500W A3CA-500W A3CT-500W
Blue A3CJ-500A A3CA-500A A3CT-500A
Non-lighted Models
Button color Rectangular Square Round
Red A3CJ-500R A3CA-500R A3CT-500R
Yellow A3CJ-500Y A3CA-500Y A3CT-500Y
Green A3CJ-500G A3CA-500G A3CT-500G
White A3CJ-500W A3CA-500W A3CT-500W
Blue A3CJ-500A A3CA-500A A3CT-500A
Black A3CJ-501B A3CA-501B A3CT-501B
Lamps
LED Lamp
Color Rated voltage
5 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC
Red A16-5DR A16-12DR A16-24DR
Yellow A16-5DY A16-12DY A16-24DY
Green A16-5DG A16-12DG A16-24DG
White A16-5DW A16-12DW A16-24DW
Incandescent Lamp
Rated voltage 6 VAC/VDC 14 VAC/VDC 28 VAC/VDC
Model A16-5 A16-12 A16-24
Switches
Configuration Contact Switch action Terminal Degree of protection: IP40
g
Rectangular Square Round
Standard SPST-NO+
SPST NC
Momentary Solder A3CJ-7011 A3CA-7011 A3CT-7011
SPST-NC Alternate A3CJ-7021 A3CA-7021 A3CT-7021
Microload Momentary A3CJ-7111 A3CA-7111 A3CT-7111
Alternate A3CJ-7121 A3CA-7121 A3CT-7121
A3C A3C
38
Accessories (Order Separately)
Name Appearance Classification Model Remarks
Socket Wire-wrap terminal A3C-4101 Cannot be used with Insulation Cover.
PCB terminal A3C-4102
Solder terminal A3C-4103
Insulation
Cover --- A3C-3002 Cannot be used with Socket.
Switch
Guard For rectangular models A3CJ-5050 Cannot be used with Dust Cover.
For square, round models A3CA-5050
Dust Cover For rectangular models A3CJ-5060 Cannot be used with Switch Guard.
Tightening
Tool --- A3C-3004 The tightening torque is 0.20 to
0.39 Nm.
Extractor --- A3PJ-5080 ---
Legend
Plate For rectangular models A3CJ-5201 One Legend Plate is supplied per
standard Switch.
For square models A3CA-5201
For round models A3CT-5201
Specifications
Contact Ratings
Model Item
AC resistive load DC resistive load
Standard load 0.5 A at 250 VAC
1 A at 125 VAC 1 A at 30 VDC
Microload
(See note 1.) 0.1 A at 125 VAC 0.1 A at 30 VDC
Note: 1. The minimum permissible load is 1 mA, 5 VDC.
2. The above ratings are for testing under the following
conditions:
1) Load: Resistive load
2) Mounting conditions: No vibrations or shock
3) Temperature: 20°C ± 2°C
4) Operation frequency: 20 operations/minute
LED Lamp Ratings
Rated
voltage Rated
current Operating
voltage Internal
limiting
resistance
5 VDC 30 mA 5 VDC±5% 33
12 VDC 15 mA 12 VDC±5% 270
24 VDC 10 mA 24 VDC±5% 1,600
Incandescent Lamp Ratings
Rated voltage Rated current Operating voltage
6 VAC/VDC 60 mA 5 VAC/VDC
14 VAC/VDC 40 mA 12 VAC/VDC
28 VAC/VDC 24 mA 24 VAC/VDC
A3C A3C
39
Characteristics
Operating frequency Mechanical:
Momentary-action models: 120 operations/minute max.
Alternate-action models: 60 operations/minute max. (See note 1.)
Electrical: 20 operations/minute max.
Insulation resistance 100 M min. (at 500 VDC)
Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between terminals of same polarity and between lamp
terminals (See note 2.)
2,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between terminals of different polarity and also between
each terminal and ground
Vibration Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude (No malfunctions for more than 1 s.)
Shock Destruction: 500 m/s2
Malfunction: 150 m/s2 (No malfunctions for more than 1 s.)
Life expectancy Mechanical:
Momentary-action models: 1,000,000 operations min.
Alternate-action models: 100,000 operations min. (See note 1.)
Electrical: 100,000 operations min.
Weight Approx. 5 g (See note 3.)
Ambient operating temperature –10°C to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
Ambient operating humidity 35% to 85%
Ambient storage temperature –25°C to 65°C
Degree of protection IP40
Electric shock protection class Class II
PTI (proof tracking index) 175
Pollution degree 3 (IEC947-5-1)
Note: 1. With alternate-operation models, one operation cycle consists of set and reset operations.
2. The figure given above for the dielectric strength between lamp terminals is for when there is no LED lamp or incandescent lamp
mounted.
3. The weight indicated here applies to the lighted models (SPST-NO+SPST-NC).
Operating Characteristics
OF max. 2.45 N
RF min. 0.29 N
TT Approx. 3.5 mm
LTA min.
(See note.) 0.5 mm
PT max. 2.5 mm
Note: The value for L TA min. applies to alternate-operation mod-
els only.
Approved by Standards
UL (File No. E41515)
CSA (File No. LR45258-31)
Rating
Standard
1 A at 125 VAC
0.5 A at 250 VAC
1 A at 30 VDC
Microload
0.1 A at 125 VAC
0.1 A at 30 VDC
Contact Form
Contact name Contact form
SPDT NO
NC
NO
NC
A3C A3C
40
Nomenclature
Pushbutton
Shape of Pushbutton
Square
(A3CA) Round
(A3CT)
Rectangular
(A3CJ)
Color cap
Legend Plate (milky white)
Reflective
plunger
Color of Pushbutton
LED lamp-lighted Models:
Red, yellow, green, white
Incandescent lamp-lighted Models:
Red, yellow, green, white, blue
Non-lighted Models:
Red, ye l l o w, green, white, blue, black
Lamp
LED Lamp
Incandescent Lamp
Note: The A3CJ model is shown here as a representative example.
Switch
Standard load:
0.5 A at 250 VAC
1 A at 125 VAC
1 A at 30 VDC
Microload:
0.1 A at 125 VAC,
0.1 A at 30 VDC
Minimum applicable load: 1 mA at 5 VDC
A3C A3C
41
Dimensions
The following dimensions apply to the Switch with SPST-NO+SPST-NC contact configuration, with solder terminals.
Rectangular Models
A3CJ Square Models
A3CA
Round Models
A3CT
14 dia.11.8 dia.
A3C A3C
42
Accessory Mounting Dimensions
Dimensions with Socket Mounted
The diagrams below show the external dimensions for rectangular models as representative models.
Wire-wrap Terminal
A3C-4101 Solder Terminal
A3C-4103
PCB Terminal
A3C-4102
Terminal Hole Dimensions
PCB Cutout (bottom view)
Six, 0.8 dia.
13.9 dia. 13.9 dia.
13.9 dia.
9.7±0.1
7.4±0.1
5.1±0.1
Switch Guard
Rectangular
A3CJ-5050 Square/Round
A3CA-5050
Holder (black)
Guard (transparent)
Holder (black)
Guard (transparent)
Torsion spring
Torsion spring
Dust Cover
A3CJ-5060 Insulation Cover
A3C-3002
Legend Plate
Note: 1. The thickness is 0.8 mm.
2. Since the Legend Plate is made of
polycarbonate, use alcohol-based
paints such as melanin, phthalic
acid, or acryl paint when marking the
legend.
Cover B (black)
Cover A (transparent)
Rectangular Square Round
10.1 dia.
13.9 dia.
A3C A3C
43
Panel Cutout (Top View)
Accessories used Rectangular/A3CJ Square/A3CA, Round/A3CT
Switch only
Note: Recommended panel thickness: 1.0
to 3.2 mm.
12 dia.+0.2
02 dia. (Lock hole)
15 min.
19 min.
12 dia.+0.2
015 min.
Note: Recommended panel thickness: 1.0
to 3.2 mm.
With Switch Guard 12 dia.+0.2
02 dia.
19 min.
22.5 min. 12 dia.+0.2
0
19 min.
19 min.
With Dust Cover 12 dia.+0.2
02 dia.
19.5 min.
23.5 min.
---
Note: If the panel is to be finished (e.g., coated), make sure that the panel meets the specified dimensions after the coating.
Operation
Terminal Connections
Terminal Type
SPST-NO+SPST-NC
Solder terminal Lighted and non-lighted models
Terminal hole
(bottom view)
Lamp terminal
t0.3
A3C A3C
44
Installation
Mounting and Replacing the Pushbutton
Mounting Direction for the Pushbutton/Display and Lamp
Lighted Pushbutton Switch
Insert the Lamp (incandescent lamp or LED lamp) into the
Pushbutton so that the lamp guide fits into the wider gap
between the projections on the Pushbutton.
Indicator
With Indicators, the Lamp is inserted facing the opposite
direction (i.e., at 180°) to that for Lighted Pushbutton
Switches.
Groove of the Display
Note: 1. Push the projections on the Lamp into the grooves on
the Pushbutton/Display.
2. The Lamp for Lighted Pushbutton Switches moves, but
the Lamp for Indicators is fixed.
Mounting Direction for the Pushbutton/Display and Switch
Insert the Pushbutton/Display into the Switch so that the lamp guide
is aligned with the non-projecting part of the Switch.
Apply a pressure between 9.8 and 24.5 N.
Projection of the Switch
Note: 1. The mounting direction for Indicators is 180° to that for
Lighted Pushbutton Switches. Be sure to insert the Leg-
end Plate and other parts with the correct orientation.
2. If the terminals of the Lamp become bent, it may be
impossible to fit them into the lamp terminal holes.
Ensure that the terminals are straight when they are
inserted.
3. Take particular care about the mounting direction with
the round models (A3CT).
Removing the Pushbutton/Display
Hold the recessed portions on the cap of the Pushbutton and pull.
Recess
Note: Do not use tools such as pliers to remove the Pushbutton as
this may damage the cap.
Panel Mounting
Insert the Switch from the front of the panel. Mount the mounting nut
from the terminal end of the Switch and tighten it.
There are projections on the terminal end of the Switch which may,
depending o n the orientation, block the nut. In this case, turn the nut
until it is possible to mount it. Tighten the nut to a torque between
0.20 and 0.39 Nm.
If soldering is used, mount the mounting nut first. Lead wires and
mounds o f solder may make it impossible to mount the nut after sol-
dering.
Panel Mounting nut
Socket Mounting
After securing the Switch to the panel using the mounting nut, insert
the Socket into the Switch.
Align the positioning holes of the Socket with the projections of the
Switch before inserting the Socket.
Panel
Projection of the Switch
Positioning hole of the
Socket
A3C A3C
45
Mounting the Insulation Cover
After securing the Switch to the panel using the mounting nut, pass
the lead wires through the holes in the Insulation Cover and then
perform wiring. Hold the Insulation Cover so that the cylindrical hole
is facing the Switch, and insert the lead wires from the end with the
barriers.
After wiring is completed, mount the Insulation Cover by pushing it
into the Switch.
Insulation Cover attached to Switch
Switch terminal
Mounting the Dust Cover
1. The Dust Cover separates into 2 parts: the cap and the
mounting frame.
2. Insert the Switch into the mounting frame. (Align the lock
projection with the recess on the mounting frame.)
3. Insert the Switch in the state described in step 2 into the
panel. (Align the lock protrusion on the mounting frame with
the hole in the panel.)
4. Mount the mounting nut from the back of the panel and tighten
it.
5. Insert the cap into the mounting frame. Ensure that the entire
perimeter of the cap is properly inserted into the mounting
frame by pressing down on the cap from different directions.
Cap (transparent)
Switch Lock protrusions
Mounting frame Mounting nut
Panel
Mounting the Switch Guard
1. Insert the Switch into the Switch Guard.
2. Insert the Switch into the panel in the state described in step
1.
3. Mount the mounting nut from the back of the panel and tighten
it.
Holder (black)
Guard (transparent)
Mounting nut
Panel
A3C A3C
46
Precautions
Caution
Do not apply a voltage higher than the maximum rated operat-
ing voltage between the lamp terminals, as there is a risk that
the incandescent lamp or LED lamp will be damaged, and the
Pushbutton will be ejected.
When replacing the incandescent lamp, first turn OFF the
power supply, and then wait 10 minutes before performing re-
placement, as the lamp is still hot immediately after the power
is turned OFF, so there is a risk of burns.
Refer to the Common Precautions for Pushbutton Switches on
page 14.
Correct Use
Mounting
To prevent electric shock or a fire, always make sure that the power
is turned OFF before mounting, removing, or wiring the Switch, or
performing maintenance.
Do not tighten the mounting ring excessively using pliers or a similar
tool. Excessive tightening may damage the mounting ring. (T ighten-
ing torque: 0.20 to 0.39 Nm)
Wiring
When wiring, use wires of a size appropriate for the applied voltage
and carry current. Perform soldering correctly under the conditions
given below. Using the Switch with the wires soldered incorrectly
may cause the terminals to become abnormally hot and cause a fire.
1. Hand soldering: At 30 W within 5 seconds.
2. Dip soldering: At 240°C within 3 seconds.
Wait for one minute after soldering before exerting any external
force on the solder.
Use a non-corrosive rosin liquid for the flux.
Perform wiring so that the wire sheaths do not come into contact
with the Switch. If this is unavoidable, use wires that can withstand
temperatures of 100°C min.
After wiring to the Switch has been completed, ensure an appropri-
ate insulation distance.
Operating Environment
Do not use in locations that are subject to dust, oil, or metal filings as
these may penetrate the interior of the Switch and cause malfunc-
tion.
Using Microloads
Using a standard load switch for opening and closing a microload
circuit may cause wear on the contacts. Use the switch within the
operating range. (Refer to the diagram below.) Even when using mi-
croload models within the operating range shown below, if inrush
current occurs when the contact is opened or closed, it may cause
the contact surface to become rough, and so decrease life expec-
tancy. Therefore, insert a contact protection circuit where neces-
sary. The minimum applicable load is the N-level reference value.
This value indicates the malfunction reference level for the reliability
level o f 60% (λ 60) (conforming to JIS C5003). The equation, λ 60 =
0.5 x 1 0–4/times indicates that the estimated malfunction rate is less
than 1/2,000,000 with a reliability level of 60%.
Standard
load area
Microload
area
Invalid
area
Voltage (V)
Current (mA)
0.15 mA 26 mA 100 mA
150 mA
100 mA1 mA
30
24
12
5
0
LED
Resistance to limit the LED current is provided internally and so an
external resistance is not required.
Rated voltage Internal limiting resistance
5 VDC 33
12 VDC 270
24 VDC 1600
ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.
Cat. No. A030-E1-05
!
47
Indicator M2C
Indicator with Cylindrical 20-mm ×
12-dia. Body
Same basic design as the A3C Pushbutton Switch.
Good illumination with even surface brightness.
Cylindrical body means panel cutouts can be made
easily.
UL (E41515) and CSA (LR45258) approved.
RC
Ordering Information
Model Number Legend:
The model numbers used to order sets of Units are illustrated below. One set comprises the Display, Lamp, and Socket Unit.
M 2 C J - 9 0 A 1 - 24E R
(1) (2) (4)
(1) Shape of Display
Symbol Shape
J Rectangular
A Square
T Round
(3) (5)
(2) Terminal Type
Symbol Terminal type
0 Solder terminals
“Colored-illumination”
models operate in the
way shown below:
Unlit Lit
White Color
The built-in LED
is colored.
(3) Lighting Type
Symbol Lighting type
Colored-illumination models
are also available. For details,
refer to page 49.
(4) Lighting Method
Symbol Operating voltage
05E 5 VDC
12E 12 VDC
24E 24 VDC
LED lamp-lighted Models
Incandescent Lamp-
lighted Models
Symbol Operating voltage
06 5 VAC/VDC
14 12 VAC/VDC
28 24 VAC/VDC
(5) Color of Display
Symbol Color
R Red
Y Yellow
G Green
W White
For LED lamp
Symbol Color
R Red
Y Yellow
G Green
A Blue
W White
For incandescent lamp
1 Illumination only
M2C M2C
48
List of Models
Appearance Model
Rectangular M2CJ
Square M2CA
Round M2CT
Ordering as a Set
The model numbers used to order sets of Units are given in the following tables. One set comprises the Display, Lamp, and Socket Unit.
Rectangular Models Square Models Round Models
Indicators (Solder Terminals)
Appearance Lighting Model number (for set) Display color symbol
Rectangular (M2CJ) LED lamp M2CJ-90A1-05EjR: red
Y ello
g( )
p
M2CJ-90A1-12EjY: yellow
G:
g
reen
M2CJ-90A1-24Ej
G:
green
W: white
Incandescent lamp M2CJ-90A1-06jR: red
Y: yellow
M2CJ-90A1-14j
Y
: ye
ll
ow
G: green
W: white
M2CJ-90A1-28jW: white
A: blue
Square (M2CA) LED lamp M2CA-90A1-05EjR: red
Y ello
q( )
p
M2CA-90A1-12EjY: yellow
G:
g
reen
M2CA-90A1-24Ej
G:
green
W: white
Incandescent lamp M2CA-90A1-06jR: red
Y: yellow
M2CA-90A1-14j
Y
: ye
ll
ow
G: green
W: white
M2CA-90A1-28jW: white
A: blue
Round (M2CT) LED lamp M2CT-90A1-05EjR: red
Y ello
()
p
M2CT-90A1-12EjY: yellow
G:
g
reen
M2CT-90A1-24Ej
G:
green
W: white
Incandescent lamp M2CT-90A1-06jR: red
Y: yellow
M2CT-90A1-14j
Y
: ye
ll
ow
G: green
W: white
M2CT-90A1-28jW: white
A: blue
Note: Enter the desired color symbol for the Display in the j at the end of the model number.
M2C M2C
49
Illumination-only and Colored-illumination LED Models
“Illumination only” describes LED models for which the screen color is the same whether the LED is lit or not. The screen simply becomes
brighter when the LED lights.
Example: Red LED
Lit
Not lit
Red
Red
Cap (red)
Legend plate (milky white)
Reflective plunger
LED lamp (red) Lamp
Display
“Colored illumination” describes LED models for which the screen color is white when the LED is not lit and changes to the color of the LED lamp
when the LED is lit.
Example: Red LED
Lit
Not lit
White
Red
White cap (semi-transparent)
Legend plate (milky white)
Reflective plunger
LED lamp (red)
Display
Lamp
Ordering: With colored-illumination models, order the Display, Lamp, and Socket Unit as shown in the following table.
Illuminated color Display Lamp (LED) Socket Unit
Red IP40
A3Cj-500W A16-jDR Enter one of the
following symbols in j.
5: 5 VDC
Refer to the following
information. Order the
Socket Unit that is
Yellow Enter one of the
following symbols in j.
J: Rectangular
A16-jDY 5: 5 VDC
12: 12 VDC
24: 24 VDC
Socket Unit that is
appropriate for the
Display.
Green J: Rectangular
A: Square
T: Round A16-jDG
24:
24
VDC
Display
.
M2C M2C
50
Ordering Individually
Displays, Lamps, and Socket Units can be ordered separately. Combinations that are not available as sets can be created using individual
Units. Also, store the parts as spares for maintenance and repairs.
Display
Rectangular Square Round
Lamp
LED Lamp Incandescent lamp
Socket Unit
Rectangular Square Round
M2C M2C
51
Display (Lighted Models)
LED Lamp
Button color Rectangular Square Round
Red A3CJ-500R A3CA-500R A3CT-500R
Yellow A3CJ-500Y A3CA-500Y A3CT-500Y
Green A3CJ-500GY A3CA-500GY A3CT-500GY
White A3CJ-500W A3CA-500W A3CT-500W
Note: The red, yellow, and white Displays listed above can be
used with either LED lamp-lighted models or incandescent
lamp-lighted models.
Incandescent Lamp
Button color Rectangular Square Round
Red A3CJ-500R A3CA-500R A3CT-500R
Yellow A3CJ-500Y A3CA-500Y A3CT-500Y
Green A3CJ-500G A3CA-500G A3CT-500G
White A3CJ-500W A3CA-500W A3CT-500W
Blue A3CJ-500A A3CA-500A A3CT-500A
Lamp
LED Lamp
Color Rated voltage
5 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC
Red A16-5DR A16-12DR A16-24DR
Yellow A16-5DY A16-12DY A16-24DY
Green A16-5DG A16-12DG A16-24DG
White A16-5DW A16-12DW A16-24DW
Incandescent Lamp
Rated voltage Model
6 VAC/VDC A16-5
14 VAC/VDC A16-12
28 VAC/VDC A16-24
Socket Unit
Sealing IP40
Appearance
Terminal
Solder terminals M2CJ-7001 M2CA-7001 M2CT-7001
Accessories
The accessories for the A3C Lighted Pushbutton Switch can also be used with the M2C. Refer to page 38.
Specifications
Ratings
LED Lamp
Rated
voltage Rated
current Operating
voltage Internal
limiting
resistance
5 VDC 30 mA 5 VDC ±5% 33
12 VDC 15 mA 12 VDC ±5% 270
24 VDC 10 mA 24 VDC ±5% 1,600
Incandescent Lamp
Rated voltage Rated current Operating voltage
6 VAC/VDC 60 mA 5 VAC/VDC
14 VAC/VDC 40 mA 12 VAC/VDC
28 VAC/VDC 24 mA 24 VAC/VDC
Characteristics
Ambient operating temperature –10_C to 55_C (with no icing or condensation)
Ambient operating humidity 35% to 85%
Ambient storage temperature –25_C to 65_C
Approved Standards
UL, CSA
M2C M2C
52
Nomenclature
Color cap
Legend plate (milky white)
Reflective plunger
Display
Shape of Display
Square
(M2CA) Round
(M2CT)
Rectangular
(M2CJ)
Color of Display
LED Lamp-lighted Models:
Red, yellow, green, white
Incandescent Lamp-lighted Models:
Red, yellow, green, white, blue
Socket Unit
Note: The M2CJ model is shown here as a representative example.
Lamp
LED Lamp
Incandescent Lamp
M2C M2C
53
Dimensions
Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
Rectangular Models
(M2CJ)
Square Models
(M2CA) Round Models
(M2CT)
14 dia.11.8 dia.
Note: Unless specified, there is a tolerance of ±0.4 mm for dimensions.
Operation
Panel Cutout (Top View)
Accessories used Rectangular/M2CJ Square/M2CA, Round/M2CT
Indicator Unit only
Note: Recommended panel thickness: 1.0
to 3.2 mm.
12 dia.+0.2
02 dia. (Lock hole)
15 min.
19 min. 15 min.
Note: Recommended panel thickness: 1.0
to 3.2 mm.
12 dia.+0.2
0
With Dust Cover 12 dia.+0.2
02 dia.
19.5 min.
23.5 min.
---
Note: If the panel is to be finished (e.g., coated), make sure that the panel meets the specified dimensions after the coating.
Terminal Connections
Terminal Type
SPST-NO+SPST-NC
Solder terminal
Terminal Hole Dimensions
Lamp terminal (t0.3)
Terminal Arrangement
(bottom view)
Lighted and non-lighted models
M2C M2C
54
Precautions
Correct Use
Refer to the Common Precautions for Pushbutton Switches on page 14.
Refer to Correct Use for A3C on page 46.
ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.
Cat. No. A123-E1-02
55
Pushbutton Switch
A16
Mounting Aperture of 16 mm
Modular construction
(Pushbutton + Case + Lamp + Switch)
Wide Variety of Control and Signal De vice s: Lighted, Non-L ight-
ed, and Buzzer
UL and cUL approved.
Conforms to EN60947-5-1, IEC947-5-1
Quick and easy assembly, snap-in Switch.
Wide range of switching capacity from standard to microload
High reliability, IP65
Short mounting depth, less than 28.5 mm below panel
Model Number Structure
Model Number Legend
Completely Assembled
The model numbers used to order sets of Units are illustrated below. One set compr ises the Pushbutton, Lamp (lighted models only), Case, and
Switch.
A 1 6 5 L - J R M - 24D - 2
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
(1) Degree of Protection
Symbol Protection
5 IP65 oil-resistant
Unlit Lit
White Color
(4) Color of Pushbutton
Symbol Color
R Red
Y Yellow
PY Pure yellow
G Green
W White
A Blue
(3) Shape of Pushbutton
Symbol Shape
J Rectangular 2-way guard
A Square 2-way guard
T Round Projecting model
(2) Lighted/Non-lighted
Symbol
No symbol
(5) Switch Operation
Symbol Operation
M Momentary
A Alternate
(7) Contact Configuration
Symbol Type Terminal
1 SPDT
2 DPDT
1P SPDT
2P DPDT
2S DPDT
(6) Light Source
5 5 V A C/VDC 6 V AC/VDC
12 12 V A C/VDC 14 V AC/VDC
24 24 V A C/VDC 28 V AC/VDC
5D 5 ±5% VDC 5 VDC
12D LED 12 ±5% VDC 12 VDC
24D 24 ±5% VDC 24 VDC
Non-lighted
Voltage Reduction Unit (24-V Built-in LED)
T1 90 to 121 VAC/VDC 110 VAC
T2 180 to 242 VAC/VDC 220 VAC
LED
Symbol Type
No symbol
Symbol Type
Type
Non-lighted
L Lighted
No symbol IP40
B Black (non-lighted
models only)
"Colored-illumination" models
operate in the way shown below:
The built-in LED
is colored.
Momentary-action: Self-resetting
Alternate-action: Self-holding
Solder
Terminal
PCB
Terminal
Screw-Less
Clamp
Only DPDT contacts are available
with Screw-Less Clamp.
Operating
voltage
Incandescent
lamp
Operating voltage
Note: 1. Solder terminals are available only with 100-V
models.
2. The Voltage Reduction Unit is not available for
models with PCB terminals.
Rated
voltage
Rated
voltage
3. "T2" is available only for the Screw-Less Clamp
type.
56
Neon lamps are not available with models that are ordered as a set. They must be ordered individually if required. Refer to page 62.
Note: There is no Lamp with non-lighted models.
Subassembled
1. Pushbutton
Non-lighted/Lighted
1. Degree of Protection
None:IP40
5: IP65
2. Flange Shape
J: Rectangular
T: Round
A: Square
3. Illumination Color for Non-lighted Models
R: Red
G: Green
Y: Yellow
W: White
A: Blue
B: Black
Illumination Color for Lighted Models
LED/Incandescent Lamp
R: Red
Y: Yellow
PY: Pure yellow
W: White
A: Blue
LED
GY: Green
Incandescent Lamp
G: Green
Model Lighted Pushbutton Switches Non-lighted Pushbutton Switches
Pushbutton
Lamp
Case
Switch
Rectangular
Square
Round
Rectangular
Square
Round
LED lamp Incandescent lamp
Solder Terminals
(Without Voltage Reduction Unit)
A16@L-@@
1 2 3
57
2. Lamp
1. Operating Voltage (Rated Voltage)
Incandescent Lamp
5: 5 VAC/VDC (6 VAC/VDC)
12: 12 VAC/VDC (14 VAC/VDC)
24: 24 VAC/VDC (28 VAC/VDC)
LED
5DS: 5 VDC (5 VD C)
12DS:12 VDC (12 VDC)
24DS:24 VDC (24 VDC)
2. Illumination Color
None:Incandescent Lamp
R: Red (LED)
G: Green (LED)
Y: Yellow (LED)
W: White (LED)
A: Blue (LED)
3. Case
1. Degree of Protection
None:IP40
5: IP65 Oil-resistant
2. Flange Shape
CJ: Rectangular
CT: Round
CA: Square
3. Switch Action
M: Momentary
A: Alternate
4. Switch (Solder Terminals)
1. Voltage Reduction Circuit
(Operating Voltage/Rated Voltage)
None:Without Voltage Reduction Unit
T1: 100 VAC/110 VAC
2. Contacts
1: SPDT
2: DPDT
5. Socket (Solder Terminals Only)
1. Voltage Reduction Circuit
(Operating Voltage/Rated Voltage)
0: Without Voltage Reduction Unit
T1: 100 VAC/110 VAC
A16-@@
1 2
A16@-@@
1 2 3
A16-@-@
1 2
M16-@
1
58
Ordering Information
List of Models
Ordering as a Set
The model numbers used to order set s of Units are given in the following tables. One set com pr ises t he Pushbutton, Lamp (lighted models only),
Case, and Switch.
A16@-J (Rectangular) Models
Solder Terminal Models
IP40
IP65 Oil-resistant
Note: 1. Enter the desired color symbol for the Pushbutton in the @.
2. Black (“B”) Pushbuttons are only available for non-lighted models.
Output Lighting Operating
voltage Momentary operation
(Self-resetting) Alternate operation (Self-holding) Pushbutton color
symbol (See note 1.)
SPDT LED
without Voltage
Reduction Unit
5 VDC A16L-J @M-5D-1 A16L-J@A- 5D-1 R: red
Y: yellow
PY: pure yello w
G: green
A: blue
W: white
12 VDC A16L-J@M-12D-1 A16L-J@A-12D-1
24 VDC A16L-J@M-24D-1 A16L-J@A-24D-1
Incandescent
lamp 5 VDC/VAC A16L-J @M-5-1 A16L-J@A- 5-1 R : red
Y: yellow
PY: pure yello w
G: green
W: white
A: blue
B: black (See note 2.)
12 VDC/VAC A16L-J@M-12-1 A16L-J@A-12-1
24 VDC/VAC A16L-J@M-24-1 A16L-J@A-24-1
Non-lighted A16-J@M-1 A16-J@A-1
DPDT LED
without Voltage
Reduction Unit
5 VDC A16L-J @M-5D-2 A16L-J@A- 5D-2 R: red
Y: yellow
PY: pure yello w
G: green
A: blue
W: white
12 VDC A16L-J@M-12D-2 A16L-J@A-12D-2
24 VDC A16L-J@M-24D-2 A16L-J@A-24D-2
Incandescent
lamp 5 VDC/VAC A16L-J @M-5-2 A16L-J@A- 5-2 R : red
Y: yellow
PY: pure yello w
G: green
W: white
A: blue
B: black (See note 2.)
12 VDC/VAC A16L-J@M-12-2 A16L-J@A-12-2
24 VDC/VAC A16L-J@M-24-2 A16L-J@A-24-2
Non-lighted A16-J@M-2 A16-J@A-2
Output Lighting Operating
voltage Momentary operation
(Self-resetting) Alternate operation (Self-holding) Pushbutton color
symbol (See note 1.)
SPDT LED
without Voltage
Reduction Unit
5 VDC A165L-J@M-5D-1 A165L-J@A-5D-1 R : red
Y: yellow
PY: pure yello w
G: green
A: blue
W: white
12 VDC A165L-J@M-12D-1 A165L-J@A-12D-1
24 VDC A165L-J@M-24D-1 A165L-J@A-24D-1
Incandescent
lamp 5 VDC/VAC A165L- J@M-5-1 A165L-J@A-5-1 R: red
Y: yellow
PY: pure yello w
G: green
W: white
A: blue
B: black (See note 2.)
12 VDC/VAC A165L-J@M-12-1 A165L-J@A-12-1
24 VDC/VAC A165L-J@M-24-1 A165L-J@A-24-1
Non-lighted A165-J@M-1 A165-J@A-1
DPDT LED
without Voltage
Reduction Unit
5 VDC A165L-J@M-5D-2 A165L-J@A-5D-2 R : red
Y: yellow
PY: pure yello w
G: green
A: blue
W: white
12 VDC A165L-J@M-12D-2 A165L-J@A-12D-2
24 VDC A165L-J@M-24D-2 A165L-J@A-24D-2
Incandescent
lamp 5 VDC/VAC A165L- J@M-5-2 A165L-J@A-5-2 R: red
Y: yellow
PY: pure yello w
G: green
W: white
A: blue
B: black (See note 2.)
12 VDC/VAC A165L-J@M-12-2 A165L-J@A-12-2
24 VDC/VAC A165L-J@M-24-2 A165L-J@A-24-2
Non-lighted A165-J@M-2 A165-J@A-2
59
A16@-A (Square) Models
Solder Terminal Models
IP40
IP65 Oil-resistant
Note: 1. Enter the desired color symbol for the Pushbutton in the @.
2. Black (“B”) Pushbuttons are only available for non-lighted models.
Output Lighting Operating
voltage Momentary operation
(Self-resetting) Alternate operation (Self-holding) Pushbutton color
symbol (See note 1.)
SPDT LED
without Voltage
Reduction Unit
5 VDC A 16L-A@M-5D-1 A16L-A@A-5D-1 R: red
Y: yellow
PY: pure yellow
G: green
A: blue
W: white
12 VDC A 16L-A@M-12D-1 A16L-A@A-12D-1
24 VDC A 16L-A@M-24D-1 A16L-A@A-24D-1
Incandescent
lamp 5 VDC/VAC A 16L-A@M-5-1 A16L-A@A-5-1 R: red
Y: yellow
PY: pure yellow
G: green
W: white
A: blue
B: black (See note 2.)
12 VDC/VAC A 16L-A@M-12-1 A16L-A@A-12-1
24 VDC/VAC A 16L-A@M-24-1 A16L-A@A-24-1
Non-lighted A16-A@M-1 A16-A@A-1
DPDT LED
without Voltage
Reduction Unit
5 VDC A 16L-A@M-5D-2 A16L-A@A-5D-2 R: red
Y: yellow
PY: pure yellow
G: green
A: blue
W: white
12 VDC A 16L-A@M-12D-2 A16L-A@A-12D-2
24 VDC A 16L-A@M-24D-2 A16L-A@A-24D-2
Incandescent
lamp 5 VDC/VAC A 16L-A@M-5-2 A16L-A@A-5-2 R: red
Y: yellow
PY: pure yellow
G: green
W: white
A: blue
B: black (See note 2.)
12 VDC/VAC A 16L-A@M-12-2 A16L-A@A-12-2
24 VDC/VAC A 16L-A@M-24-2 A16L-A@A-24-2
Non-lighted A16-A@M-2 A16-A@A-2
Output Lighting Operating
voltage Momentary operation
(Self-resetting) Alternate operation (Self-holding) Pushbutton color
symbol (See note 1.)
SPDT LED
without Voltage
Reduction Unit
5 VDC A165L-A@M-5D-1 A165L-A@A-5D-1 R: red
Y: yellow
PY: pure yellow
G: green
A: blue
W: white
12 VDC A165L-A@M-12D-1 A165L-A@A-12D-1
24 VDC A165L-A@M-24D-1 A165L-A@A-24D-1
Incandescent
lamp 5 VDC/VAC A165L-A@M-5-1 A165L-A@A-5-1 R: red
Y: yellow
PY: pure yellow
G: green
W: white
A: blue
B: black (See note 2.)
12 VDC/VAC A165L-A@M-12-1 A165L-A@A-12-1
24 VDC/VAC A165L-A@M-24-1 A165L-A@A-24-1
Non-lighted A165-A@M-1 A165-A@A-1
DPDT LED
without Voltage
Reduction Unit
5 VDC A165L-A@M-5D-2 A165L-A@A-5D-2 R: red
Y: yellow
PY: pure yellow
G: green
A: blue
W: white
12 VDC A165L-A@M-12D-2 A165L-A@A-12D-2
24 VDC A165L-A@M-24D-2 A165L-A@A-24D-2
Incandescent
lamp 5 VDC/VAC A165L-A@M-5-2 A165L-A@A-5-2 R: red
Y: yellow
PY: pure yellow
G: green
W: white
A: blue
B: black (See note 2.)
12 VDC/VAC A165L-A@M-12-2 A165L-A@A-12-2
24 VDC/VAC A165L-A@M-24-2 A165L-A@A-24-2
Non-lighted A165-A@M-2 A165-A@A-2
60
A16@-T (Round) Models
Solder Terminals
IP40
IP65 Oil-resistant
Note: 1. Enter the desired color symbol for the Pushbutton in the @.
2. Black (“B”) Pushbuttons are only available for non-lighted models.
Output Lighting Operating
voltage Momentary operation
(Self-resetting) Alternate operation (Self-holding) Pushbutton color
symbol (See note 1.)
SPDT LED
without Voltage
Reduction Unit
5 VDC A16L-T@M-5D-1 A16L-T@A-5D-1 R: red
Y: yellow
PY: pure yellow
G: green
A: blue
W: white
12 VDC A16L-T@M-12D-1 A16L-T@A-12D-1
24 VDC A16L-T@M-24D-1 A16L-T@A-24D-1
Incandescent
lamp 5 VDC/VAC A16L-T@M-5-1 A16L-T@A-5-1 R: red
Y: yellow
PY: pure yellow
G: green
W: white
A: blue
B: black (See note 2.)
12 VDC/VAC A16L-T@M-12-1 A16L-T@A-12-1
24 VDC/VAC A16L-T@M-24-1 A16L-T@A-24-1
Non-lighted A16-T@M-1 A16-T@A-1
DPDT LED
without Voltage
Reduction Unit
5 VDC A16L-T@M-5D-2 A16L-T@A-5D-2 R: red
Y: yellow
PY: pure yellow
G: green
A: blue
W: white
12 VDC A16L-T@M-12D-2 A16L-T@A-12D-2
24 VDC A16L-T@M-24D-2 A16L-T@A-24D-2
Incandescent
lamp 5 VDC/VAC A16L-T@M-5-2 A16L-T@A-5-2 R: red
Y: yellow
PY: pure yellow
G: green
W: white
A: blue
B: black (See note 2.)
12 VDC/VAC A16L-T@M-12-2 A16L-T@A-12-2
24 VDC/VAC A16L-T@M-24-2 A16L-T@A-24-2
Non-lighted A16-T@M-2 A16-T@A-2
Output Lighting Operating
voltage Momentary operation
(Self-resetting) Alternate operation (Self-holding) Pushbutton color
symbol (See note 1.)
SPDT LED
without Voltage
Reduction Unit
5 VDC A165L-T@M-5D-1 A165L-T@A- 5D-1 R: red
Y: y ellow
PY: pure yellow
G: green
A: blue
W: white
12 VDC A165L-T@M-12D-1 A165L-T@A-12D-1
24 VDC A165L-T@M-24D-1 A165L-T@A-24D-1
Incandescent
lamp 5 VDC/VAC A165L-T@M-5-1 A165L-T@A- 5-1 R : red
Y: y ellow
PY: pure yellow
G: green
W: white
A: blue
B: black (See note 2.)
12 VDC/VAC A165L-T@M-12-1 A165L-T@A-12-1
24 VDC/VAC A165L-T@M-24-1 A165L-T@A-24-1
Non-lighted A165-T@M-1 A165-T@A-1
DPDT LED
without Voltage
Reduction Unit
5 VDC A165L-T@M-5D-2 A165L-T@A- 5D-2 R: red
Y: y ellow
PY: pure yellow
G: green
A: blue
W: white
12 VDC A165L-T@M-12D-2 A165L-T@A-12D-2
24 VDC A165L-T@M-24D-2 A165L-T@A-24D-2
Incandescent
lamp 5 VDC/VAC A165L-T@M-5-2 A165L-T@A- 5-2 R : red
Y: y ellow
PY: pure yellow
G: green
W: white
A: blue
B: black (See note 2.)
12 VDC/VAC A165L-T@M-12-2 A165L-T@A-12-2
24 VDC/VAC A165L-T@M-24-2 A165L-T@A-24-2
Non-lighted A165-T@M-2 A165-T@A-2
61
Other Models
Models with Reduced-voltage Lighting and Solder Terminals
IP40
IP65
Note: 1. Enter the desired shape for the Pushbutton in : J (rectangular), A (square), or T (round). En ter the desired colo r symbol for the Push-
button in the @.
2. Models with rated voltage 200 to 220 VAC/VDC (T2 models) are only available with Screw-Less Clamps.
Screw-Less Clamp Models
IP40
IP65
Note: 1. Enter the desired shape for the Pushbutton in : J (rectangular), A (square), or T (round). En ter the desired colo r symbol for the Push-
button in the @.
2. Black (“B”) Pushbuttons are only available for non-lighted models.
Output Lighting Operating voltage Momentary
operation
(Self-resetting)
Alternate operation
(Self-holding) Pushbutton color
symbol (See note 1.)
SPDT LED (with built-in re-
duced-voltage lighting
function)
100/110 VAC/VDC A16L-@M-T1-1 A16L-@A-T1-1 R: red
Y: yellow
PY: pure yellow
G: green
W: white
A: blue
DPDT 100/110 VAC/VDC A16L-@M-T1-2 A16L-@A-T1-2
Output Lighting Operating voltage Momentary
operation
(Self-resetting)
Alternate operation
(Self-holding) Pushbutton color
symbol (See note 1.)
SPDT LED (with built-in re-
duced-voltage lighting
function)
100/110 VAC/VDC A165L-@M-T1-1 A165L-@A-T1-1 R: red
Y: yellow
PY: pure yellow
G: green
W: white
A: blue
DPDT 100/110 VAC/VDC A165L-@M-T1-2 A165L-@A-T1-2
Output Lighting Operating voltage Momentary operation
(Self-resetting) Alternate operation
(Self-holding) Pushbutton color
symbol (See note 1.)
DPDT LED 5 VDC A16L-@M-5D-2S A16L-@A-5D-2S R: red
Y: y ellow
PY: pure yellow
G: green
W: white
A: blue
B: black (See note 2.)
12 VDC A16L-@M-12D-2S A16L-@A-12D-2S
24 VDC A16L-@M-24D-2S A16L-@A-24D-2S
LED (with built-in re-
duced-voltage lighting
function)
100/110 VAC/VDC A16L-@M-T1-2S A16L-@A-T1-2S
200/220 VAC/VDC A16L-@M-T2-2S A16L-@A-T2-2S
Non-lighted A16-@M-2S A16-@A-2S
Output Lighting Operating voltage Momentary operation
(Self-resetting) Alternate operation
(Self-holding) Pushbutton color
symbol (See note 1.)
DPDT LED 5 VDC A165L-@M-5D-2S A165L-@A- 5D-2S R: red
Y: y ellow
PY: pure yellow
G: green
W: white
A: blue
B: black (See note 2.)
12 VDC A165L-@M-12D-2S A165L-@A-12D-2S
24 VDC A165L-@M-24D-2S A165L-@A-24D-2S
LED (with built-in re-
duced-voltage light-
ing function)
100/110 VAC/VDC A165L-@M-T1-2S A165L-@A-T1-2S
200/220 VAC/VDC A165L-@M-T2-2S A165L-@A-T2-2S
Non-lighted A165-@M-2S A165-@A-2S
62
Ordering Individually
Pushbuttons, Lamps, Cases, and Switches (Sock ets) can be ordered separately. Combinations that are not a vailable as sets can be created using
individual Units. Also , store the parts as spares f or maintenance and repairs.
Lamp
Lighted Models Non-lighted Models
Case
Socket
LED
Solder terminals
(no transformer)
Lighted/non-lighted
Pushbutton
Rectangular Models Square Models Round Models
Note: Use IP40 Pushbuttons with IP40 Switches and
use IP65 Pushbuttons with IP65 Switches. There
is no Legend Plate built into the Pushbutton
Incandescent
lamp
63
Pushbuttons
Illumination: red, yellow, and white use either LED or incandescent lamps.
LED
Incandescent Lamps (With the exception of green, the Units are the same as for LEDs.)
Non-lighted (Same as Units for incandescent lamps.)
Degree of protection
Color
IP40 Oil-resistant IP65
Red A16L-JR A16L-AR A16L-TR A165L-JR A165L-AR A165L-TR
Yellow A16L-JY A16L-AY A16L-TY A165L-JY A165L-AY A165L-TY
Pure yellow A16L-JPY A16L-APY A16L-TPY A165L-JPY A165L-APY A165L-TPY
Green A16L-JGY A16L-AGY A16L-TGY A165L-JGY A165L-AGY A165L-TGY
White A16L-JW A16L-AW A16L-TW A165L-JW A165L-AW A165L-TW
Blue A16L-JA A16L-AA A16L-TA A165L-JA A165L-AA A165L-TA
Degree of protection
Color
IP40 Oil-resistant IP65
Red A16L-JR A16L-AR A16L-TR A165L-JR A165L-AR A165L-TR
Yellow A16L-JY A16L-AY A16L-TY A165L-JY A165L-AY A165L-TY
Pure yellow A16L-JPY A16L-APY A16L-TPY A165L-JPY A165L-APY A165L-TPY
Green A16L-JG A16L-AG A16L-TG A165L-JG A165L-AG A165L-TG
White A16L-JW A16L-AW A16L-TW A165L-JW A165L-AW A165L-TW
Blue A16L-JA A16L-AA A16L-TA A165L-JA A165L-AA A165L-TA
Rectangular Square Round Rectangular Square Round
Rectangular Square Round Rectangular Square Round
Degree of protection
Color
IP40 Oil-resistant IP65
Red A16L-JR A16L-AR A16L-TR A165L-JR A165L-AR A165L-TR
Yellow A16L-JY A16L-AY A16L-TY A165L-JY A165L-AY A165L-TY
Pure yellow A16L-JPY A16L-APY A16L-TPY A165L-JPY A165L-APY A165L-TPY
Green A16L-JG A16L-AG A16L-TG A165L-JG A165L-AG A165L-TG
White A16L-JW A16L-AW A16L-TW A165L-JW A165L-AW A165L-TW
Blue A16L-JA A16L-AA A16L-TA A165L-JA A165L-AA A165L-TA
Black A16L-JB A16L-AB A16L-TB A165L-JB A165L-AB A165L-TB
Rectangular Square Round Rectangular Square Round
64
Switches
Switches with Reduced-voltage Lighting
Lamps
LED
Note: Use the white LED together with white or pure yello w Pushb utt ons.
Incandescent Lamp
Appearance Classification Model
Lighted/non-lighted (com-
mon use) Standard load/microload
(common use) SPDT Solder term inal A16-1
DPDT A16-2
SPDT PCB terminal A16-1P
DPDT A16-2P
DPDT Screw-Less Clamp A16-2S
Appearance Classification Model
100 V Standard load/microload
(common use) SPDT Solder terminal A16-T1-1
DPDT A16-T1-2
100 V DPDT Screw-less clamp A16-T1-2 S
200 V A16-T2-2S
5 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC
Red A16-5DSR A16-12DSR A16-24DSR
Yellow A16-5DSY A16-12DSY A16-24DSY
Green A16-5DSG A16-12DSG A16-24DSG
White (See note.) A16-5DSW A16-12DSW A16-24DSW
Blue A16-5DA A16-12DA A16-24DA
Operating voltage
Light color
5 VAC/VDC 12 VAC/VDC 24 VAC/VDC
Model A16-5 A16-12 A16-24
Operating voltage
65
Cases
Accessories (Order Separately)
Accessories
Appearance Classification Model
IP40 Momentary operation Rectangular (2-way guard) A16-CJM
Square A16-CAM
Round A16-CTM
Alternate operation Rectangular (2-way guard) A16-CJA
Square A16-CAA
Round A16-CTA
Oil-resistant IP65 Momentary operation R ec tangular (2-way guard) A165-CJM
Square A165-CAM
Round A165-CTM
Alternate operation Rectangular (2-way guard) A165-CJA
Square A165-CAA
Round A165-CTA
Name Appearance Classification Model Remarks
Switch Guards For rectangular models A16ZJ-5050 Cannot be used with the Dust Cover.
For square and round models A16ZA-5050
Dust Covers For rectangular models A16ZJ-5060 Cannot be used with the Switch Guard.
For square models A16ZA-5060
For round models A16ZT-5060
Panel Plugs F or rectangular models A16ZJ-3003 Used for cov ering the panel cutouts f or
future panel expansion.
Protective structure: IP40
Color: Black
For square models A16ZA-3003
For round models A16ZT-3003
66
Replacements
Tools
Name Appearance Classification Model Remarks
Legend Plates Rectangular IP40 Milky A16ZJ-5204 A single Legend Plate (transparent) is
included with a standard model.
The milky Legend Plate can be used
with the IP40 and oil-resistant IP65.
Transparent A16ZJ-5202
Oil-resis-
tant IP65 Milky A16ZJ-5204
Transparent A16ZJ-5203
Square IP40 Milky A16ZA-5204
Transparent A16ZA-5202
Oil-resis-
tant IP65 Milky A16ZA-5204
Transparent A16ZA-5203
Round IP40 Milky A16ZT-5204
Transparent A16ZT-5202
Oil-resis-
tant IP65 Milky A16ZT-5204
Transparent A16ZT-5203
Color Caps
(for IP40) LED indicator/incan-
descent lamp/non-
lighted
White A16Z@-5001W Insert one of the following letters into
the box (@).
J: Rectangular
A: Square
T: Round
The Color Cap is usually supplied. Re-
place the Cap if the color is to be
changed.
When using an LED indicator, be sure
to use a Color Cap that matches the lu-
minescent color of the LED.
The materials used for the IP40 and
oil-resistant IP65 are different so be
sure to use a Color Cap that matches
the specifications of the Switch.
Red A16Z@-5001R
Yellow A16Z@-5001Y
Pure yellow A16Z@-5001PY
Blue A16Z@-5001A
LED indicator Green A16Z@-5001GY
Incandescent lamp/
non-lighted Green A16Z@-5001G
Non-lighted Black A16Z@-5011B
Color Caps
(for oil-resistant
IP65)
LED indicator/incan-
descent lamp/non-
lighted
White A16Z@-5101W
Red A16Z@-5101R
Yellow A16Z@-5101Y
Pure yellow A16Z@-5101PY
Blue A16Z@-5101A
LED indicator Green A16Z@-5101GY
Incandescent lamp/
non-lighted Green A16Z@-5101G
Non-lighted Black A16Z@-5111B
Rectangular
Square
Round
Name Appearance Model Applicable types Remarks
Pushbutton
Switch Knob-type
Selector
Switch
Key-type
Selector
Switch
Emergency
Stop Switch Indicator
Extractor A3PJ-5080 Yes No No No Yes Convenient f or ex-
tracting Pushbut-
ton Switches
Screw Fitting A16Z-3004 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Convenient for
ganged installa-
tion.
Tighten to a torque
of 0.39 N m min.
Extractor A16Z-5080 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Con venient f or ex-
tracting the Switch
and Lamps.
67
Specifications
Approved Standards
Note: cUL: CSA, C22.2 No. 14
Approved Standard Ratings
UL, cUL (File No. E41515)
5 A at 125 VAC, 3 A at 250 VAC (general use)
3 A at 30 VDC (resistive)
EN60947-5-1 (Low Voltage Directive)
3 A at 250 VAC (AC12), 3 A at 30 VDC (DC12)
Ratings
Contacts
Minimum applicable load: 1 mA at 5 VDC
Rated values are obtained from tests conducted under the following
conditions.
1. Load: Resistive load
2. Mounting conditions: No vibration and no shock
3. Temperature: 20±2°C
4. Operating frequency: 20 operations/min
Super-bright LED
Note: The values in parentheses are for models with blue or red
Pushbuttons.
Incandescent Lamp
Characteristics
Note: 1. Set and reset constitute one operation.
2. With LED and incandescent lamp not mounted.
Agency Standards File No.
UL, cUL (See note.) UL508 E41515
--- EN60947-5-1 ---
AC resistive load DC resistive load
3 A at 250 VAC
5 A at 125 VAC 3 A at 30 VDC
Rated
voltage Rated current Operating
voltage Internal limiting
resistor
5 VDC 30 mA (red: 15 mA) 5 VDC±5% 33 (blue: 51 Ω,
red: 68 )
12 VDC 15 mA 12 VDC±5% 270 (blue: 270 ,
red: 560 )
24 VDC 10 mA 24 VDC±5% 1600 (blue:
1.8 k, red 2 k)
Rated voltage Rated current Operating voltage
6 VAC/VDC 60 mA 5 VAC/VDC
14 VAC/VDC 40 mA 12 VAC/VDC
28 VAC/VDC 24 mA 24 VAC/VDC
Item Pushbutton Switch
Allowable operating fre-
quency Mechanical Momentary operation: 120 operations/minute max.
Alternate operation: 60 operations/minute max. (See note 1.)
Electrical 20 operation s/m inute max . (Se e note 1.)
Insulation resistance 100 M min. (at 500 VDC)
Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of same polarity
2,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of different polarity and also between each terminal and ground
1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between lamp terminals (See note 2.)
Vibration resistance Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude (malfunction within 1 ms)
Shock resistance Destruction 500 m/s2
Malfunction 150 m/s2 max. (malfunction within 1 ms)
Durability Mechanical Momentary operation: 2,000,000 operations min.
Alternate operation: 200,000 operations min. (See note 1.)
Electrical 10 0,000 operations min. (See note 1.)
Ambient temperature Operating: 10°C to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
Storage: –25°C to 65°C (with no icing or condensation)
Ambient humidity Operating: 35% to 85%
Electric shock protection class Class II
PTI (tracking characteristic) 175
Degree of contamination 3 (IEC947-5-1)
Weight Approx. 10 g (in the case of a lighted DPDT switch with solder terminals)
68
Screw-Less Clamp
Operating Characteristics
Note: Lock stroke is only for alternate operation.
Contact Form
Item Screw-Less Clamp
Recommended wire size 0.5 mm2 twisted wire or 0.8 mm-dia. solid wire
Usable wires and tensile
strength Twisted wire 0.3 mm20.5 mm20.75 mm21.25 mm2
Solid wire 0. 5 mm dia. 0.8 mm dia. 1.0 mm dia. ---
Tensile strength 10 N 20 N 30 N 40 N
Length of exposed wire 10 ±1 mm
Type
Features
Pushbutton Switch
IP40 Oil-resistant IP65
Operating force (OF) max. 4.41 N 4.91 N
Releasing force (RF) min. 0.29 N
Total travel (TT) Appr ox. 3 mm
Pretravel (PT) max. 2.5 mm
Lock stroke (LTA) min. (See note.) 0.5 mm
Name Contact
DPDT
COM
NC
NO
69
Nomenclature
Color of Pushbutton
LED/incandescent models
Red, green, yellow, white, blue
Neon models
Red, green, white
Non-lighted models
Red, green, yellow, white, blue, black
Lamp
Terminal Type
Solder terminals
(tab terminals #110)
PCB terminals
Screw-Less Clamp
Pushbutton
Cap
Legend plate
Dispersion plate
Reflective plunger
Switch
Switch Ratings
5 A at 125 VAC
3 A at 250 VAC
3 A at 30 VDC
Minimum applicable load: 1 mA at 5 VDC
Degree of Protection
IP40/Oil-resistant IP65
Flange Shape
Square (A16@-A)
Round (A16@-T)
Rectangular (A16@-J)
70
Dimensions
Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
Lighted/Non-lighted Pushbutton Switches without Voltage Reduction
Unit
The lamp terminal is also provided with non-lighted models.
Solder terminals and tab terminals (#110) can be both used with Lighted and Non-lighted Pushbutton Switches.
Solder terminals (tab terminals #110) Panel Cutouts
Lamp terminal
Mounting nut
Lock ring Lamp terminals
24 min.
19 min.
16 dia.
+0.2
0
Solder terminals (tab terminals #110)
Panel Cutouts
19 min.
19 min.
Lamp terminalsMounting nut
Lock ring
Lamp terminals
16 dia.
+0.2
0
Packing (t0.5)
(for oil-resistant IP65 only)
Packing (t0.5)
(for oil-resistant IP65 only)
Square
A16@-A
Rectangular
A16@-J
See page 77 for panel cutouts
See page 77 for panel cutouts
Solder terminals (tab terminals #110) Panel Cutouts
19 min.
19 min.
Lamp terminals
Lamp terminals
Mounting nut
Lock ring
16 dia.
+0.2
0
18 dia.
15.1 dia.
Round
A16@-T
Packing (t0.5)
(for oil-resistant IP65 only)
See page 77 for panel cutouts
71
The following diagrams show the rectangular model as a representative example.
PCB terminals
Screw-Less Clamp
Panel Cutouts
24 min.
24 min.
Mounting nut
Lock ring
16 dia.
+0.2
0
Lock ring
Mounting ring
Switch
Pushbutton
Case Marking face
Direction-indication arrow
Panel Cutouts
25 min.
16 dia.
+0.2
0
Recommended panel thickness: 0.5 to 3.2 mm
Switch dismounting lever Lock ring
Mounting ring
Panel Cutouts
25 min.
33 min.
16 dia.
+0.2
0
Rectangular
A16@-J@-2S, T1-2S, T2-2S
Voltage-reduction lighting,
solder terminals
(tab terminals #110)
Rectangular
A16@-J@-T1
Rectangular
A16@-J@-@P
Packing (t0.5)
(for oil-resistant IP65 only)
Packing (t0.5)
(for oil-resistant IP65 only)
Packing (t0.5)
(
for oil-resistant IP65 onl
y)
23 min.
(Dimension A)
See page 77 for panel cutouts
See page 77 for panel cutouts
See page 77 for panel cutouts
72
Lamps
Accessories, Tools, and Components
44
0.25 2.54 2.5
4
13 max. Cathode ()
Anode (+)
6 dia. 6 dia.
0.5 dia.
13 max.
Same as
emitting color
LED
A16-5DS@/-12DS@/-24DS@Incandescent Lamp
A16-5/-12/-24
Extractor
A3PJ-5080
A16ZJ-520@A16ZA-520@A16ZT-520@
IP40
IP40
IP65
IP65
Legend Plates
Note: 1. The panel is 0.6 mm thick.
12.9 dia.
13.4 dia.
Color Materials
Polycarbonate resin
Transparent
Milky
Polyalylate resin
Polyalylate resin
Note: The standard model is transparent.
2. The panel is made of the materials
listed in the following table.
Degree of
protection
A16Z-3004
Screw Fitting
18 dia.
A16ZA-3003 A16ZT-3003A16ZJ-3003
Panel Plugs (Black Resin)
Select the Plug that fits the panel design and mount from the front of the Panel. Panel cutouts are the same as those for Switches.
Protective structure: IP40 Square Round
Rectangular
73
12 x 12
17.9±0.1
17.9±0.1
2
t=1
+0.2
0
Lock Ring
15.8±0.1 dia.
15 dia.
0
0.1
Rough
surface
Rough surface
A16Z-5080
Extractor
74
Dimensions with Accessories
Switch Guards
18.1
18.1
Rectangular
A16ZJ-5050
Square
A16ZA-5050
Panel Cutouts (Top View)
Panel Cutouts (Top View)
24.5 min.
Guard (transparent) Holder (black)
28 min.
16 dia.
+0.2
0
16 dia.
+0.2
0
28 min.
19 min.
Guard (transparent) Holder (black)
Torsion spring
Note: The above illustration shows the case where 4.5 mm is provided
for the distance "x." If no clearance is required for the "x" section,
the vertical mounting dimension can be as small as 24 mm.Set
this distance according to operating conditions.For models with
PCB terminals, the horizontal mounting dimension is 24 mm min.
Note: The above illustration shows the case where 4.5 mm is provided
for the distance "x." If no clearance is required for the "x"
section, the vertical mounting dimension can be as small as 24 mm.
Set this distance according to operating conditions.
Torsion
spring
75
Dust Covers
Rectangular
A16ZJ-5060
Square
A16ZA-5060
Panel Cutouts
Panel Cutouts
Round
A16ZT-5060 Panel Cutouts
16 dia.
+0.2
0
31 min.
25 min.
Cover A (transparent)
Cover B (black)
16 dia.
+0.2
0
25 min.
25 min.
Cover A (transparent)
Cover B (black)
16 dia.
+0.2
0
25 min.
25 min.
Cover A (transparent)
Cover B (black)
24 dia.
76
Terminal Arrangement
Models without Reduced-voltage Lighting
Non-lighted Pushbutton Switches are also provided with lamp terminals.
Solder Terminals
PCB Terminals
Voltage Reduction Units
The voltage-reduction circuit is built in.
Screw-Less Clamps
Voltage-reduction lighting models with Screw-Less Clamps (A16L-
@T1-2S, A16L-@T2-2S) incor porate voltage-reduction circuits.
Lighted SPDT Switches Lighted DPDT Switches
Lamp terminal Lamp terminal
Dimensions of
Terminal Holes
Terminal Arrangement
(Bottom View)
Note: The L+ is not shown
on the Switch.
Dimensions of
Terminal Holes
Terminal Arrangement
(Bottom View)
Note: The L+ is not shown
on the Switch.
Lamp terminal (t=0.5) Side with TOP indicated
Five, 1 dia.
Two, 5 dia.
Lamp terminal (t=0.5) Side with TOP indicated
Eight, 1 dia.
Two, 5 dia.
Lighted SPDT Switches Lighted DPDT Switches
Dimensions of
PCB Terminals
Terminal Arrangement
(Bottom View)
Model, rating, and lot
number indication Side with TOP
indicated
PCB Cutouts
(Bottom View)
Dimensions of
PCB Terminals
Terminal Arrangement
(Bottom View)
Side with TOP
indicated
PCB Cutouts
(Bottom View)
DPDT lighted models
Side with direction arrow
(Bottom view)
DPDT lighted models
Black
Red
White
Black
Black
Red
Black
Black
White
Red Side indicating TOP
(Bottom view)
77
Panel Cutouts
Solder Terminals
Note: 1. Make sure the thic kness of the mounting panel is between 0.5 and 3.2 mm. If, however, a Switch Guard or Dust Cov er is used, the thick-
ness of the mounting panel must be between 0.5 and 2 mm.
2. If the panel is to be finished with coating, etc., make sure that the panel meets the specified dimensions after coating.
PCB Terminals
Note: 1. Ensure that the variation in the distance between the centers of neighboring mounting holes is less than ±0.1 mm.
2. Make sure the thickness of the mounting panel is between 0.5 and 3.2 mm. If, however, a Switch Guard or Dust Cov er is used, the thick-
ness of the mounting panel must be between 0.5 and 2 mm.
3. If the panel is to be finished with coating, etc., make sure that the panel meets the specified dimensions after coating.
24 min.
19 min.
16 dia.
+0.2
0
19 min.
16 dia.
+0.2
019 min.
Rectangular A16@-J/M16@-@J
(Top View)
Square A16@-A/M16@-A
Round A16@-T/M16@-T
(Top View)
Rectangular A16@-J/M16@-J
(Top View) Square A16@-A/M16@-A
Round A16@-T/M16@-T
(Top View)
24 min.
24 min.
16 dia.
+0.2
0
14.7±0.05 dia.
9.1±0.05
5.1±0.05
24 min.
24 min
.
16 dia.
+0.2
0
14.7±0.05 dia.
9.1±0.05
5.1±0.05
78
Installation
Panel Mounting
After mounting the Pushbutton Unit (i.e., the Pushbutton and the
Case) to the panel, sna p in the Switch Unit (i.e., the Switch and the
Lamp) from the back of the panel.
Mounting to the Panel
Insert the Pushbutton Unit into the f ront of the panel, and fix the lock
ring and mounting nut from the terminal side.
Make sure that the lock ring is aligned with the thread of the Case
and the edge of the lock ring is touching the panel.
Tighten the mounting nuts to a torque of 0.29 to 0.49 Nm.
Mounting the Switch Unit
Snap on the Switch Unit to the Pushbutton Unit.
Make sure that the Switch Unit has the correct orientation when
snapping it onto the Case. Align the • mark on the Case with the
groove between the case guards on the NC terminal side of the
Switch Unit in the way shown below, and push the Switch Unit into
the Case until it clicks into place. Confirm that the Switch Unit is
securely in place before using.
Mounting the Switch Unit for Voltage Reduction Types
1. The mounting panel thickness must be 0.5 to 3.2 mm.
2. The mounting ring must be tightened to a torque 0.29 to 0.49 Nm.
3. The mounting hole must be cut out in the way described previously. The dimens ion A is the length r equired for removing the Switch when it is
in the mounted state. If Switches are mounted side-by -side separated by less than the specified distance, it may not be possible to remove the
Switch.
4. Be sure to mount the Case to t he Switch with the cor rect orientation. Mount with the • mark on the Case facing in the same direction as the
side of the Switch with the direction arrow or the word TOP.
Case Panel Mounting nut
Lock ring
Edge
Thread
NC terminal
mark
Groove between
case guards
Case
mark
Switch
Direction arrow
Case Switch
TOP mark
mark
79
Removing the Switch Unit
Grip the par t between the Switch holder of th e Case and the Switch
Unit using the A16Z-5080 Extractor, and pull to remove the Switch
Unit.
16-mm Models
A16-P Models (with PCB Terminals)
The Switch Unit can be mounted or dismounted by simply opening or
closing the lever.
Mounting and Replacing the
Pushbutton
Removing and Mounting the
Pushbutton
1. Remove the Pushbutton as shown in the following diagram. If the
Pushbutton cannot be removed by hand, use the A3PJ-5080
Extractor.
2. To attach the Pushbutton, push until it clicks into place.
Removing the Lamp
Removing from the Pushbutton End
Removing from the Switch End
The Lamp can be removed by hand once the Switch is removed
using the A16Z-5080 Extractor.
Installing the Lamp
When mounting th e Lamp, make sure it is facing the direction shown
in the follo wing diagram. Insert the Lamp while matching the protrud-
ing part of the Lamp and the small guides on the outer surface of the
Case.
The Lamp can be mounted from the Pushbutton end by using the
A16Z-5080 Extractor. The lamp can be mounted by following the
opposite procedure for removing the Lamp.
A16Z-5080 Extractor
Pushbutton
Lamp
Grip the Lamp with the
A16Z-5080 Extractor and
pull to remove.
Protruding part
80
Mounting the A16Z Dust Cover
1. Separate the Dust Cover into 2 parts: cover A and cover B.
2. Insert the Case (Pushbutton Unit) into cov er B .
3. Mount these parts together onto the panel.
4. From the back of the panel, mount the lock ring and secure with
the mounting nut.
5. Insert cover A into cover B. Ensure that the entire perimeter of
cover A is securely attached to cover B by pressing in different
directions.
6. Mount the Switch Unit to the Case.
Note: Recommended panel thickness: 0.5 to 2 mm.
Mounting the A16Z Switch
Guard
1. Insert the Case (Pushbutton Unit) into the Switch Guard.
2. Mount these part s together onto the panel.
3. From the back of the panel, mount the lock ring and secure with
the mounting nut.
4. Attach the Switch Unit to the Case.
Note: Recommended panel thickness: 0.5 to 2 mm.
Pushbutton Unit
Panel
Lock ring
Mounting nut
Switch Unit
Cover A
(transparent)
Cover B
(black)
Set
A16ZJ-5060
Switch Guard
Panel
Pushbutton Unit
Lock ring
Mounting nut
Switch Unit
81
Precautions
Refer to the Technical Information for Pushbutton Switches (Cat. No.
A143).
!WARNING
Do not apply a voltage between the incandescent lamp and the
terminal that is greater than the rated voltage. If the incandescent
lamp is broken, the operating part may pop out.
Always turn OFF the power and wait for 10 minutes before replac-
ing the incandescent lamp. If the lamp is replaced immediately af-
ter the power is turned OFF, the remaining heat may cause burns.
Correct Use
Mounting
Always make sure that the power is turned OFF before mounting,
removing, or wiring the Switch, or performing maintenance.
Do not tighten the mounting nut more than necessary using tools
such as pointed-nose plie rs. Doing so will damage the mounting nut.
The tightening torque is 0.29 to 0.49 Nm.
Wiring
Solder Terminal
Solder terminals and quick-connect terminals (#110) are commonly
used for ter minals.
Be sure to use electrical wires that are a size appropriate for the
applied voltage and carry current (conductor size is 0.5 to 0.75 mm2).
Perform soldering according to the conditions provided below. If the
soldering is not properly performed, the lead wires will become
detached, resulting in short-circuits .
1. Hand soldering: 30 W, within 5 s
2. Dip soldering: 240°C, within 3 s
Wait for one minute after soldering before exerting any external force
on the solder.
Use non-corrosive resin fluid as the flux.
Make sure that the electric cord is wired so that it does not touch t he
Unit. If the electric cord touches the Unit, then electric wires with a
heat resistance of 100°C min. must be used.
After wiring the Switch, maintain an appropriate clearance and
creepage distance.
Screw-Less Clamps
Mounting Procedure
1. Strip a length of 10 mm off the end of the wire (allowable range:
10±1 mm).
2. Bunch wire strands together and straighten them.
3. Insert the wire into the insertion hole while pressing the release
button at the side of the hole. (Using a precision screwdriver is
recommended.)
4. Let go of the release button to lock the wire into place.
5. After locking, pull on the wire gently to confirm that it is securely
locked.
Removing Procedure
Remove wires by pulling them while pressing the release button.
Note: When reusing wires that have already been locked, cut off the
end of the wire and strip the wire again before using.
Operating Environment
The IP65 model is designed wit h a degree of protection so that it will
not sustain damage if it is subjected to water from an y direction to the
front of the panel.
Using the Microload
Inser t a contact protection circuit, if necessar y, to prevent the reduc-
tion of life expectancy due to extreme wear on the contacts caused
by loads where inrush current occurs when the contact is opened
and closed.
The A16 allows both a standard load (125 V at 5A, 250 V at 3 A) and
a microload. If a standard load is applied, however, the microload
area cannot be used. If the microload area is used with a standard
load, the contact surface will become rough, and the opening and
closing of the contact for a microload may become unreliable.
The minimum applicable load is the N-level reference value. This
value indicates the malfunction reference level for the reliability level
of 60% (λ 60) (conforming to JIS C5003).
The equation, λ 60 = 0.5 x 10–4/operations indicates that the esti-
mated malfunction rate is less than 1/2,000,000 operations with a
reliability level of 60%.
LED
The LED current-limiting resistor is built-in, so external resistance is
not required.
Note: The values in parentheses are for models with blue or red
Pushbutton Units.
Others
The oil-resistant IP65 uses NBR rubber and is resistant to general
cutting oil and cooling oil. Some particular oils cannot be used with
the oil-resistant IP65, however, so contact your OMRON representa-
tive for details.
Rated voltage Internal limiting resistor
5 VDC 33 (blue: 51 , red: 68 )
12 VDC 270 (blue: 270 , red: 560 )
24 VDC 1600 (blue: 1.8 k, red: 2 k)
Area of use
Voltage (V)
Current (mA)
Invalid
area
82
If the panel is to be finished with coating, etc., make sure that the
panel meets the specified dimensions after the coating.
Do not subject the Switch to extreme shock or vibration. Doing so will
cause malfunctions and damage to the Switch.
Do not let sharp objects come into contact with the Switches that are
made of resin. Doing so will damage the Switches, causing
scratches on the outside of the operating parts, and malfunction.
When handling the Switches, do not throw or drop them.
Hammer Screwdriver
Do not allow the Switch
to drop and hit the
ground.
Do not place or drop
heavy objects on the
Switch.
Do not operate the Switch
with hard or sharp objects.
In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice.
ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.
Cat. No. A124-E1-03
83
Knob-type Selector Switch
A165S/W
Mounting Aperture of 16 mm
Modular construction
Oil-resistant IP65 models
UL and cUL approved.
Conforms to EN60947-5-1, IEC947-5-1
Short mounting depth, less than 28.5 mm below panel
Wide range of switching capacity from standard to microload
Lighted and non-lighted models
2 and 3-notch models
Manual a nd automatic reset models
Model Number Structure
Model Number Legend
Completely Assembled
The model numbers used to order sets of Units are illustrated below. One set comprises the Selector, Lamp (lighted models only), and Switch.
(1) (2) (3) (4)
S
W
(5) (6)
J
A
T2M
2A
3M
3A R
G
Y
1
2
1P
2P
2S
24D
A 1 6 5 W - A 2A R - 24D - 1
(1) Lighted/Non-lighted
Symbol Type
Non-lighted
Lighted
(2) Shape of Selector
Symbol Shape
Rectangular
Square
Round
(3) Number of Notches/Resetting Method
Symbol
Manual
Automatic
Manual
Automatic
2 notches
3 notches
(4) Color of Selector
Symbol Color
Red
Green
Yellow
(6) Contact Configuration
Symbol Type Terminal
SPDT
DPDT
SPDT
DPDT
DPDT
(5) Light Source
Symbol Type
24 V -LED
Reset method
No. of notches
Voltage Reduction Unit (24-V Built-in LED)
LED
Symbol Type
No symbol
No symbol
Non-lighted
Black
(non-lighted
models only)
Screw-Less
Clamp
PCB
terminal
Solder
terminal
Note: 1. Only DPDT contacts are availa-
ble with 3-notch models and
Screw-Less Clamp models.
2. PCB terminals are available
only with 2-notch models.
Note: 1. Solder terminals are only available with 100-V
models.
2. The Voltage Reduction Unit is not available for
models with PCB terminals.
T1 90 to 121 VAC/VDC 110 VAC/VDC
T2 180 to 242 VAC/VDC 220 VAC/VDC
Rated
voltage
Operating voltage
84
Subassembled
1. Selector
1. Lighted/Non-lighted
S: Non-lighted
W: Lighted
2. Flange Shape
J: Rectangular
A: Square
T: Round
3. Number of Notches/Reset Method
2M: 2 notches/Manual
2A: 2 notches/Automatic
3M: 3 notches/Manual
3A: 3 notches/Mixed-operation
4. Illumination Color
None:Black (Non-lighted models only)
R: Red
G: Green
Y: Yellow
2. Switch (Same as for Key-type Selector Switches)
1. Number of Notches
2N: 2 notches
3N: 3 notches
2. Contacts
1: SPDT
2: DPDT
3. Lighted/Non-lighted
None:Non-lighted
L: Lighted
4. Terminals
None:Solder terminals (tab terminals #110)
3. Lamp
1. Operating Voltage (Rated Voltage)
LED
5DS: 5 VDC (5 VDC)
12DS:12 VDC (12 VDC)
24DS:24 VDC (24 VDC)
2. Illumination Color
R: Red (LED )
G: G reen (LED )
Y: Yellow (LED)
1 2 3 4
A165@-@@@
1 2 3 4
A16S-@-@@@
1 2
A16-@@
85
Ordering Information
List of Models
Ordering as a Set
The model numbers used to order sets of Units are given in the following tab les. One set comprises the Selector, Lamp (lighted models only), and
Switch.
Solder Terminals
A165@-J (Rectangular) Models
IP65 Oil-resistant
Note: Enter the desired color symbol for the Selector in @: R (red); Y (yellow); G (green). The Selector for non-lighted models is black.
A165@-A (Square) Models
IP65 Oil-resistant
Note: Enter the desired color symbol for the Selector in @: R (red); Y (yellow); G (green). The Selector for non-lighted models is black.
No. of
notches Output Reset method Lighting method Operating voltage Model
2 notches SPDT LED 24 VDC A165W-J2M@-24D-1
Non-lighted --- A165S-J2M-1
LED 24 VDC A165W-J2A@-24D-1
Non-lighted --- A165S-J2A-1
DPDT LED 24 VDC A165W-J2M@-24D-2
Non-lighted --- A165S-J2M-2
LED 24 VDC A165W-J2A@-24D-2
Non-lighted --- A165S-J2A-2
3 notches DPDT LED 24 VDC A165W-J3M@-24D-2
Non-lighted --- A165S-J3M-2
Manual
Automatic
Manual
Automatic
Manual
No. of
notches Output Reset method Lighting method Operating voltage Model
2 notches SPDT LED 24 VDC A165W-A2M@-24D-1
Non-lighted --- A165S-A2M-1
LED 24 VDC A165W-A2A@-24D-1
Non-lighted --- A165S-A2A-1
DPDT LED 24 VDC A165W-A2M@-24D-2
Non-lighted --- A165S-A2M-2
LED 24 VDC A165W-A2A@-24D-2
Non-lighted --- A165S-A2A-2
3 notches DPDT LED 24 VDC A165W-A3M@-24D-2
Non-lighted --- A165S-A3M-2
Manual
Automatic
Manual
Automatic
Manual
86
A165@-T (Round) Models
IP65 Oil-resistant
Note: Enter the desired color symbol for the Selector in @: R (red); Y (yellow); G (green). The Selector for non-lighted models is black.
No. of
notches Output Reset method Lighting method Operating voltage Model
2 notches SPDT LED 24 VDC A165W -T2M@-24D-1
Non-lighted --- A165S-T2M-1
LED 24 VDC A165W-T2A@-24D-1
Non-lighted --- A165S-T2A-1
DPDT LED 24 VDC A165W-T2M@-24D-2
Non-lighted --- A165S-T2M-2
LED 24 VDC A165W-T2A@-24D-2
Non-lighted --- A165S-T2A-2
3 notches DPDT LED 24 VDC A165W-T3M@-24D-2
Non-lighted --- A165S-T3M-2
Manual
Automatic
Manual
Automatic
Manual
87
Ordering Individually
Selectors, Lamps, and Switches (Sockets) can be ordered separately. Combinations that are not available as sets can be created using individual
Units. Also, store the parts as spares for maintenance and repairs.
Lamp
Lighted Models Non-lighted Models
Selector
Switch
LED only
Solder terminals
(no transformer)
Lighted/non-lighted Lighted/non-lighted
PCB terminals
Selectors with
Knobs
Rectangular Models Square Models Round Models
Note: Temperature rises in incandescent
lamps can cause heat deformation.
88
Selectors (Oil-resistant IP65 Models Only)
Note: 1. Enter the desired color symbol for the Selector in the @.
2. The selector for non-lighted models is black.
Switches
Lamps
LED
Appearance Number of
notches Reset method Lighting method Operating
voltage Model Selector color
symbol
2 notches Manual LED 24 VDC A165W-J2M@R (red),
Y (yellow),
G (green)
Non-lighted --- A165S-J2M
LED 24 VDC A165W-J2A@
Non-lighted --- A165S-J2A
3 notches Manual LED 24 VDC A165W-J3M@
Non-lighted --- A165S-J3M
LED 24 VDC A165W-J3A@
Non-lighted --- A165S-J3A
2 notches Manual LED 24 VDC A165W-A2M@R (red),
Y (yellow),
G (green)
Non-lighted --- A165S-A2M
LED 24 VDC A165W-A2A@
Non-lighted --- A165S-A2A
3 notches Manual LED 24 VDC A165W-A3M@
Non-lighted --- A165S-A3M
LED 24 VDC A165W-A3A@
Non-lighted --- A165S-A3A
2 notches Manual LED 24 VDC A165W-T2M@R (red),
Y (yellow),
G (green)
Non-lighted --- A165S-T2M
LED 24 VDC A165W-T2A@
Non-lighted --- A165S-T2A
3 notches Manual LED 24 VDC A165W-T3M@
Non-lighted --- A165S-T3M
LED 24 VDC A165W-T3A@
Non-lighted --- A165S-T3A
Rectangular
(A165@-J)
Automatic
Fully
automatic
Square (A165@-A)
Automatic
Fully
automatic
Round (A165@-T)
Automatic
Fully
automatic
Appearance Classification Model
Lighted Sock et (without
voltage-reduction
lighting)
2 notches SPDT Solder terminal A16S-2N-1L
DPDT A16S-2N-2L
3 notches DPDT A16S-3N-2L
Non-lighted 2 notches SPDT A16S-2N-1
DPDT A16S-2N-2
3 notches DPDT A16S-3N-2
Lighted 2 notches SPDT PCB ter minal A16S-2N-1LP
DPDT A16S-2N-2LP
Non-lighted SPDT A16S-2N-1P
DPDT A16S-2N-2P
5 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC
Red A16-5DSR A16-12DSR A16-24DSR
Yellow A16-5DSY A16-12DSY A16-24DSY
Green A16-5DSG A16-12DSG A16-24DSG
Operating voltage
Light color
89
Accessories (Order Separately)
Accessories
Tools
Specifications
Approved Standards
Note: cUL: CSA, C22.2 No. 14
Approved Standard Ratings
UL, cUL (File No. E41515)
5 A at 125 VAC, 3 A at 250 VAC (general use)
3 A at 30 VDC (resistive)
EN60947-5-1 (Low Voltage Directive)
3 A at 250 VAC (AC12), 3 A at 30 VDC (DC12)
Ratings
Contacts
Minimum applicable load: 1 mA at 5 VDC
Rated values are obtained from tests conducted under the following
conditions.
1. Load: Resistive load
2. Mounting conditions: No vibration and no shock
3. Temperatur e: 20±2°C
4. Operating frequency: 20 times/min
Super-bright LED
Note: The values in parentheses are for red Selectors.
Name Appearance Classification Model Remarks
Panel Plugs Rectangular A16ZJ-3003 Used f or covering the panel cutouts f or
future panel expansion.
Degree of protection: IP40
Square A16ZA-3003
Round A16ZT-3003
Name Appearance Model Applicable types Remarks
Pushbutton
Switch Knob-type
Selector
Switch
Key-type
Selector
Switch
Emergency
Stop
Switch
Indicator
Screw Fit-
ting A16Z-3004 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Convenient for ganged
installation.
Tighten to a torque of
0.39 N·m min.
Extractor A16Z-5080 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Convenient for e x tract-
ing the Switches and
Lamps.
Agency Standards File No.
UL, cUL (See note.) UL508 E41515
--- EN60947-5-1 ---
AC resistive load DC resistive load
3 A at 250 VAC
5 A at 125 VAC 3 A at 30 VDC
Rated
voltage Rated current Operating
voltage Internal limiting
resistor
5 VDC 30 mA (15 mA) 5 VDC±5% 33 (68 )
12 VDC 15 mA 12 VDC±5% 270 (560 )
24 VDC 10 mA 24 VDC±5% 1600 (2,000 )
90
Characteristics
Note: With LED not mounted.
Screw-less Clamp
Operating Characteristics
Operation Angle
Item Knob-type Selector Switch
Allowable operating
frequency
Mechanical 20 operations/minute max.
Electrical 10 operations/minute max.
Insulation resistance 100 M min. (at 500 VDC)
Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between ter minals of same polarity
2,000 VAC , 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of different polarity and also between each ter-
minal and ground
1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between lamp terminals (See note.)
Vibration resistance Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude (malfunction within 1 ms)
Shock resistance Destruction 500 m/s2
Malfunction 150 m/s2 max. (malfunction within 1 ms)
Durability Mechanical 250,000 operations min.
Electrical 100,000 operations min.
Ambient temperature Operating: 10°C to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
Storage: 25°C to 65°C (with no icing or condensation)
Ambient humidity Operating: 35% to 85%
Electric shock protection class Class II
PTI (tracking characteristic) 175
Degree of contamination 3 (IEC947-5-1)
Weight Approx. 13 g (in the case of a lighted DPDT switch)
Item Screw-less Clamp
Recommended wire size 0.5 mm2 twisted wire or 0.8 mm-dia. solid wire
Usable wires and ten-
sile strength Twisted wire 0.3mm20.5 mm20.75 mm 21.25 mm2
Solid wire 0.5 mm dia. 0.8 mm dia. 1.0 mm dia. ---
Tensile strength 10 N 20 N 30 N 40 N
Length of exposed wire 10 ±1 mm
Type
Features
Knob-type Selector Switch
2 notches 3 notches
Operating force (OF) max. 0.1 N·m
Set position (SP) 90±5°45+10°
0
Two notches Three notches
2. FP: Free Position
Note: 1. The angle used for automatic reset is shown in parentheses.
91
Contact Form
Name Contact
SPDT
COM
NC
NO
SW2 SW1
Notch Contact
SPDT DPDT
Position SW Position SW2 SW1
2 notches
3 notches ---
92
Nomenclature
Flange Shape
Color of Selector
LED models
Red, green, yellow
Non-lighted models
Black
Switch Specifications
Number of Notches and Reset Method
Square (A165@-A)
Round (A165@-T)
Rectangular (A165@-J)
Terminal Type
Protective Structure
Oil-resistant IP65
Lighting Method
Selector
Switch
Lamp
PCB terminals
Solder terminals
(tab terminals #110)
Standard Loads
5 A at 125 VAC
5 A at 250 VAC
3 A at 30 VDC
Minimum applicable load: 1 mA at 5 VDC
3 Notches
Manual reset
Automatic reset
2 Notches
Manual reset
Automatic reset
Non-lighted models
Lighted (LED) models
(The upper face of the knob is illuminated.)
93
Dimensions
Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
Knob-type Selector Switches without Voltage Reduction Unit
Solder terminals (tab terminals #110)
Solder terminals (tab terminals #110)
Solder terminals (tab terminals #110)
Lamp terminal
Packing (t0.5) Lock ring
Mounting nut
Model, standard, lot No., serial number
Lamp terminal
Model, standard, lot No., serial number
Packing (t0.5) Lock ring
Mounting nut
Lamp terminal
Model, standard, lot No., serial number
Lock rin
g
Mounting nut
Packing (t0.5)
Rectangular
A165@-J
Square
A165@-A
Round
A165@-T
Note: See page 96 for panel cutouts.
Note: See page 96 for panel cutouts.
Note: See page 96 f or panel cutouts.
94
The follo wing diagrams show the rectangular model as a representative example. The lamp term inal is also provided with non-lighted models.
PCB terminals
Screw-Less Clamp
Lamp terminal
Packing (t0.5) Mounting nut
Lock ring
Direction-indication arrow
Selector
Lock ringMounting nut
Switch
Case
Switch dismounting lever Lock ring
Mounting nut
Rectangular
A165@-J
Rectangular
A165W@-T
Reduced-voltage light-
ing, solder terminals
(tab terminals #110)
Packing (t0.5)
(for oil-resistant IP65 only)
Rectangular
A165@-2S
Packing (t0.5)
(for oil-resistant IP65 only)
Note: See page 96 for panel cutouts.
95
Terminal Arrangement
Models with Solder Terminals without Reduced-voltage Lighting
Lamp terminals are not provided with the Non-lighted Knob-type Selector Switches and Key-type Selector Switches.
Models with PCB Terminals
Note: For details of the term in al arrangement for Screw-Less Clamps, refer to the corresponding section for the A16.
Lighted SPDT Switches Lighted DPDT Switches
Lamp terminal Lamp terminal
Non-lighted SPDT Switches Non-lighted DPDT Switches
Dimensions of
Terminal Holes
Terminal Arrangement
(Bottom View)
Note: The L+ is not shown
on the Switch.
Dimensions of
Terminal Holes
Terminal Arrangement
(Bottom View)
Note: The L+ is not shown
on the Switch.
Dimensions of
Terminal Holes
Side with TOP
indicated
Terminal Arrangement
(Bottom View)
Dimensions of
Terminal Holes
Side with TOP
indicated
Terminal Arrangement
(Bottom View)
Lighted SPDT Switches Lighted DPDT Switches
Lamp terminal (t=0.5) Side with TOP indicated
Eight, 1 dia. Two, 5 dia.
Lamp terminal (t=0.5)
Side with TOP indicated
Eight, 1 dia.
Two, 5 dia.
Dimensions of
PCB Terminals
Model, rating, and lot
number indication
Terminal Arrangement
(Bottom View)
Side with TOP
indicated
PCB Cutouts
(Bottom View)
Dimensions of
PCB Terminals
Terminal Arrangement
(Bottom View)
Side with TOP
indicated
PCB Cutouts
(Bottom View)
96
Non-lighted Models with PCB Terminals
Lamp terminals are not provided with the Non-lighted Knob-type Selector Switches and Key-type Selector Switches.
Panel Cutouts
Models with Solder Terminals
Non-lighted SPDT Switches Non-lighted DPDT Switches
Side with TOP indicated
Side with TOP indicated
Side with TOP indicated
Three, 1 dia. Two, 5 dia.
Side with TOP indicated
Six, 1 dia.
Two, 5 dia.
Dimensions of
PCB Terminals
Model, rating, and lot
number indication
Terminal Arrangement
(Bottom View)
PCB Cutouts
(Bottom View)
Dimensions of
PCB Terminals
PCB Cutouts
(Bottom View)
(Top View) (Top View)
Note: 1. Make sure the thickness of the mounting panel is 0.5 to 3.2 mm.
2. If the panel is to be finished with coating, etc., make sure that the panel meets the specified dimensions after coating.
24 min.
19 min.
16+0.2 dia.
0
19 min.
19 min.
Rectangular
A165@-J Square A165@-A
Round A165@-T
16+0.2 dia.
0
97
Models with PCB Terminals
Installation
For details on mounting the Switch to a panel, and mounting and dismounting the Switch, refer to installation details for the A16 Pushbut ton Switch.
Panel Mounting
Ref e r to the Installation section for the A16.
Mounting and Replacing the
Pushbutton
Ref e r to the Installation section for the A16.
Flange Rotation
A165 Knob-type Selector Switch
Fix the Switch screw and rotate the flange in 45° turns.
Precautions
Ref e r to the Technical Information for Pushbut ton Switches (Cat. No. A143) and the Precautions section for the A16.
(Top View) (Top View)
25 min.
Recommended panel thickness: 0.5 to 3.2 mm
25 min.
Recommended panel thickness: 0.5 to 3.2 mm
Rectangular
A165@-J Square A165@-A
Round A165@-T
Rectangular
A165W@-T Rectangular
A165@-2S 16+0.2 dia.
0
33 min.
(Dimension A)
16+0.2 dia.
0
23 min.
(Dimension A)
Note: 1. Ensure that the variation in the distance between the centers of neighboring mounting holes is less than ±0.1 mm.
3. If the
p
anel is to be finished with coatin
g
, etc., make sure that the
p
anel meets the s
p
ecified dimensions after coatin
g
.
2. Make sure the thickness of the mounting panel is 0.5 to 3.2 mm. If, however, a Switch Guard or Dust Cover is used, the
thickness of the mounting panel must be 0.5 to 2 mm.
24 min.
24 min.
16 dia.
+0.2
0
14.7±0.05 dia.
9.1±0.05
5.1±0.05
24 min.
24 min.
16 dia.
+0.2
0
14.7±0.05 dia.
9.1±0.05
5.1±0.05
Flange
Lock ring
Switch screw
In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice.
ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.
Cat. No. A125-E1-03
98
Key-type Selector Switch
A165K
Mounting Aperture of 16 mm
Modular construction
Oil-resistant IP65 models
UL and cUL approved.
Conforms to EN60947-5-1, IEC947-5-1
Shor t mounting depth, less than 28.5 mm below panel
Wide range of switching capacity from standard to microload
Automatic and manual models available
Model Number Structure
Model Number Legend
Completely Assembled
The model numbers used to order sets of Units are illustrated below. One set comprises the Selector, Switch, and 2 Keys.
(1) (2) (3)
J
A
T
2ML
2MR
2M
2AL
3MC
3MR
3ML
3M
1
2
2S
A 1 6 5 K - J 3ML - 2
(1) Shape of Selector
Symbol Shape Color
Rectangular
Square
Round
(2) Number of Notches/Resetting Method
Left
Right
Left and right
Left
Center
Right
Left
Left, right, and center
2 notches
Black
(3) Contact Configuration
Symbol Type Terminal
SPDT
DPDT
DPDT
3 notches
Symbol No. of notches Reset method Key release position
Manual
Manual
Automatic
Screw-Less
Clamp
Solder
Terminal
Note: 1. Only DPDT contacts are
available with 3-notch mod-
els
2. PCB terminals are available
only with 2-notch models.
3AC Center3 notches Automatic
99
Subassembled
1. Selector
1. Flange Shape
J: Rectangular
A: Square
T: Round
2. Number of Notches/Reset Method/Key Release Position
2ML: 2 notches/Manual/Left
2MR: 2 notches/Manual/Right
2M: 2 notches/Manual/Right and left
2AL: 2 notches/Automatic/Left
3MC: 3 notches/Manual/Center
3MR: 3 notches/Manual/Right
3ML: 3 notches/Manual/Left
3M: 3 notches/Manual/Right, left, and center
3A C: 3 notches/Aut omatic/Center
2. Switch (Same as for Knob-type Selector Switches)
1. Number of Notches
2N: 2 notches
3N: 3 notches
2. Contacts
1: SPDT
2: DPDT
3. Terminals
None:Solder terminals (tab ter minals #110)
1 2
A165K-@@
1 2 3
A16S-@-@@
100
Ordering Information
List of Models
Ordering as a Set
The model numbers used to order sets of Units are given in the foll owing tables. One set comprises the Selector and Switch.
Solder Terminals
A165K-J (Rectangular) Models
IP65 Oil-resistant
A165K-A (Square) Models
IP65 Oil-resistant
Number of notches Output Reset method Key release position Model
2 notches SPDT Left A165K-J2ML-1
Right A165K-J2MR-1
Left and right A165K-J2M-1
Left A165K-J2AL-1
DPDT Left A165K-J2ML-2
Right A165K-J2MR-2
Left and right A165K-J2M-2
Left A165K-J2AL-2
3 notches DPDT Center A165K-J3MC-2
Right A165K-J3MR-2
Left A165K-J3ML-2
Left, right, and center A165K-J3M-2
Manual
Automatic
Manual
Automatic
Manual
Number of notches Output Reset method Key release position Model
2 notches SPDT Left A165K-A2ML-1
Right A165K-A2MR-1
Left and right A165K-A2M-1
Left A165K-A2AL-1
DPDT Left A165K-A2ML-2
Right A165K-A2MR-2
Left and right A165K-A2M-2
Left A165K-A2AL-2
3 notches DPDT Center A165K-A3MC-2
Right A165K-A3MR-2
Left A165K-A3ML-2
Left, right, and center A165K-A3M-2
Manual
Automatic
Manual
Automatic
Manual
101
A165K-T (Round) Models
IP65 Oil-resistant
Number of notches Output Reset method Key release position Model
2 notches SPDT Left A165K-T2ML-1
Right A165K-T2MR-1
Left and right A165K-T2M-1
Left A165K-T2AL-1
DPDT Left A165K-T2ML-2
Right A165K-T2MR-2
Left and right A165K-T2M-2
Left A165K-T2AL-2
3 notches DPDT Center A165K-T3MC-2
Right A165K-T3MR-2
Left A165K-T3ML-2
Left, right, and center A165K-T3M-2
Manual
Automatic
Manual
Automatic
Manual
102
Ordering Individually
Selectors and Switches can be ordered separately. Combinations that are not available as sets can be created using individual Un its. Al s o, sto re
the parts as spares for maintenance and repairs.
Selectors
Appearance Number of notches Reset method Key release position Model
2 notches Manual A165K-J2ML
A165K-J2MR
A165K-J2M
A165K-J2AL
3 notches Manual A165K-J3MC
A165K-J3MR
A165K-J3ML
A165K-J3M
A165K-J3AC
2 notches Manual A165K-A2ML
A165K-A2MR
A165K-A2M
A165K-A2AL
3 notches Manual A165K-A3MC
A165K-A3MR
A165K-A3ML
A165K-A3M
A165K-A3AC
2 notches Manual A165K-T2ML
A165K-T2MR
A165K-T2M
A165K-T2AL
3 notches Manual A165K-T3MC
A165K-T3MR
A165K-T3ML
A165K-T3M
A165K-T3AC
Rectangular
(A165K-J)
Automatic
Automatic
Square
(A165K-A)
Automatic
Automatic
Round (A165K-T)
Automatic
Automatic
103
Switches
Switches with Screw-Less Clamp
Accessories (Order Separately)
Accessories
Tools
Key
Note: Two Ke ys are provided.
Appearance Classification Model
Switch 2 notches SPDT Solder terminal A16S-2N-1
DPDT A16S-2N-2
3 notches DPDT A16S-3N-2
2 notches SPDT PCB terminal A16S-2N-1P
DPDT A16S-2N-2P
Appearance Classification Model Remarks
Common to general
load and micro
load.
DPDT 2 notches Non-lighted A16-2S Comm on to ones
for pushbutton
switches.
3 notches A16S -3N-2LS ---
Name Appearance Classification Model Remarks
Panel Plugs Rectangular A16ZJ-3003 Used f or covering the panel cutouts f or
future panel expansion.
Degree of protection: IP40
Square A16ZA-3003
Round A16ZT-3003
Name Appearance Model Applicable types Remarks
Pushbutton
Switch Knob-type
Selector
Switch
Key-type
Selector
Switch
Emer-
gency Stop
Switch
Indicator
Screw Fitting A16Z-3004 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Conv enient f or ganged
installation.
Tighten to a torque of
0.98 N·m
Extractor A16Z-5080 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Convenient for extract-
ing the Switches and
Lamps.
Appearance Model
A165K-KEY
104
Specifications
Approved Standards
Note: cUL: CSA, C22.2 No. 14
Approved Standard Ratings
UL, cUL (File No. E41515)
5 A at 125 VAC, 3 A at 250 VAC (general use)
3 A at 30 VDC (resistive)
EN60947-5-1 (Low Voltage Directive)
3 A at 250 VAC (AC12), 3 A at 30 VD C (DC12)
Ratings
Contacts Minimum applicable load: 1 mA at 5 VDC
Rated values are obtained from tests conducted under the following
conditions.
1. Load: Resistive load
2. Mounting conditions: No vibration and no shock
3. Temperature: 20±2°C
4. Operating frequency: 20 times/min
Characteristics
Screw-less Clamp
Agency Standards File No.
UL, cUL (See note.) UL508 E41515
--- EN60947-5-1 ---
AC resistive load DC resistive load
3 A at 250 VAC
5 A at 125 VAC 3 A at 30 VDC
Item Key-type Selector Switch
Allowable operating
frequency
Mechanical 20 operations/minute max.
Electrical 10 operations/minute max.
Insulation resistance 100 M min. (at 500 VDC)
Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of same polarity
2,000 VAC , 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of diff erent polarity and also between each terminal
and ground
Vibration resistance Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude (malfunction within 1 ms)
Shock resistance Destruction 500 m/s2
Malfunction 150 m/s2 max. (malfunction within 1 ms)
Durability Mechanical 250,000 operations min. (durability of key: 10,000 operations min.)
Electrical 100,000 operations min.
Ambient temperature Operating: 10°C to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
Storage: 25°C to 65°C (with no icing or condensation)
Ambient humidity Operating: 35% to 85%
Electric shock protection class Class II
PTI (tracking characteristic) 175
Degree of contamination 3 (IEC947-5-1)
Weight Approx. 26.5 g (in the case of a DPDT switch key)
Item Screw-less Clamp
Recommended wire size 0.5 mm2 twisted wire or 0.8 mm-dia. solid wire
Usable wires and ten-
sile strength Twisted wire 0.3mm20.5 mm20.75 mm 21.25 mm2
Solid wire 0.5 mm dia. 0.8 mm dia. 1.0 mm dia. ---
Tensile strength 10 N 20 N 30 N 40 N
Length of exposed wire 10 ±1 mm
105
Operating Characteristics
Operation Angle
Contact Form
Type
Features
Key-type Selector Switch
2 notches 3 notches
Operating force (OF) max. 0.1 N·m
Set position (SP) 90±5°45°+10/0
(75°)(45°) (45°)
Two notches Three notches
Note: The angle used for automatic reset is shown in parentheses.
Name Contact
DPDT
COM
NC
NO
SW1 SW2
Notch Contact
SPDT DPDT
Position SW Position SW1 SW2
2 notches
3 notches ---
106
Nomenclature
Key
Switch Specifications
Number of Notches and Reset Method
Flange Shape
Square (A165K-A)
Round (A165K-T)
Rectangular (A165K-J)
Protective Structure
Oil-resistant IP65
Terminal Type
Selector
Switch
PCB terminals
Solder terminals
(tab terminals #110)
Standard Loads
5 A at 125 VAC
3 A at 250 VAC
3 A at 30 VDC
Minimum applicable load: 1 mA at 5 VDC
2 Notches
Manual
Automatic
3 Notches
Manual
Mixed-operation
107
Dimensions
Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
Key-type Selector Switches
Solder terminals (tab terminals #110)
Packing (t0.5) Lock ring
Mounting nut
Model, standard, lot No., serial number
Packing (t0.5) Lock ring
Mounting nut
Model, standard, lot No., serial number
Packing (t0.5) Lock ring
Mounting nut
Model, standard, lot No., serial number
Rectangular
A165K-J
Square
A165K-A
Solder terminals
(tab terminals #110)
Round
A165K-T
Solder terminals
(tab terminals #110)
Note: See page 110 for panel cutouts.
Note: See page 110 for panel cutouts.
Note: See page 110 for panel cutouts.
108
The follo wing diagrams show the rectangular model as a representativ e example.
PCB terminals
Screw-Less Clamp
Packing (t0.5) Lock ring
Mounting nut
Switch dismounting lever Lock ring
Mounting ring
Rectangular
A165K-J
Rectangular
A165K@-2S
Packing (t0.5)
(for oil-resistant IP65 only)
Note: See page 110 for panel cutouts.
109
Terminal Arrangement
Models with Solder Terminals without Reduced-voltage Lighting
Lamp terminals are not provided with the Non-lighted Knob-type Selector Switches and Key-type Selector Switches.
Lighted Models with PCB Terminals
Note: For details of the term in al arrangement for Screw-Less Clamps, refer to the corresponding section for the A16.
Lighted SPDT Switches Lighted DPDT Switches
Lamp terminal Lamp terminal
Non-lighted SPDT Switches Non-lighted DPDT Switches
Dimensions of
Terminal Holes
Terminal Arrangement
(Bottom View)
Note: The L+ is not shown
on the Switch.
Dimensions of
Terminal Holes
Terminal Arrangement
(Bottom View)
Side with TOP
indicated
Dimensions of
Terminal Holes
Dimensions of
Terminal Holes
Terminal Arrangement
(Bottom View)
Note: The L+ is not shown
on the Switch.
Terminal Arrangement
(Bottom View)
Side with TOP
indicated
Lighted SPDT Switches Lighted DPDT Switches
Lamp terminal (t=0.5) Side with TOP indicated
Eight, 1 dia. Two, 5 dia.
Lamp terminal (t=0.5)
Side with TOP indicated
Eight, 1 dia.
Two, 5 dia.
Dimensions of
PCB Terminals
Model, rating, and lot
number indication
Terminal Arrangement
(Bottom View)
Side with TOP
indicated
PCB Cutouts
(Bottom View)
Dimensions of
PCB Terminals
Terminal Arrangement
(Bottom View)
Side with TOP
indicated
PCB Cutouts
(Bottom View)
110
Non-lighted Models with PCB Terminals
Lamp terminals are not provided with the Non-lighted Knob-type Selector Switches and Key-type Selector Switches.
Panel Cutouts
Models with Solder Terminals
Non-lighted SPDT Switches Non-lighted DPDT Switches
Side with TOP indicated
Side with TOP indicated
Three, 1 dia. Two, 5 dia.
Side with TOP indicated
Side with TOP indicated
Six, 1 dia.
Two, 5 dia.
Dimensions of
PCB Terminals
Model, rating, and lot
number indication
Terminal Arrangement
(Bottom View)
PCB Cutouts
(Bottom View)
Dimensions of
PCB Terminals
PCB Cutouts
(Bottom View)
Note: 1. Make sure the thickness of the mounting panel is 0.5 to 3.2 mm.
2. If the panel is to be finished with coating, etc., make sure that the panel meets the specified dimensions after coating.
(Top View)
24 min.
19 min.
16+0.2 dia.
0
19 min.
16+0.2 dia.
019 min.
Rectangular
A165@-J
(Top View)
Square A165@-A
Round A165@-T
111
Models with PCB Terminals
Installation
For details on mounting the Switch to a panel, and mounting and dismounting the Switch, refer to installation details for the A16 Pushbut ton Switch.
Panel Mounting
Ref e r to the Installation section for the A16.
Mounting and Replacing the Pushbutton
Ref e r to the Installation section for the A16.
Flange Rotation
A165 Key-type Selector Switch
Fix the Switch screw and rotate the flange in 45° turns.
Precautions
Ref e r to the Technical Information for Pushbut ton Switches (Cat. No. A143) and the Precautions section for the A16.
(Top View) (Top View)
25 min.
Recommended panel thickness: 0.5 to 3.2 mm
(Top View)
Rectangular
A165K-J Square A165K-A
Round A165K-T
Rectangular
A165K@-2S
16+0.2 dia.
0
33 min.
(Dimension A)
Note: 1. Ensure that the variation in the distance between the centers of neighboring mounting holes is less than ±0.1 mm.
3. If the panel is to be finished with coating, etc., make sure that the panel meets the specified dimensions after coating.
2. Make sure the thickness of the mounting panel is 0.5 to 3.2 mm. If, however, a Switch Guard or Dust Cover is used, the
thickness of the mounting panel must be 0.5 to 2 mm.
24 min.
24 min.
16 dia.
+0.2
0
14.7±0.05 dia.
9.1±0.05
5.1±0.05
24 min.
24 min.
16 dia.
+0.2
0
14.7±0.05 dia.
9.1±0.05
5.1±0.05
Flange
Lock ring
Switch screw
In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice.
ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.
Cat. No. A126-E1-03
112
Emergency Stop Switch
A165E
Separate Construction with Smallest Class
of Depth in the World
Direct opening mechanism to open contacts in emergencies,
such as when they are welded.
Conforms to EN418.
Includes a safety lock to prevent misuse.
Features sep arate construction t hat allows the Switch to be sep-
arated for easier wiring and one-piece-like construction that al-
lows easier handling.
Models available with 3 contacts built into a single block
(A165E-U).
Note: Refer to the Common Precautions for Pushbutton Switches on
page 14, as well as the “Safety Precautions” on page 121.
Model Number Structure
Model Number Legend
Completely Assembled
Shipped as a set that includes the Operation Unit and light source.
1 2 3
S
LS
M
LM
None
24D
01
IP65 (Oil-resistant)
02
03U
A165E@-@-@
2. Light Source
1. Operation Unit Shape and Functions
Code
30 dia.
40 dia.
3. Contacts
Code Description
SPST-NC
DPST-NC
TPST-NC (See note.)
Note: TPST-NC models have
one-piece construction
with the contact unit. Only
non-lighted models are
available.
Note: Models with separate construction
(SPST-NC and DPST-NC) are for
normal loads only. One-piece models
(TPST-NC) are for either normal loads
or microloads.
Non-lighted
Lighted
Non-lighted
Lighted
Push-lock,
turn-reset
Code
Non-lighted
LED 24 VDC 24 VDC
--- ---
Functions
Type Operation
voltage Rated
voltage
Pushbutton
113
Ordering Information
List of Models
Note: The above models have a surface indication of “RESET.” Models with “STOP” indication are also available. For fur ther infor matio n, contact
your OMRON representative.
Individual Parts (for Switches with Separate Construction)
Operation Units
Lamps
Sockets
Socket Units
Accessories (Order Separately)
Illumination Rated voltage Pushbutton color Pushbutton size Terminal Contact Model
LED 24 VDC R ed 30 dia. Solder ter m inal S PS T-NC A165E-LS-24D-01
DPST-NC A165E-LS-24D-02
Non-lighted --- SPST-NC A165E-S-01
DPST-NC A165E-S-02
LED 24 VDC 40 dia. SPST-NC A 165E-LM -24D- 01
DPST-NC A165E-LM-24D-02
Non-lighted --- SPST-NC A165E-M-01
DPST-NC A165E-M-02
30 dia. TPST-NC A165E-M-03U
40 dia. A165E-S-03U
Appearance Illumination Model
30 dia. Non-lighted A165E-S
Lighted A165E-LS
40 dia. Non-lighted A165E-M
Lighted A165E-LM
Appearance LED color Rated voltage Model
Red Standard 5 VDC A16-5DR
12 VDC A16-12DR
24 VDC A16-24DR
Bright 5 VDC A16-5DSR
12 VDC A16-12DSR
24 VDC A16-24DSR
Appearance Illumination Contact
form Model
Non-lighted SPST-NC A165E-01
DPST-NC A165E-02
Lighted SPST-NC A165E-01L
DPST-NC A165E-02L
Appearance Illumination Contact
form Model
Lighted SPST-NC A165E-R-24D-01
DPST-NC A165E-R-24D-02
Item Appearance Type Model Precautions
Yellow Plate Yellow, 45 dia. A 16Z-5070 Use this as an emergency stop name -
plate.
P anel Plug Rectangular A16ZJ-3003 Used for co vering the panel cutouts f or
future panel expansion.
Degree of protection: IP40
Color: Black
Square A16ZA-3003
Round A16ZT-3003
Tightening Tool --- A16Z-3004 Useful f or repetitive mounting. Be
careful not to tighten e x cessively.
Extractor A16Z-5080 Convenient for extracting the Switch
and Lamp.
114
Specifications
Certified Standards
Note: Certification for CSA C22.2 No. 14 is indicated by the mark.
Certified Standard Ratings
UL508, CSA C22.2 No.14,
CCC(GB14048.5)
Models with Separate Construction
Models with One-piece Construction
TÜV(EN60947-5-1)
Models with Separate Construction
Models with One-piece Construction
Certification body Standards File No.
UL, cUL (See note.) UL508, CSA C22.2 No.14 E41515
TÜV Product Service EN60947-5-1, EN60947-5-5 Inquire
CQC (CCC) GB14048.5 2003010303070678
Rated voltage Resistive load
125 VAC
250 VAC
30 VDC
5 A
3 A
3 A
Rated voltage Resistive load
125 VAC
250 VAC
30 VDC
1 A
0.5 A
1 A
Rated voltage Resistive load
250 VAC
30 VDC 3 A
3 A
Rated voltage Resistive load
250 VAC
30 VDC 0.5 A
1 A
115
Ratings
Switch Ratings LED Ratings
(only for Models with LEDs)
Characteristics
Note: 1. LED not mounted. Test them with the LED removed.
2. Degree of protection from the front of the panel.
Operating Characteristics
Rated voltage Resistive load
Models with
Separate
Construction
Models with
One-piece
Construction
A165E series A165E@-U series
125 VAC
250 VAC
30 VDC
5 A
3 A
3 A
1 A
0.5 A
1 A
Minimum applicable
load 150 mA at 5 VDC 1 mA at 5 VDC
Rated voltage Rated current Operation voltage
24 VDC 10 mA 24 VDC±5%
Item Emergency Stop Switch
Non-lighted
A165E-S/A165E-M Lighted
A165E-LS/A165-LM Non-lighted, One-piece
construction
A165E-U
Allowable operating
frequency
Mechanical 20 operations/minute max.
Electrical 10 operations/minute max.
Insulation resistance 100 M min. (at 500 VDC)
Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of same polarity
2,000 V A C, 50/60 Hz f or 1 min between terminals of diff erent polarity and also between each terminal
and ground
1,000 V A C, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between lamp terminals (See note 1.) ---
Vibration resistance Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude (malfunction within 1 ms)
Shock resistance Destruction 500 m/s2
Malfunction 300 m/s2 max.
(malfunction within 1 ms) 150 m/s2 max.
(malfunction within 1 ms)
Durability Mechanical 100,000 operations min.
Electrical 100,000 operations min.
Ambient temperature Operating: 10°C to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
Storage: 25°C to 65°C (with no icing or condensation)
Ambient humidity Operating: 35% to 85%
Degree of protection IP65 Oil-resistant IP65 (See note 2.) IP65 Oil-resistant (See note 2.)
Electric shock protection class Class II
PTI (tracking characteristic) 175
Degree of contamination 3 (EN60947-5-1)
Weight Approx. 16 g (in case of DPST-NC Switches)
Features Characteristics
Operating force (OF) max. 14.7 N
Releasing force (RF) min. 0.1 N·m
Pretravel (PT) 3.5±0.5 mm (3±0.5 mm In case of A165E@-U series)
116
Nomenclature (Models with Separate Construction)
\
Push-lock, Turn-reset System Prevents
Misuse
Safety Lock Prevents Misuse
Enables emergency stops only when the pushbutton is pressed
intentionally and firmly.
Even if an object or person touches the pushbutton by mistake, the
contact will not be released unless the pushbutton reaches the lock
position.
Illumination Colors
LED Illumination
Red
Non-lighted
Red
Protective Structure and Terminal Type
Protective Structure
Oil-resistant IP65
Terminal Type
Switch Specifications
Standard Loads
Illumination Method
LED
Lamp
LED lamp
Solder terminals
(tab terminals #110)
Note: A165E Emergency Stop Switch must be ordered as a set.
No LED is installed for the non-lighted models.
5 A at 125 VAC
3 A at 250 VAC
3 A at 30 VDC
Contact open
Contact close
d
Lock
p
osition
117
Dimensions
Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
22.1±0.8
22.1±0.8
10.8±5
22.7
16+0.2 dia.
0
3+0.1 dia.
0
Lock ring
Lock
Packing (T0.5)
Mounting ring
30 dia.
A165E-S
A165E-LS
Mounting ring
Lock ring
Lock
Packing (T0.5)
16+0.2 dia.
0
3+0.1 dia.
0
30 dia.
A165E-S-03U
Mounting ring
Packing (T0.5)
Lock ring
Mounting ring
16+0.2 dia.
03+0.1 dia.
0
30 dia.
Non-lighted models
30 mm diameter
7.8+0.3 dia.
0
Panel cutout
dimensions
Note: 1. When applying a coating such as
paint to the panel, dimensions
after the coating must satisfy the
specified dimensions.
2. Recommended panel thickness:
0.5 to 3.2 mm.
Lighted models
30 mm diameter
0
7.8+0.3 dia.
Panel cutout
dimensions
Note: 1. When applying a coating such as
paint to the panel, dimensions
after the coating must satisfy the
specified dimensions.
2. Recommended panel thickness:
0.5 to 3.2 mm.
7.8+0.3 dia.
0
Panel cutout
dimensions
Note: 1. When applying a coating such as
paint to the panel, dimensions
after the coating must satisfy the
specified dimensions.
2. Recommended panel thickness:
0.5 to 3.2 mm.
Non-lighted,
one-body models
30 mm diameter
118
M16×1
10.8±0.5
21.1±0.8
28.5±0.8
20±0.8
M16×1
1.42.6
M16×1
21.5±0.5 1
0.5
12.3
15.8
2.8
12.1
18
0.5
12.3
15.8
2.8
6.05
18
A165E-M
A165E-LM
A165E-M-03U
Mounting ring
Lock ring
Lock
Packing (T0.5)
40 dia.
16+0.2 dia.
03+0.1 dia.
0
Mounting ring
Lock ring
Lock
Packing (T0.5)
40 dia.
16+0.2 dia.
03+0.1 dia.
0
Mounting ring
Lock ring
40 dia.
3+0.1 dia.
0
16+0.2 dia.
0
Lock
Packing (T0.5)
Switch
Switch
Non-lighted models
40 mm diameter
7.8+0.3 dia.
0
Panel cutout
dimensions
Note: 1. When applying a coating such as
paint to the panel, dimensions
after the coating must satisfy the
specified dimensions.
2. Recommended panel thickness:
0.5 to 3.2 mm.
Lighted models
40 mm diameter
7.8+0.3 dia.
0
Panel cutout
dimensions
Note: 1. When applying a coating such as
paint to the panel, dimensions
after the coating must satisfy the
specified dimensions.
2. Recommended panel thickness:
0.5 to 3.2 mm.
One-body models
40 mm diameter
7.8+0.3 dia.
0
Panel cutout
dimensions
Note: 1. When applying a coating such as
paint to the panel, dimensions
after the coating must satisfy the
specified dimensions.
2. Recommended panel thickness:
0.5 to 3.2 mm.
119
Accessories
Yellow Plate (Vinyl Chloride)
Lock Ring
Panel Plugs
Select an app ropriate Panel Plug according to the panel desig n and
mount from the front side of the panel. Panel cutout dimensions are
the same as those for the Switch.
Screw Fitting
Terminal Arrangement
t=1
A16Z-5070
15.6 dia.
45 dia.
12 × 12
15.8 ±0.1 dia.
Rough surface
15 dia. 0
0.1
Rough
surface
Rectangular Square Round
A16Z-3004
18 dia.
NC3
NC1
NC2
SPST Switches
Note: The L+ and L terminals are not available with the non-lighted models.
DPST Switches TPST Switches
Stopper
120
Installation
Mounting to the Panel
After installing the Operation Unit, snap in the Switch from the back of the panel.
1. Installing the Switch
Attach rubber packing or the Yellow Plate onto the Switch from its terminal side. Insert the Switch into the panel from the front. Install the lock ring
and mounting nut from the ter m inal side and tighten.
Adjust the slits on the hole of rubber packing and Yellow Plate to the protruding part of the Unit.
Rubber packing is not necessary when the Yellow Plate is used.
Tighten the nut to the torque of 0.29 to 0.49 N·m.
Casing should be installed with its protr uding part adjusted to the slit of the panel hole.
Align the lock ring to the groove of the casing so that the edge is drawn to the panel side.
2. Mounting the Switch
Snap on the Switch to the Operation Unit.
Make sure that the Switch has the correct orientation when snapping
it onto the Operation Unit. Align the white dot on the Operation Unit
with the guide groove on the side of the Switch marked with an “Las
shown below, and push the Switch into the Operation Unit until it
clicks into place. Confirm that the S witch is securely in place before
using.
3. Removing the Switch
Insert the prongs of the A16Z-5080 Extractor between the Switch
and the Operation Unit, grip the Switch, and pull to remove.
4. Installing the LED Lamp
When mounting the Lam p, make sure it is facing the direction shown
in the f ollowing diagram. Insert the Lamp while matching the protrud-
ing part of the Lamp and the small guides on the outer surface of the
casing.
Panel
Mounting nut
Lock ring
Rubber packing or Yellow Plate (sold separately)
Edge
Lock
Cutout
Panel
Mounting nut
Lock hole
Lock ring
Rubber packing
(included with the
product) or Yellow
Plate (sold separately)
White dot
L marking
Guide groove
Extractor
(A16Z-5080)
Protruding part
Narrow guide
Wide guide
121
Safety Precautions
Ref e r to the Common Precautions for Pushbutton Switches on page 14.
Precautions for Correct Use
Mounting
Always make sure that the power is turned OFF before mounting,
removing, or wiring the Switch, or performing maintenance. Electrical
shock or fire may result if the power is not turned OFF.
The tightening torque is 0.29 to 0.49 N·m.
Wiring
Be sure to use electrical wires that are a size appropriate for the
applied vol tage and carry current. Perf orm soldering according to the
conditions given below. If the soldering is not properly performed,
abnorm al heating may result, possibly resulting in fire.
1. Hand soldering: 30 W, within 5 s
2. Dip soldering: 240°C, within 3 s
Wait for one minute after soldering before exerting any external force
on the solder.
Use non-corrosive resin fluid as the flux.
Make sure that the electric cord is wired so that it does not touch t he
Unit. If the electric cord will touch the Unit, then electric wires with a
heat resistance of 100°C min. must be used.
After wiring the Switch, maintain an appropriate clearance and
creepage distance.
Operating Environment
The IP65 model is designed with a degree of protection so that it will
not sustain damage if it is subjected to water from any direction t o the
front of the panel.
Using the Microload
Inser t a contact protection circuit, if necessar y, to prevent the reduc-
tion of life expectancy due to extreme wear on the contacts caused
by loads where inrush current occurs when the contact is opened
and closed.
The A165E-@U allows both a standard load (125 V at 1 A, 250 V at
0.5 A) and a microload. If a standard load is applied, however, the
microload area cannot be used. If the microload area is used with a
standard load, the contact surface will become rough, and the open-
ing and closing of the contact for a microload may become unreli-
able.
The minimum applicable load is the N-level reference value. This
value indicate s the malfunction reference level for the reliability level
of 60% (λ 60) (conforming to JIS C5003).
The equation, λ 60 = 0. 5 x 1 0 6/time indicates that the estimated mal-
function rate is less than 1/2,000,000 with a reliability level of 60%.
LEDs
The LED current-limiting resistor is built-in, so internal resistance is
not required.
Operating Torque
Do not exceed an operating torque of 0.49 N·m in the direction of
rotation.
Do not pull the operating button or apply excessive force to any side
of the button. Otherwise it may be damaged.
Others
The oil-resistant IP65 uses NBR rubber and is resistant to general
cutting oil and cooling oil. Some particular oils cannot be used with
the oil-resistant IP65, however, so contact your OMRON representa-
tive for details.
When painting or coating the panel, make sure that the specified
panel dimensions apply to the panel after painting or coating.
Due to the structure of the switch, severe shock or vibration may
cause malfunctions or damage to the swit ch. Also, most swit ches are
made from resin and will be damaged if they come into contact with
shar p objects. Par ticularly scratches on the O peration Unit may cre-
ate visual and operational obtrusions. Handle the switches with care,
and do not throw or drop them.
0.15 mA
1 mA
Area of use
Voltage (V)
Current
(
mA
)
Invalid
area
Rated voltage Internal limiting resistor
24 VDC 2000
Dropping objects or
placing heavy objects
on a switch
Operating a switch with
a hard or sharp object
Dropping or striking
Screwdriver
Hammer
In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice.
ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.
Cat. No. A120-E1-06
122
Indicator
M16
Cylindrical 16-dia. Indicator
Same basic design as the A16 Pushbutton Switch.
UL and cUL approved (File No. E41515).
Model Number Structure
Model Number Legend
Completely Assembled
The model numbers used to order sets of Units are illustrated below. One set comprises the Display, Case, Lamp, and Socket.
(1) (2) (3) (4)
5
R
G
Y
PY
W
A
(5)
J
A
T
S
IP40
M 1 6 5 - T R - 24D - S
(1) Degree of Protection
Symbol Protection
IP65 oil-resistant
(3) Color of Display
Symbol Color
Red
Green
Yellow
Pure yellow
White
Blue
(2) Shape of Display
Symbol Shape
Rectangular
Square
Round
(5) Terminal Type
Symbol Terminal type
Screw-Less Clamp
(4) Light Source
Voltage Reduction Unit (24-V Built-in LED)
LED
Solder terminals are available only with 100-V models.
No symbol
No symbol Solder terminals
LED
Symbol Type Operating voltage Rated voltage
Incandescent
lamp
Symbol Type Operating voltage Rated voltage
5 5 V A C/VDC 6 V AC/VDC
12 12 V AC/VDC 14 V AC/VDC
24 24 V AC/VDC 28 V AC/VDC
5D 5 ±5% VDC 5 VDC
12D 12 ±5% VDC 12 VDC
24D 24 ±5% VDC 24 VDC
T1 90 to 121 VAC/VDC 110 VAC/VDC
T2 180 to 242 VAC/VDC 220 VAC/VDC
123
Ordering Information
List of Models
Ordering as a Set
The model numbers used to order sets of Units are given in the follo wing tables. One set comprises the Display, Case, Lamp, and Socket .
M16@-J (Rectangular) Models
Solder Terminal Models
M16@-A (Square) Models
Solder Terminal Models
M16@-T (Round) Models
Solder Terminal Models
Note: Enter the desired color symbol for the Display in @.
Appearance Lighting Operating voltage IP40 IP65 oil-resistant Display color symbol
(See note.)
LED without Voltage
Reduction Unit 5 VDC M16-J@-5D M165-J@-5D R: red
Y: y ellow
G: green
A: blue
W: white
PY: Pure yellow
12 VDC M16-J@-12D M165-J@-12D
24 VDC M16-J@-24D M165-J@-24D
Incandescent lamp 5 VD C/VAC M16-J@-5 M165-J@-5
12 VDC/VAC M16-J@-12 M165-J@-12
24 VDC/VAC M16-J@-24 M165-J@-24
Appearance Lighting Operating voltage IP40 IP65 oil-resistant Display color symbol
(See note.)
LED without Voltage
Reduction Unit 5 VDC M16-A@-5D M165-A@-5D R: red
Y: y ellow
G: green
A: blue
W: white
PY: Pure yellow
12 VDC M16-A@-12D M165-A@-12D
24 VDC M16-A@-24D M165-A@-24D
Incandescent lamp 5 VDC/VAC M16-A@-5 M165-A@-5
12 VDC/VAC M16-A@-12 M165-A@-12
24 VDC/VAC M16-A@-24 M165-A@-24
Appearance Lighting Operating voltage IP40 IP65 oil-resistant Display color symbol
(See note.)
LED without Voltage
Reduction Unit 5 VDC M16-T@-5D M165-T@-5D R: red
Y: y ellow
G: green
A: blue
W: white
PY: Pure yellow
12 VDC M16-T@-12D M165-T@-12D
24 VDC M16-T@-24D M165-T@-24D
Incandescent lamp 5 VDC/VAC M16-T@-5 M165-T@-5
12 VDC/VAC M16-T@-12 M165-T@-12
24 VDC/VAC M16-T@-24 M165-T@-24
124
Ordering Individually
Displays , Cases, Lamps, and Socket s can be ordered separately. Combinations that are not av ailable as sets can be created using individual parts.
Also, store the par ts as spares for maintenance and repairs.
Note: Socket Units, which are combinations of Lamps and Sockets, are also available.
Display (Refer to page 125.)
Rectangular Square Round
Note: Use IP40 Displays in combination with IP40 Sock-
ets and use IP65 Displays in combination with IP65
Sockets.
Case (Refer to page 125.)
Lamp (Refer to page 125.)
Socket (Refer to page 126.)
Note: Display Units, which are combinations of
Displays and Cases, are also available.
Lighted Models
LED Incandescent Lam
p
Solder Terminals
(Without Voltage Reduction Unit)
125
Display
For LED-lighted Models
Incandescent Lamps (With the exception of green, the Units are the same as for LEDs.)
Lamp
LED
Note: Use the white LED when the required illumination color is white or pure yello w.
Incandescent Lamp
Case
Sealing IP40 IP65 oil-resistant
Appearance
Color of Display
Red A16L-JR A16L-AR A16L-TR A165L-JR A165L-AR A165L-TR
Yellow A16L-JY A16L-AY A16L-TY A165L-JY A165L-AY A165L-TY
Pure yellow A16L-J PY A 16L-A PY A16L-TPY A165L-JPY A165L- APY A165L-TP Y
Green A16L-JGY A16L-AGY A16L-TGY A165L-JGY A165L-AGY A165L-TGY
White A16L-JW A16L-AW A16L-TW A165L-JW A165L-AW A165L-TW
Blue A16L-JA A16L-AA A16L-TA A165L-JA A165L-AA A165L-TA
Sealing IP40 IP65 oil-resistant
Appearance
Color of Display
Red A16L-JR A16L-AR A16L-TR A165L-JR A165L-AR A165L-TR
Yellow A16L-JY A16L-AY A16L-TY A165L-JY A165L-AY A165L-TY
Pure yellow A16L-JPY A16L-APY A16L-TPY A 165L-J PY A165L -AP Y A165L-TPY
Green A16L-JG A16L-AG A16L-TG A165L-JG A165L-AG A165L-TG
White A16L-JW A16L-AW A16L-TW A165L-JW A165L-AW A165L-TW
Blue A16L-JA A16L-AA A16L-TA A165L-JA A165L-AA A165L-TA
Rectangular Square Round Rectangular Square Round
Rectangular Square Round Rectangular Square Round
Color Operating voltage
5 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC
Red A16-5DSR A16-12DSR A16-24DSR
Yellow A16-5DSY A16-12DSY A16-24DSY
Green A16-5DSG A16-12DSG A16-24DSG
White (See note.) A16-5DSW A16-12DSW A16-24DSW
Blue A16-5DA A16-12DA A16-24DA
Operating voltage 5 VAC/VDC 12 VAC/VDC 24 VAC/VDC
Model A16-5 A16-12 A16-24
Appearance Classification Model number
IP40 Rectangular A16-CJM
Square A16-CAM
Round A16-CTM
IP65 oil-resistant Rectangular A165-C JM
Square A165-CAM
Round A165-CTM
126
Socket
Specifications
Approved Standards
Note: cUL: CSA, C22.2 No. 14
Ratings
Super-bright LED
Note: The values in parentheses are for blue or red Pushbuttons.
Incandescent Lamp
Neon Lamp
Characteristics
Note: Characteristics not provided above are the same as those for the A16.
Screw-less Clamp
Appearance Classification Model number
Solder term inals M16-0
PCB terminals M16-0P
Screw-Less Clamp M16-S
Solder terminals Voltage-reduction lighting 100 V M16-T1
Screw-Less Clamp 100 V M16-T1-S
200 V M16-T2-S
Agency Standards File No.
UL, cUL (See note.) UL508 E41515
Solder terminals
Rated
voltage Rated current Operating
voltage Built-in limiting
resistance
5 VDC 30 mA (red: 15 mA) 5 VDC ±5% 33 (blue: 51 ,
red: 68 )
12 VDC 15 mA 12 VDC ±5% 270 (blue: 270 ,
red 560 )
24 VDC 10 mA 24 VDC ±5% 1,600 (blue:
1.8 k, red: 2 k)
Rated voltage Rated current Operating voltage
6 VAC/VDC 60 mA 5 VAC/VDC
14 VAC/VDC 40 mA 12 VAC/VDC
28 VAC/VDC 24 mA 24 VAC/VDC
Rated voltage Rated current Operating voltage
110 VAC 1.5 mA 100 VAC ±10%
220 VAC 1.5 mA 200 VAC ±10%
Ambient operating temperature 10°C to 55°C (with no icing or
condensation)
Ambient operating humidity 35% to 85%
Ambient storage temperature 25°C to 65°C
Item Screw-less Clamp
Recommended wire size 0.5 mm2 twisted wire or 0.8 mm-dia. solid wire
Usable wires and ten-
sile strength Twisted wire 0.3 mm20.5 mm20.75 mm21. 25 mm2
Solid wire 0.5 mm dia. 0.8 mm dia. 1.0 mm dia. ---
Tensile strength 10 N 20 N 30 N 40 N
Length of exposed wire 10 ±1 mm
127
Dimensions
Note: 1. All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
2. Refer to page 129 for details of panel cutout dimensions.
M16 × 1
Rectangular
M16-J
Solder terminals
Square
M16-A
Solder terminals
Round
M16-T
Solder terminals
Mounting nut
P acking (t0.5)
Lock ring
Lamp terminals
Mounting nut
Packing (t0.5)
Lock ring
Lamp terminals
Mounting nut
Packing (t0.5)
Lock ring
Lamp terminals
Terminal Hole Dimensions
Lamp terminals
14.6 dia.
18 dia.
18 dia.
15.1 dia.
18 dia.
14.6 dia.
14.6 dia.
18 dia.
14.6 dia.
18 dia.
128
Direction-indication arrow
18 15.1
21
24
0.5
0.5
4.85 18.6
18.4 20.4
6.3
2.5
12.4
4
23.1
28.3
26.4
21.1
10.8
9.5
6
Rectangular
M16@-P
Rectangular
M16@-T1, T2
Lock ring
Mounting ring
Socket
Display
Case Marking face
Direction-indication arrow
Panel Cutouts
25 min.
16
+0.2
dia.
0
Recommended panel thickness: 0.5 to 3.2 mm
Voltage-reduction lighting,
solder terminals
Packing (t0.5)
(for oil-resistant IP65 only)
23 min.
(Dimension A)
PCB terminals
Lock ring
Mounting ring
Packing (t0.5)
(for oil-resistant IP65 only)
Panel Cutouts
24 min.
16
+0.2
dia.
0
24 min.
Recommended panel thickness: 0.5 to 3.2 mm
The rectangular model is given here as a representative example.
Lamp terminals are provided even for non-lighting applications.
Rectangular
M16@-S
Screw-Less Clamp
Socket dismounting lever Lock ring
Mounting ring
P acking (t0.5)
(for oil-resistant IP65 only)
129
Terminal Arrangement
Panel Cutouts
Solder Terminals
Installation
Ref e r to the Installation section for the A16.
Solder Terminals Screw-Less Clamp Voltage-reduction Lighting
Side with TOP indicated
Bottom View
Side with TOP indicated
Bottom View
Bottom View Black
Red
Note: The L+ is not shown
on the Socket Unit.
Note: Voltage-reduction lighting mod-
els with Screw-Less Clamps
(A16L-@T1-2S, A16L-@T2-2S)
incorporate voltage-reduction
circuits.
Solder Terminals
Rectangular M16@-J
(Top View) (Top View)
24 min.
19 min.
16+0.2 dia.
0
19 min.
19 min.
25 min.
Screw-Less Clamp
(Top View)
Square M16@-A
Round M16@-T
16+0.2 dia.
016+0.2 dia.
0
Rectangular
M16@-S
32 min.
(Dimension A)
2. If the panel is to be finished with coating, etc., make sure that the panel meets the specified dimensions after coating.
Note: 1. Make sure the thickness of the mounting panel is 0.5 to 3.2 mm. If, however, a Switch Guard or Dust Cover is used, the
thickness of the mounting panel must be 0.5 to 2 mm.
130
Precautions
Refer to th e Technical Information for Pushbutton Switches (Cat. No. A143) and the Precautions section for the A16.
Correct Use
Mounting
When mounting the Case onto the Sock et Unit, ensure that the orien-
tation is correct. Perform mounting with the • mark on the Case and
the T OP mark on the Sock et Unit facing in the same direction.
Wiring
When using stranded wire, gather the ends of the strands together
before wiring.
When wiring, insert the wire until it comes into contact with some-
thing. After wiring is com pleted, pull on the wires t o c onfirm that they
are connected securely.
After wiring, ensure that continuous pressure is not applied to the ter-
minals.
Refer to internal connections diagrams and confirm the terminal
numbers before performing wiring.
Screw-Less Clamps
Mounting Procedure
1. Strip a length of 10 mm off the end of the wire (allowable range:
10±1 mm).
2. Bunch wire strands together and straighten them.
3. Insert the wire into the insertion hole while pressing the release
button at the side of the hole. (Using a precision screwdriver is
recommended.)
4. Let go of the release button to loc k the wire into place.
5. After locking, pull on the wire gently to confirm that it is securely
locked.
Removing Procedure
Remove wires by pulling them while pressing the release button.
Note: When reusing wires that have already been locked, cut off the
end of the wire and strip the wire again before using.
Case
TOP mark
mark Socket Unit
In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice.
ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.
Cat. No. A127-E1-03
131
Buzzer M2BJ-B
16-mm Diameter Panel-Mounted Buzzer
Unit
Four models offer eight different types of sounds,
plus two modes newly added to the high-sound
models
Intermittent or continuous sound selected by
jumper setting
Three supply voltages: 6 VAC/VDC and 12 to
24 VAC/VDC
Jumper storage provided at bottom of Unit
Complements the A16 range of Pushbuttons,
Selector Switches, and Key Switches.
Ordering Information
List of Models
Item Standard sound
M2BJ-B
High sound
M2BJ-BH
Sound w/jumper Intermittent Intermittent
(short) Intermittent
(high-pitched) Intermittent
(short,
high-pitched)
Intermittent
(high-pitched) Intermittent
(short)
w/o jumper Continuous Intermittent
(long) Continuous
(high-pitched) Intermittent
(long,
high-pitched)
Continuous Intermittent
(long)
Supply
lt
6 VAC/VDC M2BJ-B06 M2BJ-B06A M2BJ-B06B M2BJ-B06C M2BJ-BH06D M2BJ-BH06E
pp y
voltage 12 to
24 VAC/VDC M2BJ-B24 M2BJ-B24A M2BJ-B24B M2BJ-B24C M2BJ-BH24D M2BJ-BH24E
12 to
24 VDC M2BJ-B24-D --- M2BJ-B24B-D --- M2BJ-BH24D-D M2BJ-BH24E-D
Note: High-sound models incorporate an LED, which lights when the Buzzer sounds.
M2BJ-B M2BJ-B
132
Specifications
Standard-sound Models
6-V Models
Model M2BJ-B06 M2BJ-B06A M2BJ-B06B M2BJ-B06C
Rated voltage 6 VAC/VDC
Sound pressure (See note.) Continuous sound: 80 dB (phons) min.
Driving frequency 2±0.5 kHz 4±0.5 kHz
Intervals 190 times/minute±10% Long:
55 times/minute±10%
Short:
700 times/minute±10%
190 times/minute±10% Long:
55 times/minute±10%
Short:
700 times/minute±10%
Current consumption DC 7 mA max. 20 mA max.
p
AC 20 mA max.
Inrush current 1 A max.
Life expectancy 1,000 hours min.
Insulation resistance 100 M min. (between ground and current-carrying parts)
Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC for 1 minute (between grounds)
Ambient temperature Operating: –10°C to 55°C (no icing or condensation)
Storage: –25°C to 65°C (no icing or condensation)
Humidity 35% to 85%
Weight Approx. 9 g
Note: The figure for sound pressure given above is for measurement at a distance of 0.1 m at the rated voltage.
12 to 24-V Models
Model M2BJ-B24 M2BJ-B24A M2BJ-B24B M2BJ-B24C M2BJ-B24-D M2BJ-B24B-D
Rated voltage 12 to 24 VAC/VDC 12 to 24 VDC
Sound
pressure
(See note.)
Continuous sound: 80 dB (phons) min.
Driving
frequency 2±0.5 kHz 4±0.5 kHz 2±0.5 kHz, 4±0.5 kHz
Intervals 190 times/minute
±10% Long:
55 times/minute±
10%
Short:
700 times/minute
±10%
190 times/minute
±10% Long:
55 times/minute±
10%
Short:
700 times/minute
±10%
190 times/minute±10%
Current
consumpt
DC 7 mA max. 20 mA max. 7 mA max. 20 mA max.
consumpt
ion AC 20 mA ---
Inrush current 1 A max. ---
Life
expectancy 1,000 hours min.
Insulation
resistance 100 M min. (between ground and current-carrying parts)
Dielectric
strength 1,000 VAC for 1 minute (between grounds)
Ambient
temperature Operating: –10°C to 55°C (no icing or condensation)
Storage: –25°C to 65°C (no icing or condensation)
Humidity 35% to 85%
Weight Approx. 9 g
Note: The figure for sound pressure given above is for measurement at a distance of 0.1 m at the rated voltage.
M2BJ-B M2BJ-B
133
High-sound Models (LED is incorporated)
Model M2BJ-BH06D M2BJ-BH24D M2BJ-BH06E M2BJ-BH24E M2BJ-BH24D-D M2BJ-BH24E-D
Rated voltage 6 VAC/VDC 12 to
24 VAC/VDC 6 VAC/VDC 12 to
24 VAC/VDC 12 to 24 VDC
Sound pressure
(See note.) 70 to 100 dB (phons)
Driving frequency 2.8±0.5 kHz
Intervals Approx. 190 times/min. Long: Approx. 55 times/min.
Short: Approx. 700 times/min. Approx.
190 times/min. Long: Approx.
55 times/min.
Short: Approx.
700 times/min.
Current
ti
DC 50 mA max.
consumption AC 100 mA max. ---
Inrush current 1 A max. ---
Life expectancy 1,000 hours min.
Insulation resistance 100 M min. (between ground and current-carrying parts)
Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC for 1 minute (between grounds)
Ambient
temperature Operating: –10°C to 55°C (no icing or condensation)
Storage: –25°C to 65°C (no icing or condensation)
Humidity 35% to 85%
Weight Approx. 13 g
Note: The sound pressure can be adjusted. The figure for sound pressure given above is for measurement at a distance of 0.1 m at the rated
voltage.
Operation
Contact Form
All Models
(Standard and High-sound Models)
Terminal Hole Dimensions
Terminal Arrangement
(Bottom view)
Jumper
Power supply
Note: There is no +/– polarity.
M2BJ-B M2BJ-B
134
Dimensions
Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
M2BJ-B
Standard-sound Models
Panel cutout (Top view)
M2BJ-BH
High-sound Models Panel cutout (Top view)
18 dia.
14.8 dia.
20 min.
26 min.
16+0.2
0 dia.
M16 x 1
Note: Recommended panel thickness: 1.0 to 3.2 mm.
Control knob
(Groove width
0.6 x length
1.7 x depth
0.7)
Turn-lock metal
Mounting ring Short-circuit
terminal
(for switching
sound)
Turn-lock metal
24
Sound outlet
Jumper
(for switching
intermittent sound)
20
M2BJ-BH24D-DA
External Signal Selection Model
An external signal selection model is also available. With this model, it is possible to switch between continuous and intermittent sound using an
external signal instead of the jumper.
SW:
When A direction is ON (terminals 1, 2 ON): intermittent sound
When B direction is ON (terminals 2, 3 ON): continuous sound
Note: Ensure that voltage is not applied simultaneously between terminals 1, 2, and 3.
M2BJ-B M2BJ-B
135
Precautions
Correct Use
Application Precautions
When power is supplied, there is an inrush current of up to 1 A. Con-
firm that this will not adversely affect operation or damage any
devices before using the M2BJ in application. There is no inrush
current with DC-only models (M2BJ-jjj-D).
Wiring
Perform soldering promptly and correctly at 30 W within 5 seconds
or at a temperature of 240°C within 3 seconds. W ait for one minute
after soldering before exerting any external force on the solder.
If flux is required, use non-corrosive rosin liquid. Ensure that the flux
does not penetrate the inside of the case.
In order to improve the reliability of the soldering and to prevent pat-
tern burnout, loop the wire through the terminal hole before solder-
ing.
In order to fit the terminal holes, use lead wires with a nominal cross-
sectional area of 0.25 mm2 max.
Operating Environment
Do not use the Buzzer in environments where foreign substances
may enter the sound outlet. Otherwise, the Buzzer may not sound.
Short-circuiting Jumper (M2BJ-BTH)
The Buzzer sounds continuously or intermittently depending on
how the short-circuiting bracket is attached to the case guide. When
the bracket is attached with the triangle on it facing direction A (PC
board side), the Buzzer sounds intermittently.
Case guide
Direction B
Bracket
Direction A
To produce continuous sounds, attach the bracket to the case guide
so that the triangle on the bracket faces direction B.
Case guide
Bracket
PC board
Volume Adjustment Mechanism (M2BJ-BH Only)
Adjust the volume by turning the control knob on the face of the
Buzzer using a screwdriver. Turn to the right to increase the volume
and turn to the left to decrease the volume.
Turn the control knob with a torque of 0.98 to 2.94 mNm.
LED
Control knob
ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.
Cat. No. A046-E1-04
136
Pushbutton Switch
A22
Install in 22-dia. or 25-dia. Panel Cutout
Easy mounting and removal of Switch Un it.
Increase wiring efficiency with three-row mounting of Switch
Blocks.
Finger protection mechanism on Switch Unit provided as a stan-
dard feature.
Use 25-dia. ring to install in 25-dia. panel cutouts.
Mounted using either open-type (fork-type) or closed-type
(round-type) crimp terminals.
Wide range of shapes and colors.
IP65 oil resistance (non-lighted models)
IP65 (lighted mod els )
EN60947-5-1
UL and cUL approved (File No. E41515)
Model Number Structure
Model Number Legend
Completely Assembled
Shipped as a set which includes the Pushbutton, Lamp (lighted type only), and Switch.
1 2 3 4 5 6
L
F
T
G
H
C
S
M
T
G
H
C
D
R
G
Y
W
A
B
6D 6 VDC
6A 6 VAC
12A 12 VAC/VDC
24A 24 VAC/VDC
5 5 VAC/VDC
12 12 VAC/VDC
24 24 VAC/VDC
H1 100 VAC/VDC
T1
T2
10
01
11
20
02
M
A
D
Incandes-
cent lamp
A22@-@@-@-@@
1 Lighted/Non-lighted
Code Description
No symbol Non-lighted
Lighted
2 Flange Shape
Code Description
Round/Flat
Round/Projection
Round/Full-guard
Round/Half-guard
Square/Projection
Square/Full-guard
Round/Mushroom (30-dia. head)
Round/Mushroom (40-dia. head)
Lighted
Round/Projection
Round/Full-guard
Round/Half-guard
Square/Projection
Square/Full-guard
Non-lighted
3 Illumination Color
Code Description
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Black (for non-lighted type only)
4 Light Source
Code Operating Voltage
LED
With Voltage Reduction Unit
LED 100 VAC (See note 1)
200 VAC (See note 2)
Without Voltage Reduction Unit
5 Contacts
Code Description
SPST-NO
SPST-NC
SPST-NO + SPST-NC
DPST-NO
DPST-NC
6 Switch Action
Code Description
Momentary
Alternate
Note: 1. Operational voltage: 95 to 115 VAC
2. Operational voltage: 190 to 230 VAC
3. The LED lamp (24 VAC/VDC) can be
lit by directly applying 100 VAC/VDC
(200 VAC/VDC) to the lamp terminal.
4. LED incorporates the 24-VAC/VDC
type to the Voltage Reduction Unit
models.
No symbol Non-lighted
Note: Refer to page 149 for
contact ratings.
137
Subassembled
The Pushbutton, Lamp, or Switch can be ordered separately. Use them in combination for models that are not av ailable as assembled Units. These
can also be used as inv entory for maintenance parts.
1. Pushbutton
2. Lamp
1 2 3
LF
T
G
H
C
D
S
M
T
G
H
C
D
R
G
Y
W
A
B
A22@-@@
1 Lighted/Non-lighted
Code Description
None Non-lighted
Lighted
2 Flange Shape
Code Description
Round/Flat
Round/Projection
Round/Full-guard
Round/Half-guard
Square/Projection
Square/Full-guard
Round/Mushroom (30-dia. head)
Round/Mushroom (40-dia. head)
Lighted
Round/Projection
Round/Full-guard
Round/Half-guard
Square/Projection
Square/Full-guard
Non-lighted
3 Illumination Color
Code Description
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Black (for non-lighted type only)
1 2
R
G
Y
A
5 5 V AC (6 V A C)
12 12 V A C (14 VAC)
24 24 V A C (28 VAC)
6D 6 VDC (6 VDC)
6A 6 V A C (6 V A C)
12A 12 VAC/VDC (12 VAC/VDC)
24A 24 VAC/VDC (24 VAC/VDC)
A22-@@
2 Illumination Color
Code Description
None Incandescent lamp
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
1 Operating Voltage (Rated Voltage)
Code Description
LED lamp
Incandescent lamp
138
3. Switch (Standard Load)
1 2 3 4
L
10
01
11
20
02
M
AT1
T2
A22@-@@-@
1 Lighted/Non-lighted
Code Description
None Non-lighted
Lighted
2 Contacts
Code Description
SPST-NO
SPST-NC
SPST-NO + SPST-NC
DPST-NO
DPST-NC
3 Switch Action
Code Description
Momentary
Alternate
4 Voltage Reduction Unit (Lighted Type Only)
Code Description
None Without Voltage Reduction Unit
100 VAC (See note 1)
200 VAC (See note 2)
Note: 1. Operational voltage: 95 to 115 VAC
2. Operational voltage: 190 to 230 VAC
139
Ordering Information
List of Models
Ordering as a Set
Non-lighted (Round Type)
Appearance Output Momentary operation
(self-resetting) Alternate operation
(self-holding) Illumination color
SPST-NO A22-F@-10M A22-F@-10A Insert one of the following
letters into the box @.
R (red)
Y (yellow)
G (green)
W (white)
A (blue)
B (black)
SPST-NC A22-F@-01M A22-F@-01A
SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22-F@-11M A22-F@-11A
DPST-NO A22-F@-20M A22-F@-20A
DPST-NC A22-F@-02M A22-F@-02A
SPST-NO A22-T@-10M A22-T@-10A
SPST-NC A22-T@-01M A22-T@-01A
SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22-T@-11M A22-T@-11A
DPST-NO A22-T@-20M A22-T@-20A
DPST-NC A22-T@-02M A22-T@-02A
SPST-NO A22-G@-10M A22-G@-10A
SPST-NC A22-G@-01M A22-G@-01A
SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22-G@-11M A22-G@-11A
DPST-NO A22-G@-20M A22-G@-20A
DPST-NC A22-G@-02M A22-G@-02A
SPST-NO A22-H@-10M A22-H@-10A
SPST-NC A22-H@-01M A22-H@-01A
SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22-H@-11M A22-H@-11A
DPST-NO A22-H@-20M A22-H@-20A
DPST-NC A22-H@-02M A22-H@-02A
SPST-NO A22-S@-10M ---
SPST-NC A22-S@-01M
SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22-S@-11M
DPST-NO A22-S@-20M
DPST-NC A22-S@-02M
SPST-NO A22-M@-10M
SPST-NC A22-M@-01M
SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22-M@-11M
DPST-NO A22-M@-20M
DPST-NC A22-M@-02M
Round/Flat type
A22-F
Round/Projection type
A22-T
Round/Full-guard type
A22-G
Round/Half-guard type
A22-H
A22-S
Round/Small-size
Mushroom type
(30-dia. head)
A22-M
Round/Medium-size
Mushroom type
(40-dia head)
140
Non-lighted (Square Type)
Lighted (Round Type)
Appearance Output Momentary operation
(self-reset) Alternate operation
(self-holding) Illumination color
SPST-NO A22-C@-10M A22-C@-10A Insert one of the following
letters into the box @.
R (red)
Y (yellow)
G (green)
W (white)
A (blue)
B (black)
SPST-NC A22-C@-01M A22-C@-01A
SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22-C@-11M A22-C@-11A
DPST-NO A22-C@-20M A22-C@-20A
DPST-NC A22-C@-02M A22-C@-02A
SPST-NO A22-D@-10M A22-D@-10A
SPST-NC A22-D@-01M A22-D@-01A
SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22-D@-11M A22-D@-11A
DPST-NO A22-D@-20M A22-D@-20A
DPST-NC A22-D@-02M A22-D@-02A
Square/Projection type
A22-C
Square/Guard type
A22-D
Appearance Output Lighting Operating
voltage Momentary operation
(self-resetting) Alternate operation
(self-holding) Illumination
color
SPST-N O LED 6 VDC A22L-T@-6D-10M A22L-T@-6D-10A In sert one of the
following letters
into the box @.
R (red)
Y (yellow)
G (green)
W (white)
A (blue)
6 VAC A22L-T@-6A-10M A22L-T@-6A-10A
12 VAC/VDC A22L-T@-12A-10M A22L-T@-12A-10A
24 VAC/VDC A22L-T@-24A-10M A22L-T@-24A-10A
SPST-N C 6 VDC A22L-T@-6D-01M A22L-T@-6D-01A
6 VAC A22L-T@-6A-01M A22L-T@-6A-01A
12 VAC/VDC A22L-T@-12A-01M A22L-T@-12A-01A
24 VAC/VDC A22L-T@-24A-01M A22L-T@-24A-01A
SPST-NO +
SPST-NC 6 VDC A22L-T@-6D-11M A22L-T@-6D-11A
6 VAC A22L-T@-6A-11M A22L-T@-6A-11A
12 VAC/VDC A22L-T@-12A-11M A22L-T@-12A-11A
24 VAC/VDC A22L-T@-24A-11M A22L-T@-24A-11A
DPST-NO 6 VDC A22L-T@-6D-20M A22L-T@-6D-20A
6 VAC A22L-T@-6A-20M A22L-T@-6A-20A
12 VAC/VDC A22L-T@-12A-20M A22L-T@-12A-20A
24 VAC/VDC A22L-T@-24A-20M A22L-T@-24A-20A
DPST-NC 6 VDC A22L-T@-6D-02M A22L-T@-6D-02A
6 VAC A22L-T@-6A-02M A22L-T@-6A-02A
12 VAC/VDC A22L-T@-12A-02M A22L-T@-12A-02A
24 VAC/VDC A22L-T@-24A-02M A22L-T@-24A-02A
SPST-NO LED 100 VAC A22 L-T@-T1-10M A22L-T@-T1-10A
200 VAC A22L-T@-T2-10M A22L-T@-T2-10A
SPST-NC 100 VAC A22 L-T@-T1-01M A22L-T@-T1-01A
200 VAC A22L-T@-T2-01M A22L-T@-T2-01A
SPST-NO +
SPST-NC 100 VAC A22L-T@-T1-11M A22L-T@-T1-11A
200 VAC A22L-T@-T2-11M A22L-T@-T2-11A
DPST-NO 100 VAC A22L-T@-T1-20M A22L-T@-T1-20A
200 VAC A22L-T@-T2-20M A22L-T@-T2-20A
DPST-NC 100 VAC A22L-T@-T1-02M A22L-T@-T1-02A
200 VAC A22L-T@-T2-02M A22L-T@-T2-02A
SPST-NO 24 VAC/VDC A22 L-H @-24A-10M A22L-H@-24A-10A
SPST-NC A22L-H@-24A-01M A22L-H@-24A-01A
SPST-NO +
SPST-NC A22L-H@-24A-11M A22L-H@-24A-11A
DPST-NO A22L-H@-24A-20M A22L-H@-24A-20A
DPST-NC A22L-H@-24A-02M A22L-H@-24A-02A
A22L-T
Round/Projection
type
LED lighting
(without V oltage
Reduction Unit)
A22L-T
Round/Projection
type
LED voltage-
reduction lighting
(with V oltage
Reduction Unit)
A22L-H
Round/Half-guard
type
LED lighting
(without V oltage
Reduction Unit)
141
SPST-NO LED 100 VAC A22L-H@-T1-10M A22L-H@-T1-10A Insert one of the
following letters
into the box @.
R (red)
Y (yellow)
G (green)
W (white )
A (blue)
200 VAC A22L-H@-T2-10M A22L-H@-T2-10A
SPST-NC 100 VAC A22L-H@-T1-01M A22L-H@-T1-01A
200 VAC A22L-H@-T2-01M A22L-H@-T2-01A
SPST-N O +
SPST-NC 100 VAC A22L-H@-T1-11M A22L-H@-T1-11A
200 VAC A22L-H@-T2-11M A22L-H@-T2-11A
DPST-NO 100 VAC A22L-H@-T1-20M A22L-H@-T1-20A
200 VAC A22L-H@-T2-20M A22L-H@-T2-20A
DPST-NC 100 VAC A22L-H@-T1-02M A22L-H@-T1-02A
200 VAC A22L-H@-T2-02M A22L-H@-T2-02A
SPST-NO 6 VDC A22L-G@-6D-10M A22L-G@-6D-10A
6 VAC A22L-G@-6A-10M A22L-G@-6A-10A
12 VAC/VDC A22L-G@-12A-10M A22L-G@-12A-10A
24 VAC/VDC A22L-G@-24A-10M A22L-G@-24A-10A
SPST-NC 6 VDC A22L-G@-6D-01M A22L-G@-6D-01A
6 VAC A22L-G@-6A-01M A22L-G@-6A-01A
12 VAC/VDC A22L-G@-12A-01M A22L-G@-12A-01A
24 VAC/VDC A22L-G@-24A-01M A22L-G@-24A-01A
SPST-N O +
SPST-NC 6 VDC A22L-G@-6D-11M A22L-G@-6D-11A
6 VAC A22L-G@-6A-11M A22L-G@-6A-11A
12 VAC/VDC A22L-G@-12A-11M A22L-G@-12A-11A
24 VAC/VDC A22L-G@-24A-11M A22L-G@-24A-11A
DPST-NO 6 VDC A22L-G@-6D-20M A22L-G@-6D-20A
6 VAC A22L-G@-6A-20M A22L-G@-6A-20A
12 VAC/VDC A22L-G@-12A-20M A22L-G@-12A-20A
24 VAC/VDC A22L-G@-24A-20M A22L-G@-24A-20A
DPST-NC 6 VDC A22L-G@-6D-02M A22L-G@-6D-02A
6 VAC A22L-G@-6A-02M A22L-G@-6A-02A
12 VAC/VDC A22L-G@-12A-02M A22L-G@-12A-02A
24 VAC/VDC A22L-G@-24A-02M A22L-G@-24A-02A
SPST-NO 100 VAC A22L-G@-T1-10M A22L-G@-T1-10A
200 VAC A22L-G@-T2-10M A22L-G@-T2-10A
SPST-NC 100 VAC A22L-G@-T1-01M A22L-G@-T1-01A
200 VAC A22L-G@-T2-01M A22L-G@-T2-01A
SPST-N O +
SPST-NC 100 VAC A22L-G@-T1-11M A22L-G@-T1-11A
200 VAC A22L-G@-T2-11M A22L-G@-T2-11A
DPST-NO 100 VAC A22L-G@-T1-20M A22L-G@-T1-20A
200 VAC A22L-G@-T2-20M A22L-G@-T2-20A
DPST-NC 100 VAC A22L-G@-T1-02M A22L-G@-T1-02A
200 VAC A22L-G@-T2-02M A22L-G@-T2-02A
Appearance Output Lighting Operating
voltage Momentary operation
(self-resetting) Alternate operation
(self-holding) Illumination
color
A22L-H
Round/Half-guard
type
LED voltage-
reduction lighting
(with V oltage
Reduction Unit)
A22L-G
Round/Full-guard
type
LED lighting
(without V oltage
Reduction Unit)
A22L-G
Round/Full-guard
type
LED voltage-
reduction lighting
(with V oltage
Reduction Unit)
142
Lighted (Square Type)
Appearance Output Lighting Operating
voltage Momentary operation
(self-resetting) Alternate operation
(self-holding) Illumination
color
SPST-NO LED 24 VAC/VDC A22L-C@-24A-10M A22L-C@-24A-10A Insert one of the
following letters
into the box @.
R (red)
Y (yellow)
G (green)
W (white)
A (blue)
SPST-NC A22L-C@-24A-01M A22L-C@-24A-01A
SPST-NO +
SPST-NC A22L-C@-24A-11M A22L-C@-24A-11A
DPST-NO A22L-C@-24A-20M A22L-C@-24A-20A
DPST-NC A22L-C@-24A-02M A22L-C@-24A-02A
SPST-NO 100 VAC A22L-C @-T1-10M A22L-C@-T1-10A
200 VAC A22L-C@-T2-10M A22L-C@-T2-10A
SPST-NC 100 VAC A22 L-C @-T1-01M A22L-C@-T1-01A
200 VAC A22L-C@-T2-01M A22L-C@-T2-01A
SPST-NO +
SPST-NC 100 VAC A22L-C@-T1-11M A22L-C@-T1-11A
200 VAC A22L-C@-T2-11M A22L-C@-T2-11A
DPST-NO 100 VAC A22L-C@-T1-20M A22L-C@-T1-20A
200 VAC A22L-C@-T2-20M A22L-C@-T2-20A
DPST-NC 100 VAC A22L-C@-T1-02M A22L-C@-T1-02A
200 VAC A22L-C@-T2-02M A22L-C@-T2-02A
SPST-NO 24 VAC/VDC A22 L-D @-24A-10M A22L-D@-24A-10A
SPST-NC A22L-D@-24A-01M A22L-D@-24A-01A
SPST-NO +
SPST-NC A22L-D@-24A-11M A22L-D@-24A-11A
DPST-NO A22L-D@-24A-20M A22L-D@-24A-20A
DPST-NC A22L-D@-24A-02M A22L-D@-24A-02A
SPST-NO 100 VAC A22L-D @-T1-10M A22L-D@-T1-10A
200 VAC A22L-D@-T2-10M A22L-D@-T2-10A
SPST-NC 100 VAC A22 L-D @-T1-01M A22L-D@-T1-01A
200 VAC A22L-D@-T2-01M A22L-D@-T2-01A
SPST-NO +
SPST-NC 100 VAC A22L-D@-T1-11M A22L-D@-T1-11A
200 VAC A22L-D@-T2-11M A22L-D@-T2-11A
DPST-NO 100 VAC A22L-D@-T1-20M A22L-D@-T1-20A
200 VAC A22L-D@-T2-20M A22L-D@-T2-20A
DPST-NC 100 VAC A22L-D@-T1-02M A22L-D@-T1-02A
200 VAC A22L-D@-T2-02M A22L-D@-T2-02A
A22L-C
Square/Projection
type
LED lighting
(without V oltage
Reduction Unit)
A22L-C
Square/Projection
type
LED voltage-
reduction lighting
(with V oltage
Reduction Unit)
A22L-D
Square/Full-guard
type
LED lighting
(without V oltage
Reduction Unit)
A22L-D
Square/Full-guard
type
LED voltage-
reduction lighting
(with V oltage
Reduction Unit)
143
Ordering Individually
Non-lighted Models
Lighted Models (without
Voltage Reduction Unit)
Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton
Switch Switch (without Voltage
Reduction Unit)
Lamp Lamp
LED LED
Lighted Models (with
Voltage Reduction Unit)
Incandescent
lamp
Switch (with Voltage
Reduction Unit)
144
Pushbutton
Non-lighted
Lighted
Note: Common to incandescent lamps and LED lamps.
Color IP65 oil-resistant models
Red A22-FR A22-TR A22-GR A22-HR
Green A22-FG A22-TG A22-GG A22-HG
Yellow A22-FY A22-TY A22-GY A22-HY
White A22-FW A22-TW A22-GW A22-HW
Blue A22-FA A22-TA A22-GA A22-HA
Black A22-FB A22-TB A22-GB A22-HB
Color IP65 oil-resistant models
Red A22-CR A22-DR A22-SR A22-MR
Green A22-CG A22-DG A22-SG A22-MG
Yellow A22-CY A22-DY A22-SY A22-MY
White A22-CW A22-DW A22-SW A22-MW
Blue A22-CA A22-DA A22-SA A22-MA
Black A22-CB A22-DB A22-SB A22-MB
Flat type Projection type Full-guard type Half-guard type
Square/Projection type Square/Full-guard type Round/Mushroom type
(30-dia. head) Round/Mushroom type
(40-dia. head)
Color IP65
Red A22L-TR A22L-GR A22L-HR
Green A22L-TG A22L-GG A22L-HG
Yellow A22L-TY A22L-GY A22L-HY
White A22L-TW A22L-GW A22L-HW
Blue A22L-TA A22L-GA A22L-HA
Color IP65
Red A22L-CR A22L-DR
Green A22L-CG A22L-DG
Yellow A22L-CY A22L-DY
White A22L-CW A22L-DW
Blue A22L-CA A22L-DA
Projection type Full-guard type Half-guard type
Square/Projection Square/Full-guard type
145
Lamp
LED Lamp
Note: 1. For voltage-reduction lighting, use the A22-24A@.
2. Used when the Pushbutton color is yellow or white.
Incandescent Lamp
Switch (Standard Load)
Non-lighted
Operating voltage 6 V 12 V 24 V 24 V
Super-bright
Appearance AC/DC LED light Model
DC Red A22-6DR --- --- ---
Green A22-6DG --- --- ---
Yellow (See note 2.) A22-6DY --- --- ---
Blue A22-6DA --- --- ---
AC Red A22-6AR --- --- ---
Green A22-6AG --- --- ---
Yellow (See note 2.) A22-6AY --- --- ---
Blue A22-6AA --- --- ---
AC and DC Red --- A22-12AR A22-24AR A22-24ASR
Green --- A22-12AG A22-24AG A22-24ASG
Yellow (See note 2.) --- A22-12AY A22-24AY A22-24ASY
Blue --- A22-12AA A22-24AA A22-24ASA
Operating voltage 5 VAC/VDC 12 VAC/VDC 24 VAC/VDC
A22-5 A22-12 A22-24
Contacts Model
Momentary SPST-NO A22-10M
SPST-NC A22-01M
SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22-11M
DPST-NO A22-20M
DPST-NC A22-02M
Alternate SPST-NO A22-10A
SPST-NC A22-01A
SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22-11A
DPST-NO A22-20A
DPST-NC A22-02A
Switch operation
146
Lighted
Note: 1. The above diagrams show the DPST-NO contact models as representativ e examples.
2. For voltage-reduction lighting, use the A22-24A@.
Accessories (Order Separately)
Common to A22, A22S/W, A22K, M22, and A22E
Switch operation Contacts Voltage reduction circuits
With Voltage Reduction Unit
Momentary SPST-NO A22L-10M A22L-10M-T1 A22L-10M-T2
SPST-NC A22L-01M A22L-01M-T1 A22L-01M-T2
SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22L-11M A22L-11M-T1 A22L-11M-T2
DPST-NO A22L-20M A22L-20M-T1 A22L-20M-T2
DPST-NC A22L-02M A22L-02M-T1 A22L-02M-T2
Alternate SPST-NO A22L-10A A22L-10A-T1 A22L-10A-T2
SPST-NC A22L-01A A22L-01A-T1 A22L-01A-T2
SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22L-11A A22L-11A-T1 A22L-11A-T2
DPST-NO A22L-20A A22L-20A-T1 A22L-20A-T2
DPST-NC A22L-02A A22L-02A-T1 A22L-02A-T2
Without Voltage
Reduction Unit 110 VAC 220 VAC
Item Appearance Classification Model Remarks
Switch Blocks SPST-NO Standard load A 22-10 P rovided as standard. Order
Switch Blocks only when adding or
replacing them.
Microload A22-10S
SPST-NC Standard load A22-01
Microload A22-01S
DPST-NO Standard load A22-20
Microload A22-20S
DPST-NC Standard load A22-02
Microload A22-02S
Lamp Sockets Direct lighting A22-TN Used when changing the lighting
method. (LED only)
Voltage-reduc-
tion lighting 110 VAC A 22-T 1
220 VAC A22-T2
Mounting Latches For momentary models A22-3200 Prov ided as standard. Order
Mounting Latches only when
mounting Switch Blocks or Lamp
Sockets that are purchased indi-
vidually.
For alternate models A22-3210
Legend
Plate
Frames
Standard
size With Snap-in
Legend Plate
(Without text)
White A22Z-3321 Snap-in Legend Plate is acrylic.
Red A22Z-3322
Black A22Z-3323
Without Snap-in Legend Plate A22Z-3320
Large size With Snap-in
Legend Plate
(Without text)
White A22Z-3331
Red A22Z-3332
Black A22Z-3333
Without Snap-in Legend Plate A22Z-3330
Lock Ring Round A 22Z-3360 The body is equipped with a Lock
Ring. This Lock Ring is used when
a more secure lock feat ure is re-
quired.
Metallic Bezel Rings For flat or projection models A22Z-3580 Replace with the standard model.
Material: nickel-plated zinc
For full-guard models A22Z-3582
147
Sealing Caps For flat models A22Z-3600F Used to prev ent dust or water from
entering the Operation Unit (Push-
button, etc.).
Color: opaque
Material: silicon
For projection models A22Z-3600T
For full-guard models A22Z-3600G
Caps A22 For projection, full-guard, or half-
guard models A22Z-3490 Mat er i al: polycarbonate resin
M22 For round models A22Z-3495
Color Caps Red A22Z-30TR Used for changing the Pushbutton
color of the (round) Pushbutton
Switches.
Green A22Z-30TG
Yellow A22Z-30TY
White A22Z-30TW
Blue A22Z-30TA
Three-throw Spacer A22Z-3003 Used when mounting three Non-
lighted Switches.
(See page 164.)
Hole Plug Round A22Z-3530 Can be plugged into pre-cut panel
holes for future expansion. The
color is black.
Control Boxes
(Enclosures) One hole Ex clusively for
A22 A22Z-B101 For those designed e xclusiv ely f or
A22, DPST-NO or DPST-NC
Switches cannot be used.
Material: Polycarbonate resin
Compatible with
A3T A22Z-B201
One hole, yel-
low box (for
emergency
stop)
Exclusively for
A22 A22Z-B101Y
Compatible with
A3T A22Z-B201Y
Two holes Exclusively for
A22 A22Z-B102
Compatible with
A3T A22Z-B202
Three holes Exclusively for
A22 A22Z-B103
Compatible with
A3T A22Z-B203
Connectors Applicable ca-
ble diameter
(mm)
7 to 9 dia. A22Z-3500-1 Plastic connector used to extend a
cable from the Switch Box. (See
page 162.)
9 to 11 dia. A22Z-3500-2
25-dia. Ring --- A22Z-R25 Use when mount ing to a panel
with a 25-dia. hole. For details, re-
fer to page 153. Since this is not
attached to the main body, order
separately.
30-dia. Resin Attach-
ment Round A22Z-A30 Use when mounting to a panel
with a 30-dia. hole. For details, re-
fer to page 155.
Lock Plate --- A22Z-3380 Use to fix the lever on the Switch.
Simple Protective Cover --- A11Z-3700 Prevents foreign matter entering
into the Switch from the back of the
panel.
Item Appearance Classification Model Remarks
For A22 For M22
148
Snap-in
Legend
Plates
Standard
size Without text Black A22Z-3443B A ttached to the Standard-size
Legend Plate Frame.
Material: Acrylic (See page 154.)
Red A22Z-3443R
White A22Z-3443W
Transparent A22Z-3443C
White text on
red background mA22Z-3443R-2
STOP A22Z-3443R-4
White text on
black back-
ground
| A22Z-3443B-1
START A22Z-3443B-3
ON A22Z-3443B-5
OFF A22Z-3443B-6
UP A22Z-3443B-7
DOWN A22Z-3443B-8
POWER ON A22Z-3443B-9
OFF-ON A22Z-3443B-10
Large size Without text Black A22Z-3453B Attached to the Large-size Legend
Plate F r ame
Material: Acrylic (See page 154.)
Red A22Z-3453R
White A22Z-3453W
Transparent A22Z-3453C
For Emer-
gency Stop
Switch
60-dia. round plate with b lack let-
ters on a yellow background A22Z-3466-1 “EMERGENCY STOP” is en-
graved on the plate. Used as an
Emergency Stop Switch Legend
Plate
90-dia. round plate with b lack let-
ters on a yellow background A22Z-3476-1
Character Films No print (Round) A22Z-3460 After printing on a film, affix to the
indicator plate of the Lighted Push-
button Switch. (The back is coated
with adhesive .)
Character print
(Round) | A22Z-3460-1
A22Z-3460-2
START A22Z-3460-3
STOP A22Z-3460-4
No print (Square) A22Z-3480
Lamp Extractor --- A22Z-3901 Rubber tool used to easily replace
Lamps
Tightening Wrench --- A22Z-3905 Tool used to tighten nuts from the
back of the panel
Cap Tightening Tool --- A22Z-3908 Used for replacing the cap of the
Half-guard Pushbutton Switch.
Cap Puller --- A3PJ-5080 Used for removing the cap from
the Pushbutton of the Square
Lighted Pushbutton Switch.
Item Appearance Classification Model Remarks
149
Specifications
Common to A22, A22S/W, A22K, and A22E
Approved Standards
Note: UL-certification for CSA C22.2 No. 14 and bears the mark.
Approved Standard Ratings
UL, cUL (File No. E41515)
6 A at 220 VAC, 10 A at 110 VAC
EN60947-5-1 (Low Voltage Directive)
3 A at 220 VAC
CCC (GB14048.5)
3 A at 240 VAC, 1.5 A at 24 VDC
Ratings
Contacts (Standard Load)
Note: 1. Rated current values are determ ined according to t he test-
ing conditions. The abov e ratings were obtained by conduct-
ing tests under the following conditions.
(1) Ambient temperature: 20°±2°C
(2) Ambient humidity: 65±5%
(3) Operating frequency: 20 operations/minute
2. Minimum applicable load: 10 mA at 5 VDC
Contacts (Microload)
LED Indicators without Voltage
Reduction Unit
Note: Values in parentheses are for blue Pushbuttons.
Super-bright LED Indicator
Incandescent Lamp
Voltage-reduction Lighting
Recognized
organization Standards File No.
UL (See note.) UL508 E41515
TÜV Product Service EN60947-5-1 Inquire
CQC (CCC) GB14048.5 2003010303070635
Rated
carry
current
Rated
voltage Rated current (A)
AC15
(inductive
load)
AC12
(resistive
load)
DC13
(inductive
load)
DC12
(resistive
load)
10 24 VAC 10 10 --- ---
110 VAC 5 10
220 VAC 3 6
380 VAC 2 3
440 VAC 1 2
24 VDC --- --- 1.5 10
110 VDC 0.5 2
220 VDC 0.2 0.6
380 VDC 0.1 0.2
Rated applicable load Minimum applicable load
50 mA at 24 VDC (Resistive load) 1 mA at 5 VDC
Rated voltage Rated current Operating voltage
6 VDC 60 mA (20 mA) 6 VDC±5%
6 VAC 60 mA (20 mA) 6 VA C/VDC±5%
12 VAC/VDC 30 mA (10 mA) 12 VAC/VDC±5%
24 VAC/VDC 15 mA (10 mA) 24 VAC/VDC±5%
Rated voltage Rated current Operating voltage
24 VAC/VDC 15 mA 24 VA C/VDC ±5%
Rated voltage Rated current Operating voltage
6 VAC/VDC 200 mA 5 VAC/VDC
14 VAC/VDC 80 mA 12 VA C/VDC
28 VAC/VDC 40 mA 24 VA C/VDC
130 VAC/VDC 20 mA 100 VAC/VDC
Rated voltage Operational voltage Applicable lamp
(BA8S/13@ gold)
110 VAC 95 to 115 VAC LED Lam p
(A22-24A@)
220 VAC 190 to 230 VAC
150
Characteristics
Note: 1. With no icing or condensation.
2. Malfunction within 1 ms.
Item Pushbutton Switches Emergency Stop Switches Knob-type Selector
Switches Key-type
Selector
Switch
Non-lighted
models:
A22-F
A22-T
A22-G
A22-S
A22-C
A22-D
A22-H
A22-M
Lighted
models:
A22L-T
A22L-G
A22L-H
A22L-D
A22L-C
Non-lighted
model: A22E Lighted
model:
A22EL
Non-lighted
model: A22S Lighted
model:
A22W
Non-lighted
model: A22K
Allowable op-
erating fre-
quency
Mechanical Momentary operation:
60 operations/minute max. 30 operations/minute max. Manual reset: 30 operations/minute max.
A utomatic reset: 30 operations/minute max.
Electrical 30 operations/minute max. 30 operations/minute max.
Insulation resistance 100 M min. (at 500 VDC)
Dielectric strength 2,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of same polarity
2,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of different polarity and also between each terminal and
ground
Vibration resistance Malfunction (See note 2.): 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude
Shock resis-
tance
Destruction 1,000 m/s2 1,000 m/s2 1,000 m/s21,000 m/s2 1,000 m/s2 1,000 m/s2
Malfunction
(See note 2.) 1,000 m/s2 max. 600 m/s2
max. 250 m/s2 max. 1,000 m/s2 max. 600 m/s2
max. 1,000 m/s2 max.
Durability Mechanical Momentar y operation:
5,000,000 operations min. 300,000 operations min. 500,000 opera-
tions min. 100,000 op-
erations min. 500,000 opera-
tions min.
Electrical 500,000 operations min. 300,000 opera-
tions min. 300,000 op-
erations min. 500,000 opera-
tions min. 100,000 op-
erations min. 500,000 opera-
tions min.
Ambient temperature
(See note 1.) Operating:
20°C to 70°C
Storage: 40°C
to 70°C
Operating:
20°C to
55°C
Storage:
40°C to
70°C
Operating:
20°C to 70°C
Storage: 40°C
to 70°C
Operating:
20°C to
55°C
Storage:
40°C to
70°C
Operating:
20°C to 70°C
Storage: 40°C
to 70°C
Operating:
20°C to
55°C
Storage:
40°C to
70°C
Operating:
20°C to 70°C
Storage: 40°C
to 70°C
Ambient humidity Operating: 35% to 85%
Degree of protection IP65
(oil-resistant) IP65 IP65
(oil-resistant) IP65 IP65
(oil-resistant) IP65 IP65
(oil-resistant)
Electric shock protection class Class II
PTI (tracking characteristic) 175
Degree of contamination 3 (IEC947-5-1)
151
Operating Characteristics (for SPST-NO/SPST-NC)
Note: Rotation torque for Emergency Stop Pushbutton, Knob-type Selector, and K ey-type Selector Switches.
Nomenclature
Item Pushbutton
Switches Emergency Stop
Switches Knob-type Selector Switches Key-type Selector Switch
Lighted Non-
lighted Pushbutton
Switches
Push-lock turn-
reset system Manual reset Automatic reset Manual reset Automatic reset
A22-F A22-G A22-C
A22-S A22-T A22-H
A22-D A22-M
A22L-T A22L-H
A22L-D A22L-G
A22L-C
A22E, A22EL A22S, A22W A22S, A22W A22K
Total travel force
(TTF) max. 29.4 N 44.1 N 0.34 N·m
(See note.) 0.25 N·m for two
notches
(See note.)
0.34 N·m
(See note.) 0.25 N·m for two
notches
(See note.)
0.34 N·m for three
notches (See
note.)
0.34 N·m for three
notches (See
note.)
Total travel
(TT) 5.5 mm max. 10±1 mm Approx. 90° for two notches
(Approx. 45° for three notches) Approx. 90° for two notches (Approx.
45° for three notches)
Resetting force
(RF) min. --- 0.25 N·m max.
(See note.) 0.34 N·m max.
(See note.) --- 0.34 N·m max.
(See note.) ---
Pushbutton
Available Colors
Lamp
Light Source
Switch
Contacts
Lighting Method
The above illustration shows a lighted model.
Lock Ring
Non-lighted:
Red, green, yellow, white, blue, black
Lighted:
Red, green yellow, white, blue
LED lamp
Incandescent lamp
SPST-NO, SPST-NC, SPST-NO + SPST-NC,
DPST-NO, DPST-NC
(Minimum applicable load: 10 mA at 5 VDC)
Non-lighted
Lighted (without Voltage Reduction Unit)
Lighted (with Voltage Reduction Unit)
152
Dimensions
Note: 1. All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
2. The following illustrations are for momentary operation.
Lighted/Non-lighted Pushbutton Switches
Note: 1. Alternate operation models are 9.3 mm longer.
2. Lighted models hav e the same dimensions as shown above, whether they are with or without Voltage Reduction Units.
29.8 x 29.8
29.8 x 29.8
25.6 x 25.6
Flat Type
A22-F
Round/Half-guard Type
A22-H, A22L-H
Round/Projection Type
A22-T, A22L-T
(See note 1.)
29.7 dia. 29.7 dia.
For SPST-NO (SPST-NC) Switches For DPST-NO (DPST-NC) Monoblock-contact Switches
29.7 dia. 23.9 dia.
40-dia. Mushroom Type
A22-M
29.7 dia.
Round/Full-guard Type
A22-G, A22L-G
54.7 (See note 1.)
40 dia.
Square/Full-guard Type
A22-D, A22L-D
54.7 (See note 1.)
54.7 (See note 1.) 54.7 (See note 1.)
54.7 (See note 1.)
54.7 (See note 1.)
Square/Projection Type
A22-C, A22L-C
54.7 (See note 1.)
153
Accessories
Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
10.2
Legend Plate Frames
A22Z-332@A22Z-333@
Lock Ring
A22Z-3360
22.2 dia.
25-dia. Ring
A22Z-R25
Color Cap
A22L-30T@
23.4 dia.
Hole Plug (Round)
A22Z-3530
30 dia.
22.2 dia.
33 dia.
32 dia.
22.2 dia.
33 dia.
32 dia.
26 dia.
31.5 dia.
22.2 dia.
32.5 dia.
Sealing Caps
22.2±
0.3
dia.
0.1
22.2±
0.3
dia.
0.1
30 dia.
28 dia.28 dia.
28 dia. 28 dia.
22 dia.
24.8 dia.
27 dia.
For Flat Models
A22Z-3600F
For Projection Models
A22Z-3600T
For Full-guard Models
A22Z-3600G
1 r 2 r
154
21.5 x 21.5±0.2
0.3
t0.22
t0.22
Three-throw Spacer
A22Z-3003
Metallic Bezel Rings
29.7±0.3 dia.
Snap-in Legend Plates
For Emergency-stop Models
22.2 dia.
90 dia.
A22Z-3466-1 (60 dia.)
22.2 dia.
60 dia.
Character Film
14.2 dia.
13.7 dia.
12.9 dia.
28.7 dia.
24+0.2 dia.
0
29.7±0.3 dia.
28.7 dia.
24+0.2 dia.
0
19.4+0.1 dia.
0.2
A22Z-3476-1 (90 dia.)
Black letters
Yellow
Black letters
Yellow
For Flat/Projection Models
A22Z-3580
For Full-guard Models
A22Z-3582
For Standard Models
A22Z-3443@-@For Large Models
A22Z-3453@
For Round Models
A22Z-3460-@For Square Models
A22Z-3480
155
30 × 30
Lamp Extractor
A22Z-3901
Tightening Wrench
A22Z-3905
Cap Tightening Tool
A22Z-3908
Cap Puller
A3PJ-5080
Simple Protective Cover
A22Z-3700
30-dia. Resin Attachment
A22Z-A30
Lock Plate
A22Z-3380
22.5 dia.
0.3 recess
11 dia.8.5 dia.
30 dia.
19.2 dia.
21.2 dia.
25 dia.
5 dia.
22.2 dia.
34.7 dia.
7.3 dia.
8 dia.
156
Control Box (Enclosure)
A22Z-B10@
A22Z-B102 (Two Holes)
A22Z-B103 (Three Holes)
21 dia.
22.1+0.3 dia.
0.1 Cable Port Hole (Top View)
16±1 dia.
0.1
Two, 22.1+0.3 dia.
21 dia.
Cable Port Hole (Top View)
16±1 dia.
0.1
Three, 22.1+0.3 dia.
21 dia.
Cable Port Hole (Top View)
16±1 dia.
Panel Mounting Hole
Four, 4x38 tapping screws
(10x36) 0.6-mm concave surface
(Lead cable hole)
(Lead cable hole) Two mounting holes
(Lead cable hole)
Four, 4x38 tapping screws
Four, 4x38 tapping screws
(10x36) 0.6-mm concave surface
(Lead cable hole)
(Lead cable hole)
(10x36) 0.6-mm concave surface
A22Z-B101 (One Hole)
A22Z-B101Y
(Lead
cable hole)
Two
mounting
holes
Two
mounting
holes
157
Terminal Arrangement (Bottom View)
Non-lighted (SPST-NO + SPST-NC) Lighted (SPST-NO + SPST-NC) Non-lighted (DPST-NO + DPST-NC)
A22Z-B202 (Two Holes)
A22Z-B203 (Three Holes)
Cable Port Hole (Top View)
Cable Port Hole (Top View)
Cable Port Hole (Top View)
Panel Mounting Hole
Four, M4 Phillips binding screws
22.1 dia.
Cover (gray)
Two, 21 dia.
Case (black)
Cover (gray)
Two, 21 dia.
Case (black)
Two, 22.1 dia.
Four, M4 Phillips binding screws
Four, M4 Phillips binding screws
Three, 22.1 dia.
(10×36) 0.6-mm concave surface
Cover (gray)
Two, 21 dia.
Case (black)
A22Z-B201 (One Hole)
A22Z-B201Y
(10×36) 0.6-mm
concave surface
21 dia.
(both sides)
Two, 19 dia.
(base) Two mounting
holes
(10×36) 0.6-mm
concave surface
21 dia.
(both sides)
Two, 19 dia.
(base)
Two mounting
holes
21 dia.
(both sides)
Two, 19 dia.
(base)
Two
mounting
holes
Switch Blocks
M3.5 screw
Switch Blocks
Lamp socket
Switch Blocks
158
Terminal Connection
Panel Cutouts
Note: 1. When applying coating such as paint to the panel, the dimensions should be those after the application of coating.
Lock ring is provided as a standard item.
2. Recommended panel thickness: 1 to 5 mm.
3. Use an A22Z-R25 Ring when mounting to a panel with 25-mm holes.
Type Terminal connection
Non-lighted (SPST-NO
+ SPST-NC)
Non-lighted (DPST-NO
+ DPST-NC)
Lighted without Voltage
Reduction Unit
(SPST-NO + SPST-NC)
Lighted with Voltage Re-
duction Unit (SPST-NO
+ SPST-NC)
Bottom view
3
4
1
2
Bottom view
11
21
22
12
13
23
24
14
Bottom view
1
2X2
X1
X
()
(+)
3
4
Bottom view
3
4
X1
X2
1
2
X
22.3+0.4 dia.
025+0.5 dia.
0
159
Installation
Common to A22, A22S/W, A22K, M22, and A22E
Mounting to the Panel
Panel Hole Dimensions
For 25-dia. holes, always use 25-dia. Rings. (Since the cutout dimen-
sions are large, IP65 cannot be guaranteed unless 25-dia. Rings ar e
used.)
If outer surface treatment such as coa ting is performed for the panel,
the panel dimensions after outer surface treatment must meet the
specified panel dimensions.
Note: Recommended panel thickness: 1 to 5 mm.
Matrix Installation
1. The following panel hole dimensions apply when Switch Unit and
the Standard-size Legend Plate Frame and Lock Ring are
mounted, and lead wires are connected directly to the Switch
Block.
2. The following panel hole dimensions apply when the Large-size
Legend Plate Frame is mounted, and when crimp terminals are
connected to the Switch Block terminals.
Pitches A and B between the centers of the mounting holes are as
follows:
For 1. above:
For 2. above:
Note: 1. The above dimensions are the minimum dimensions for
when the wires described under Applicable Wire Size on
page 165 are used. If a different wires are used, t he wiring
dimensions may be different so determine an appropriate
pitch before setup.
2. With pushbuttons of external dimensions greater than
30 mm, set the pitch according to the dimensions. (When
using matrix installation for the A22-M@, mount with a pitch
of 40 mm instead of 30 mm in the diagram above.)
3. When using a pushbutton with e xternal dimensions exceed-
ing 30 mm, use a pitch appropriate for the pushbutton.
22 dia. 25 dia.
A
Switch Blocks A
A22-10, A22-10S, A22-01, A22-01S 45 mm min.
A22-20, A22-20S, A22-02, A22-02S, A22-11,
A22-11S 55 mm min.
Type of crimp
terminal Switch Blocks B
Bare crimp termi-
nals A22-10, A22-10S, A22-01,
A22-01S 51 mm min.
A22-20, A22-20S, A22-02,
A22-02S, A22-11, A22-11S 61 mm min.
Crimp terminals
with insulating
sheath
A22-10, A22-10S, A22-01,
A22-01S 60 mm min.
A22-20, A22-20S, A22-02,
A22-02S, A22-11, A22-11S 70 mm min.
B
160
Mounting the Operation Unit on the
Panel
Inser t the Operation Unit (Pushbutton, etc.) from the front surface of
the panel, inser t the Lock Ring and the mounting nut from the ter mi-
nal side, then tighten the nut. Bef ore tightening, chec k that the rubber
washer is present between the Pushbutton Unit and the panel.
When using a Legend Plate Frame, put one rubber washer each
between the Legend Plate Frame and the panel and between the
Operation Unit and the Legend Plate Frame . (One rubber w asher wi ll
be provided when one Legend Plate Frame is ordered.)
Align the Lock Ring with the groove in the casing, then insert the
Lock Ring so that its edge is located on the panel side.
Tighten the mounting nut at a torque of 0.98 to 1.96 N·m.
When using a Lock Ring, replace with the supplied Lock Ring, insert
the projecting part into the lock slot, and then tighten the mounting
nut.
When the panel cutout dimension is 25 dia., remove the supplied
rubber washer and mount the 25-dia. Ring as shown below. (Since
the A22Z-R25 is not attached to the main body, order separately.)
Mounting the Switch on the
Pushbutton Unit
Insert the Pushbutton Unit into the Switch Unit, aligning the arrow
mark inscri bed on the Case with the lever on the Switch Blocks, then
move the lever in the direction indicated by the ar row in the following
figure.
Removing the Switch
Move the lever in the direction indicated by the ar row in the following
figure, then pull the Pushbutton Unit or the Switch Blocks.
Since the lever has a hole with an inside diameter of 6.5 mm, the
lever can be moved in the specified direction by inserting a screw-
driver into the hole and then moving the screwdriv er.
Mounting/Replacing the Color
Cap
Projection, Fall-guard
Grip and rotate the Color Cap with your fingers.
Hold here Mounting nut
Lock Ring
Rubber washer Panel
Panel Lock Ring
Pro-
jecting
part
Operation Unit
25-dia. Ring (A22Z-R25)
Panel
Lock Ring
Mounting nut
22.3 dia.
25 dia.
25 dia.
22 dia.
22.3 dia.
Operation Unit
Arrow mark
Lever
Screwdriver
161
Half-guard Indicators
Put the tips of the Cap Tightening Tool (A22Z-3908) into the Color
Cap slot and turn the Tool.
Assembling the Cap
Lighted Pushbutton Switch
Mount the Color Cap so that the protrusions inside the cap fit into the
grooves in the Pushbutton Unit.
Indicator
Mount the Color Cap so that the protrusions inside the Pushbutton
Unit fit into the grooves in the cap.
Square Pushbutton/Indicator
Removing the Color Cap:
Inser t the protruding tip of the Cap Puller (A3PJ-5080) into the Cap
slot, hold the plate spring, and pull them to remove the Color Cap .
Mounting the Color Cap:
Mount the Color Cap on the flange and firmly push the Color Cap.
When the Color Cap is inser ted, check whether it operates properly.
When replacing the Lam p, remove the Color Cap and diffusion pla te
with fingers or Cap Puller.
Attach the Character Film pr operly so that it fits inside the protr uding
part of the diffusion plate. Then, match the diffusion plate to the
square flange and insert the Cap.
Emergency Stop Switch
Inser t the protrusion of the Tightening Wrench (A 22Z-3905) into the
Cap slot and then turn to remove the Cap.
Installing/Replacing the Lamp
Installing/Replacing from the Panel
Surface
Insert the Lamp Extractor (A 22Z-3901) into t he lam p, then rotate t he
Extractor while pressing it.
Installing/Replacing on the Switch
Grip the lamp with your fingers, then rotate the lamp while pressing it
against the Switch.
Protrusion
Cap
Grooves in the cap
Color Cap
Grooves
Protrusion inside cap
Cap
Color Cap
Plate spring
Flange
Diffusion plate
Character Film
Color Cap
162
Control Box (Enclosure)
Mounting the Switch
The Standard-s ize Legend Plate Frame can be mounted. Mount t he
Frame as shown in the following diagram. Mount the Switch in the
same way as for an ordinary panel.
Creating a Cable Port Hole
Place the tip of a screwdriver on the surface where the cable port
hole is to be created with the cover attached and strike the screw-
driver to punch a hole. Attempts to punch a hole on the other side of
the case will damage the Box.
Securing the Connector Cable
1. Insert the connector into the cable port hole in the Box and secure
with the fixing nut inside the box.
2. Open a hole in the thin rubber section of the rubber ring.
3. Pass the tightening cap through the cable, insert the cable into
the connector, and tighten the hexagonal nut to secure the cable.
Installing/Removing the Switch
Blocks
Installing the Switch Blocks
Hook the small protrusion on the Swit ch Block into the groove on the
Mounting Latch on the other side of the lever, then push up the
Switch Block in the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure
below.
Removing the Switch Blocks
Insert a screwdriver between the Mounting Latch and the Switch
Block, then push down the screwdriver in the direction indicated by
the arrow in the following figure.
Cable diameter Connector
7 to 9 dia. A22Z-3500-1
9 to 11 dia. A22Z-3500-2
Snap-in Legend Plate
Fixing nut Rubber washer
Connector Tightening cap
Inside Outside
Box
Cabl
e
Lever
Switch Block
Protrusion
Mounting
Latch
Use either of the following screwdrivers.
Screwdriver
3 to 6 mm
3 to 6 mm
Flat-head
screwdriver
Phillips
screwdriver
163
Wiring
Wiring Round Crimp Terminals
Loosen the terminal screw from the Switch Unit until it completely
comes off the groove, inse rt a screwdriver as shown in the following
figure, then push up the washer in the direction indicated by the
arrow to temporarily secure it. Now, a round crimp terminal can be
connected. After inserting the terminal, tighten the screws to com-
plete wiring.
Engraving
Engrave the characters on the surface on the Cap. Make sure that
the characters are aligned parallel to the imaginary line connecting
the two protruding portions to the left and right of the Cap.
The characters must not be engraved deeper than 0.5 m m. Apply an
alcohol-based paint coating, such as melamine, alkyd, or acrylic
resin paint coating, to the engraved characters.
Affixing Character Film
Hold the Cap, remo ve the cardboard on the Film, and attach the Film
to the Cap . Make sure that the protruding portions of the Cap engage
the cutout portions of the Film and that the characters are aligned
parallel to the imaginar y line connecting the two protruding por tions
to the left and right of the Cap.
Mounting and Dismounting
Snap-in Legend
Press and secure the Snap-in Legend Plate onto the Legend Plate
Frame.
The direction of the characters will vary with the mounting direction
of the control panel if the Switch is a knob or key selector model.
To easily remove the Snap-in Legend Plate from the Legend Plate
Frame mounted to the panel, insert a Tool with a thin tip into the
space between the Snap-in Legend Plate and the Legend Plate
Frame.
The Snap-in Legend Plate is easily removed by pressing the Snap-in
Legend Plate from the back of the Legend Plate Fr ame .
The Legend Plate Frame is made of acrylic resin, which is easily
damaged by shock. Be sure to handle the Legend Plate Frame with
care.
Screw
Washer
Screwdriver
Protruding portions on Cap
Protruding portions on Cap
Remove the cardboard.
Legend Plate Frame
Snap-in Legend Plate
Concave surface
164
Engraving Method
Material: Acrylic
Engrave the characters directly on the matted side of the Snap-in
Legend Plate.
The characters must be engraved no deeper than 0.5 mm.
Apply alcohol-based paint coating to the engraved characters.
If the Snap-in Legend Plate is transparent, engrave the mirror-written
characters on the back of the Snap-in Legend Plate and apply paint
coating to the characters. Then apply paint coating of a different
color to the remaining part of the Snap-in Legend Plate.
Mounting Three-throw Spacer
(A22Z-3003)
Press and secure the two protruding portions of the Three-throw
Spacer to the two indented portions of the inner side of the control
panel.
165
Precautions
Common to A22, A22S/W, A22K, M22, and A22E
!WARNING
Do not apply a voltage between the incandescent lamp and the
terminal that is greater than the rated voltage. If the incandescent
lamp is broken, the Operation Units may pop out.
Always turn OFF the power and wait for 10 minutes before replac-
ing the incandescent lamp. If the lamp is replaced immediately af-
ter the power is turned OFF, the remaining heat may cause burns.
Correct Use
Mounting
Always make sure that the power is turned OFF before mounting,
removing, or wiring the Switch, or performing maintenance.
Do not tighten the mounting ring more than necessary using tools
such as pointed-nose pliers. Doing so will damage the mounting ring.
The tightening torque is 0.98 to 1.96 N·m.
Recommended panel thickness: 1 to 5 mm.
Wiring
After wiring the Switch, maintain an appropriate clearance and
creepage distance.
When DC-specific LEDs are used, wire the Switch so that the X1 ter-
minal is positive.
Terminal screws must be Phillips or slotted M3.5 screws with a
square washer.
The tightening torque is 1.08 to 1.27 N·m.
Single wires, stranded wires, and crimp ter minals can be connected
to the Switch.
Applicable Wire Size
Stranded wire: 2 mm2 max.
Solid wire: 1.6 dia. max.
Operating Environment
The IP65 model is designed wit h a degree of protection so that it will
not sustain damage if it is subjected to water from an y direction to the
front of the panel.
Using the Microload
Inser t a contact protection circuit, if necessar y, to prevent the reduc-
tion of life expectancy due to extreme wear on the contacts caused
by loads where inrush current occurs when the contact is opened
and closed.
The minimum applicable load is the N-level reference value. This
value indicates the malfunction reference level for the reliability level
of 60% (λ 60) (conforming to JIS C5003).
The equation, λ 60 = 0.5 x 106/operations indicates that the esti-
mated malfunction rate is less than 1/2,000,000 operations with a
reliability level of 60%.
LED
The LED current-limiting resistor is built-in, so internal resistance is
not required.
If commercially available LEDs are used, select the ones that meet
the follo wing condi tions:
Base: BA9S/1 3 @
Overall length: 26 mm max.
Power consumption: 2.6 W max.
Others
If the panel is to be finished with coating, etc., make sure that the
panel meets the specified dimensions after the coating.
Do not subject the Switch to extreme shock or vibration. Doing so will
cause malfunctions and damage to the Switch.
Bare Crimp Terminals
8 mm max.
16.0 mm max. 16.0 mm max.
8 dia. max.
Crimp Terminals with Insulating Sheath
8 mm max.
20.2 mm max. 20.2 mm max.
8 dia. max.
0.16 mA 1.6 mA 100 mA
10 mA
1 mA
Voltage (V)
Current (mA)
Microload area Standard
load area
Invalid
area
In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice.
ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.
Cat. No. A128-E1-03
166
Knob-type Selector Switch
A22S/W
Install in 22-dia. or 25-dia. Panel Cutout
Easy mounting and removal of Switch Un it.
Increase wiring efficiency with three-row mounting of Switch
Blocks.
Finger protection mechanism on Switch Unit provided as a stan-
dard feature.
Use 25-dia. ring to install in 25-dia. panel cutouts.
Mounted using either open-type (fork-type) or closed-type
(round-type) crimp terminals.
IP65 oil resistance (non-lighted models)
IP65 (lighted mod els )
EN60947-5-1
UL and cUL approved (File No. E41515).
Model Number Structure
Model Number Legend
Completely Assembled
Shipped as a set which includes the Selector, Lamp (lighted models only), and Switch.
1 2 3 4 5
S
W
2M
2A
3M
3A
R
G
Y
A
6D 6 VDC
6A 6 VAC
12A 12 VAC/VDC
24A 24 VAC/VDC
5 5 VAC/VDC
12 12 VAC/VDC
24 24 VAC/VDC
10
01
11
20
02
T1
T2
A22@-@@-@-@
1 Lighted/Non-lighted
Code Description
Non-lighted
Lighted
2 Number of Notches/Reset Method
Code Description
2 notches/Manual
2 notches/Automatic
3 notches/Manual
3 notches/Automatic
3 Illumination Color
Code Description
None Black (for non-lighted models only)
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
4 Light Source
Code Operating Voltage
None Non-lighted
LED
Without Voltage Reduction Unit
5 Contacts
Code Description
SPST-NO (See note 1.)
SPST-NC (See note 1.)
SPST-NO + SPST-NC
DPST-NO
DPST-NC
With Voltage Reduction Unit
None Non-lighted
LED 100 VAC (See note 2.)
200 VAC (See note 3.)
Incandescent
lamp 2. Operational voltage: 95 to 115 VAC
3. Operational voltage: 190 to 230 VAC
Note: 1. The LED lamp (24 VAC/VDC) can be
lit by directly applying 100 VAC/VDC
(200 VAC/VDC) to the lamp terminal.
LED incorporates the 24-VAC/VDC
models.
Note: 1. For models with 2 notches
2. The contacts are rated for stand-
ard loads. For microloads, refer to
Accessories section for the A22.
167
Subassembled
The Selector, Lamp, or Switch can be or dered separately. Use them in combination for models that are not available as assembled Units. These
can also be used as inv entory for maintenance parts.
1. Selector
2. Lamp
3. Switch (General-purpose Load)
1 2 3
S
W
2M
2A
3M
3A
R
G
Y
A
A22@-@@
1 Lighted/Non-lighted
Code Description
Non-lighted
Lighted
2 Number of Notches/Reset Method
Code Description
2 notches/Manual
2 notches/Automatic
3 notches/Manual
3 notches/Automatic
3 Illumination Color
Code Description
None Black (for non-lighted models only)
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
1 2
R
G
Y
5 5 V A C (6 V A C)
12 12 V A C (14 V A C)
24 24 V A C (28 V A C)
6D 6 VDC (6 VDC)
6A 6 V AC (6 V A C)
12A 12 V A C/VDC (12 V A C/VDC)
24A 24 V A C/VDC (24 V A C/VDC)
A22-@@
2 Illumination Color
Code Description
None Incandescent lamp
Red
Green
Yellow
1 Operating Voltage (Rated Voltage)
Code Description
LED lamp
Incandescent lamp
A Blue
1 2 3
L
10
01
11
20
02
T1
T2
A22@-@M-@
1 Lighted/Non-lighted
Code Description
None Non-lighted
Lighted
2 Contacts
Code Description
SPST-NO (2-notch only)
SPST-NC (2-notch only)
SPST-NO + SPST-NC
DPST-NO
DPST-NC
3 Voltage Reduction Unit (Lighted Models Only)
Code Description
None Without Voltage Reduction Unit
100 VAC (See note 1)
200 VAC (See note 2)
Note: 1. Operational voltage: 95 to 115 VAC
2. O
p
erational volta
g
e: 190 to 230 VAC
168
Ordering Information
List of Models
Ordering as a Set
Non-lighted
Appearance Number of
notches Resetting method Output Model Color of Selector
2 notches SPST-NO A22S-2M-10 Black
SPST-NC A22S-2M-01
SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22S-2M-11
DPST-NO A22S-2M-20
DPST-NC A22S-2M-02
SPST-NO A22S-2A-10
SPST-NC A22S-2A-01
SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22S-2A-11
DPST-NO A22S-2A-20
DPST-NC A22S-2A-02
3 notches SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22S-3M-11
DPST-NO A22S-3M-20
DPST-NC A22S-3M-02
SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22S-3A-11
DPST-NO A22S-3A-20
DPST-NC A22S-3A-02
Knob-type Selector Switch
A22S
Manual
Automatic
Manual
Automatic
169
Lighted (Without Voltage Reduction Unit)
Appearance Number of
notches Resetting
method Output Operating
voltage Model Illumination
color
2 notches SPST-NO 6 VDC A22W-2M@-6D-10 Insert one of the
following letters
into the box @.
R (red)
Y (yello w)
G (green)
A (blue)
6 VAC A22W-2M@-6A-10
12 VAC/VDC A 22W-2M@-12A-10
24 VAC/VDC A 22W-2M@-24A-10
SPST-NC 6 VDC A22W-2M@-6D-01
6 VAC A22W-2M@-6A-01
12 VAC/VDC A 22W-2M@-12A-01
24 VAC/VDC A 22W-2M@-24A-01
SPST-NO +
SPST-NC 6 VDC A22W-2M@-6D-11
6 VAC A22W-2M@-6A-11
12 VAC/VDC A 22W-2M@-12A-11
24 VAC/VDC A 22W-2M@-24A-11
DPST-NO 6 VDC A22W-2M@-6D-20
6 VAC A22W-2M@-6A-20
12 VAC/VDC A 22W-2M@-12A-20
24 VAC/VDC A 22W-2M@-24A-20
DPST-NC 6 VDC A22W-2M@-6D-02
6 VAC A22W-2M@-6A-02
12 VAC/VDC A 22W-2M@-12A-02
24 VAC/VDC A 22W-2M@-24A-02
SPST-NO 6 VDC A22W-2A@-6D-10
6 VAC A22W-2A@-6A-10
12 VAC/VDC A 22W-2A@-12A-10
24 VAC/VDC A 22W-2A@-24A-10
SPST-NC 6 VDC A22W-2A@-6D-01
6 VAC A22W-2A@-6A-01
12 VAC/VDC A 22W-2A@-12A-01
24 VAC/VDC A 22W-2A@-24A-01
SPST-NO +
SPST-NC 6 VDC A22W-2A@-6D-11
6 VAC A22W-2A@-6A-11
12 VAC/VDC A 22W-2A@-12A-11
24 VAC/VDC A 22W-2A@-24A-11
DPST-NO 6 VDC A22W-2A@-6D-20
6 VAC A22W-2A@-6A-20
12 VAC/VDC A 22W-2A@-12A-20
24 VAC/VDC A 22W-2A@-24A-20
DPST-NC 6 VDC A22W-2A@-6D-02
6 VAC A22W-2A@-6A-02
12 VAC/VDC A 22W-2A@-12A-02
24 VAC/VDC A 22W-2A@-24A-02
3 notches SPST-NO +
SPST-NC 6 VDC A22W-3M@-6D-11
6 VAC A22W-3M@-6A-11
12 VAC/VDC A 22W-3M@-12A-11
24 VAC/VDC A 22W-3M@-24A-11
DPST-NO 6 VDC A22W-3M@-6D-20
6 VAC A22W-3M@-6A-20
12 VAC/VDC A 22W-3M@-12A-20
24 VAC/VDC A 22W-3M@-24A-20
DPST-NC 6 VDC A22W-3M@-6D-02
6 VAC A22W-3M@-6A-02
12 VAC/VDC A 22W-3M@-12A-02
24 VAC/VDC A 22W-3M@-24A-02
Knob-type Selector Switch
A22W
LED lighting
(without V oltage Reduction
Unit)
Manual
Automatic
Manual
170
Lighted (With Voltage Reduction Unit)
Note: When ordering, specify the symbol that indicates color of the Selector in the @ of the model number.
3 notches SPST-NO +
SPST-NC 6 VDC A22W-3A@-6D-11 Insert one of the
following letters
into the box @.
R (red)
Y (yellow)
G (green)
A (blue)
6 VAC A22W-3A@-6A-11
12 VAC/VDC A22W-3A@-12A-11
24 VAC/VDC A22W-3A@-24A-11
DPST-NO 6 VDC A22W-3A@-6D-20
6 VAC A22W-3A@-6A-20
12 VAC/VDC A22W-3A@-12A-20
24 VAC/VDC A22W-3A@-24A-20
DPST-NC 6 VDC A2 2W-3A@-6D-02
6 VAC A22W-3A@-6A-02
12 VAC/VDC A22W-3A@-12A-02
24 VAC/VDC A22W-3A@-24A-02
Appearance Number of
notches Resetting
method Output Operating
voltage Model Illumination
color
Knob-type Selector Switch
A22W
LED lighting
(without V oltage Reduction
Unit)
Automatic
Appearance Number of
notches Resetting
method Output Operating
voltage Model Selector
symbol (color)
2 notches SPST-NO 100 VAC A22W-2M@-T1-10 Insert one of the
following letters
into the box @.
R (red)
Y (yellow)
G (green)
A (blue)
200 VAC A22W-2M@-T2-10
SPST-NC 100 VA C A22W-2M@-T1-01
200 VAC A22W-2M@-T2-01
SPST-NO +
SPST-NC 100 VAC A22W-2M@-T1-11
200 VAC A22W-2M@-T2-11
DPST-NO 100 VAC A22W-2M@-T1-20
200 VAC A22W-2M@-T2-20
DPST-NC 100 VAC A22W-2M@-T1-02
200 VAC A22W-2M@-T2-02
SPST-NO 100 VAC A22W-2A@-T1-10
200 VAC A22W-2A@-T2-10
SPST-NC 100 VA C A22W-2A@-T1-01
200 VAC A22W-2A@-T2-01
SPST-NO +
SPST-NC 100 VAC A22W-2A@-T1-11
200 VAC A22W-2A@-T2-11
DPST-NO 100 VAC A22W-2A@-T1-20
200 VAC A22W-2A@-T2-20
DPST-NC 100 VAC A22W-2A@-T1-02
200 VAC A22W-2A@-T2-02
3 notches SPST-NO +
SPST-NC 100 VAC A22W-3M@-T1-11
200 VAC A22W-3M@-T2-11
DPST-NO 100 VAC A22W-3M@-T1-20
200 VAC A22W-3M@-T2-20
DPST-NC 100 VAC A22W-3M@-T1-02
200 VAC A22W-3M@-T2-02
SPST-NO +
SPST-NC 100 VAC A22W-3A@-T1-11
200 VAC A22W-3A@-T2-11
DPST-NO 100 VAC A22W-3A@-T1-20
200 VAC A22W-3A@-T2-20
DPST-NC 100 VAC A22W-3A@-T1-02
200 VAC A22W-3A@-T2-02
Knob-type Selector Switch
A22W
LED voltage-reduction
lighting
(with V oltage Reduction
Unit)
Manual
Automatic
Manual
Automatic
171
Ordering Individually
Non-lighted Models
Lighted Models (without
Voltage Reduction Unit)
Selector Selector Selector
Switch Switch (without Voltage
Reduction Unit)
Lamp Lamp
LED LED
Lighted Models (with
Voltage Reduction Unit)
Incandescent
lamp
Switch (with Voltage
Reduction Unit)
172
Selectors
Non-lighted (Color: Only Black is Available) Lighted
Note: Either incandescent lamps or LED lamps can be used with the
above models.
Lamps
LED Lamp
Note: 1. For voltage-reduction lighting, use the A22-24A@.
2. Used when the Selector color is yellow or white.
Incandescent Lamp
Notches Reset method
2 notches A22S-2M
A22S-2A
3 notches A22S-3M
A22S-3A
Notches Reset method
2 notches A22S-C2M
A22S-C2A
3 notches A22S-C3M
A22S-C3A
Standard lever
IP65 (oil-resistant)
Manual
Automatic
Manual
Automatic
Standard lever
IP65 (oil-resistant)
Manual
Automatic
Manual
Automatic
Notches Reset method Selector color
2 notches Red A22W-2MR
Green A22W-2MG
Yellow A22W-2MY
Blue A22W-2MA
Red A22W-2AR
Green A22W-2AG
Yellow A22W-2AY
Blue A22W-2AA
3 notches Red A22W-3MR
Green A22W-3MG
Yellow A22W-3MY
Blue A22W-3MA
Red A22W-3AR
Green A22W-3AG
Yellow A22W-3AY
Blue A22W-3AA
Standard lever
IP65
Manual
Automatic
Manual
Automatic
Operating voltage 6 V 12 V 24 V 24 V
Super-bright
Appearance AC/DC LED light Model
DC Red A22-6DR --- --- ---
Green A22-6DG --- --- ---
Yellow (See note 2.) A22-6DY --- --- ---
Blue A22-6DA --- --- ---
AC Red A22-6AR --- --- ---
Green A22-6AG --- --- ---
Yellow (See note 2.) A22-6AY --- --- ---
Blue A22-6AA --- --- ---
AC and DC Red --- A22-12AR A22-24A R A22-24ASR
Green --- A22-12AG A22-24AG A22-24ASG
Yellow (See note 2.) --- A22-12AY A22-24AY A22-24ASY
Blue --- A22-12AA A22-24AA A22-24ASA
Operating voltage 5 VAC/VDC 12 VAC/VDC 24 VAC/VDC
A22-5 A22-12 A22-24
173
Switches (General-purpose Load)
Non-lighted
Lighted
Note: For voltage-reduction lighting, use the A22-24A@.
Accessories (Order Separately)
The A22S/W uses the same accessories as the A22. Refer to the relevant inf ormation in the section for the A22.
Contacts Model
Automatic SPST-NO A22-10M
SPST-NC A22-01M
SPST-NO + SPST-
NC A22-11M
DPST-NO A22-20M
DPST-NC A22-02M
Switch operation
Switch operation Contacts Voltage-reduction circuit
With Voltage Reduction Unit
Automatic SPST-NO A22L-10M A22L-10M-T1 A22L-10M-T2
SPST-NC A22L-01M A22L-01M-T1 A22L-01M-T2
SPST-NO + SPST-NC A 22L-11M A22L-11M-T1 A 22L-11M-T2
DPST-NO A22L-20M A22L-20M-T1 A22L-20M-T2
DPST-NC A22L-02M A22L-02M-T1 A22L-02M-T2
Without Voltage
Reduction Unit 110 VAC 220 VAC
174
Specifications
With the exception of the following items, the specifications are the same as for the A22. Refer to the relevant information in the Specifications
section for the A22.
Operation Angle
Contacts
2-notch Type
3-notch Type
Two notches Three notches
2. FP: Free Position
Note: 1. The angle used for automatic reset
is shown in parentheses.
Knob position SPST-NO SPST-NC SPST-NO + SPST-NC DPST-NO DPST-NC
Knob position SPST-NO + SPST-NC DPST-NO DPST-NC
175
Nomenclature
Dimensions
Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
Knob-type Selector Switch (Lighted/Non-lighted)
Lamp
Light Source
Switch
Contacts
Lighting Method
Selector
Number of Notches
2 notches/3 notches
Applicable Colors
Lock Ring
Non-lighted: Black
Lighted: Red, green yellow, blue
LED lamp
Incandescent lamp
SPST-NO, SPST-NC, SPST-NO + SPST-NC,
DPST-NO, DPST-NC
(Minimum applicable load: 10 mA at 5 VDC)
Non-lighted
Lighted (without Voltage Reduction Unit)
Lighted (with Voltage Reduction Unit)
A22S/A22W
30 dia.
A22S-C
30 dia.
176
Accessories (Common to A22, A22S/W, A22K, M22, and A22E)
The A22S/W uses the same accessor ies as the A22. Refer to the relevant information in the corresponding section for the A22.
Terminal Arrangement (Bottom
View) Terminal Connection
Note: The above terminal connection diagrams are examples for
SPST-NO + SPST-NC.
Panel Cutouts (Top View)
Note: 1. When applying coating such as paint to the panel, the dimensions should be those after the application of coating.
Lock Ring is provided as a standard item.
2. Recommended panel thickness: 1 to 5 mm.
3. Use an A22Z-R25 Ring when mounting to a panel with 25-mm holes.
Installation
The A22S/W uses the same installation method as the A22. Refer to the relevant information in the Installation section for the A22.
Precautions
The precautions for the A22S/W are the same as those for the A22. Refer to the relevant infor mation in the Precautions section for the A22 and
the Technical Infor m ation for Pushbutton Switches (Cat. No . A143).
Non-lighted
(SPST-NO + SPST-NC) Lighted
(SPST-NO + SPST-NC)
Switch Blocks
M3.5 screw Lamp socket
Switch
Blocks
Type Connection diagram
Non-lighted
Lighted without Voltage
Reduction Unit
Lighted with Voltage
Reduction Unit
Bottom view
3
4
1
2
Bottom view
1
2X2
X1
X
()
(+)
3
4
Bottom view
3
4
X1
X2
1
2
X
22.3+0.4 dia.
025+0.5 dia.
0
In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice.
ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.
Cat. No. A129-E1-03
177
3Key-type Selector Switch
A22K
Install in 22-dia. or 25-dia. Panel Cutout
Easy mounting and removal of Switch Unit.
Increase wiring efficien cy with three-row mount ing of Switch
Blocks.
Finger protection mechanism on Switch Unit provided as a stan-
dard feature.
Use 25-dia. ring to install in 25-dia. panel cutouts.
Mounted usi ng either ope n-ty pe (fork-type ) or closed-ty pe
(round-type) crimp terminals.
IP65 oil resistance
EN60947-5-1
UL and cUL approved (File No. E41515).
Model Number Structure
Model Number Legend
Completely Assembled
Shipped as a set which includes the Selector and Switch.
1 2
10
01
11
20
02
2ML
2M
2AL
3ML
3M
3MC
3AC
A22K-@-@
2 Contacts
Code Description
SPST-NO (See note.)
SPST-NC (See note.)
DPST-NO
DPST-NC
1 Number of Notches/Reset Method
Code Notches
2 notches Left
Left and right
Left
3 notches Manual Left
Left and right
Center
Center
Automatic
Automatic
Manual
Reset
method
Key release
position
SPST-NO + SPST-NC
Note: For models with 2 notches
Contact Rating is standard
load. (Refer to the Specification
section for the A22.)
178
Subassembled
The Selector, Lamp, or Switch can be ordered sepa rately. Use them in combination for models tha t are not available as assembled Units. These
can also be used as inventory for maintenance parts.
1. Selector
2. Switch
Non-lighted
1
2ML
2M
2AL
3ML
3M
3MC
3AC
A22K-@
1 Number of Notches/Reset Method
Code Notches
2 notches Manual Left
Left and right
Left
3 notches Manual Left
Left and right
Center
Center
Automatic
Automatic
Reset
method
Key release
position
1
10
01
11
20
02
A22-@M
1 Contacts
Code Description
SPST-NO (2-notch models only)
SPST-NC (2-notch models only)
SPST-NO + SPST-NC
DPST-NO
DPST-NC
179
Ordering Information
List of Models
Ordering as a Set
Note: Two Ke ys are provided.
Appearance Number of
notches Reset method Output Key release
position Model Color of
Selector
2 notches SPST-NO A22K-2ML-10 Black
A22K-2M-10
SPST-NC A22K-2ML-01
A22K-2M-01
SPST-NO +
SPST-NC A22K-2ML-11
A22K-2M-11
DPST-NO A22K-2ML-20
A22K-2M-20
DPST-NC A22K-2ML-02
A22K-2M-02
SPST-NO A22K-2AL-10
SPST-NC A22K-2AL-01
SPST-NO +
SPST-NC A22K-2AL-11
DPST-NO A22K-2AL-20
DPST-NC A22K-2AL-02
3 notches SPST-NO +
SPST-NC A22K-3ML-11
A22K-3M-11
A22K-3MC-11
DPST-NO A22K-3ML-20
A22K-3M-20
A22K-3MC-20
DPST-NC A22K-3ML-02
A22K-3M-02
A22K-3MC-02
SPST-NO +
SPST-NC A22K-3AC-11
DPST-NO A22K-3AC-20
DPST-NC A22K-3AC-02
Key-type Selector Switch
A22K
Manual
Automati
c
Manual
Automatic
180
Ordering Individually
Selector
(Color: Only Black is available)
Note: Two keys are provided.
Switch
Note: DPST-NO + DPST-NC combination is also possible.
Accessories
Note: Two keys are provided.
Accessories
The A22K uses the same accessories as the A22. Refer to the relev ant information in the corresponding section f or the A22.
Selector Switch
Two Keys are provided.
Appearance Number of notches Reset method Key release position Model
2 notches A22K-2ML
A22K-2M
A22K-2AL
3 notches A22K-3ML
A22K-3M
A22K-3MC
A22K-3AC
Manual
Automatic
Manual
Automatic
Appearance Classification Model
Lighted Socket (without voltage-re-
duction circuit) SPST-NO A22-10M
SPST-NC A22-01M
SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22-11M
DPST-NO A22-20M
DPST-NC A22-02M
Appearance Model
A22K-K
181
Specifications
With the exception of the following items, the specifications are the same as for the A22. Refer to the relevant information in the Specifications
section for the A22.
Operation Angle
Note: 1. The angles in parentheses are for automatic-reset models.
2. FP: Free position
Contacts
2-notch Type
3-notch Type
2 notches 3 notches
Knob position SPST-NO SPST-NC SPST-NO + SPST-NC DPST-NO DPST-NC
Knob position SPST-NO + SPST-NC DPST-NO DPST-NC
182
Nomenclature
Dimensions
Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
Key-type Selector Switch
Accessories
The A22K uses the same accessories as the A22. Refer to the relev ant information in the corresponding section f or the A22.
Terminal Arrangement (Bottom View)
Number of Notches
2 notches/3 notches
Key Release Position
Selector
Switch
Contacts
Lock Fitting
2 notches
3 notches
Note: Two Keys are provided.
SPST-NO, SPST-NC, SPST-NO + SPST-NC,
DPST-NO, DPST-NC
Non-lighted (SPST-NO + SPST-NC)
A22K
30 dia.
Switch Blocks
M3.5 screw
183
Terminal Connection
Note: The above terminal connection diagrams are examples for
SPST-NO + SPST-NC.
Panel Cutouts (Top View)
Note: 1. When applying coating such as paint to the panel, the di-
mensions should be those after the application of coating.
Lock fitting is provided as a standard item.
2. Recommended panel thickness: 1 to 5 mm.
3. Use an A22Z-R25 Ring when mo unting to a panel with 25-
mm holes.
Installation
The A22K uses the same installation method as the A22. Refer to the relevant information in the Installation section for the A22.
Precautions
The precautions for the A22K are the same as those for the A22. Refer to the relevant information in th e Precautions section for the A22 and the
Technical Information for Pushbutton Switches (Cat. No. A143).
Type Terminal connection
Non-lighted Bottom view
3
4
1
2
22.3+0.4 dia.
025+0.5 dia.
0
In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice.
ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.
Cat. No. A130-E1-03
184
Emergency Stop Switch
A22E
Install in 22-dia. or 25-dia. Panel Cutout
Direct op ening mecha nism to op en the circ uit when t he contact
welds .
Safety lock mechanis m prevents operati ng errors.
Easy mounting and removal of Switch Blocks using a lever.
Mount three Switch Units in series to improve wiring efficiency.
Finger protection mechanism on Switch Unit provided as a stan-
dard feature.
Install using either round, or forked crimp terminals.
Oil-resistan t to IP65 (n on-lig hted m odels)/IP65 (lighte d mode ls)
Note: Refer to the Common Precautions for Pushbutton Switches on
page 14, as well as the “Safety Precautions” on page 201.
Model Number Structure
Model Number Legend
Completely Assembled
Shipped as a set which includes the Operation Unit, Lamp (lighted models only), and Switch.
1 2 3 4 5
L
MP
LP
S
M
L
SK
MK
6D 6 VDC
6A 6 VAC
12A 12 VAC/VDC
24A 24 VAC/VDC
T1 100 VAC
T2 200 VAC
01
11
02
A22E@-@-@-@-@
1. Lighted/Non-lighted
Code Description
None Non-lighted
Lighted (See note.)
2. Head Size
Code
Push-pull
Large
60 dia.
Small
30 dia.
Medium
40 dia.
Large
60 dia.
Small
30 dia.
Medium
40 dia.
3. Light Source
Code Operating Voltage
None Non-lighted
LED
With Voltage Reduction Unit
None Non-lighted
LED
Without Voltage Reduction Unit
4. Contacts
Code Description
SPST-NC
SPST-NO + SPST-NC
DPST-NC
Note: Lighted Emergency Stop
Switches are available only
for the medium (M). push-
lock turn-reset models.
Note: 1 The LED lamp (24 VAC/VDC) can be
lit by directly applying 110 VAC/VDC
(220 VAC/VDC) to the lamp terminal.
LED incorporates the 24-VAC/VDC
models.
2. Equipped with 24-VAC/DC LED.
None
B
5. Configuration
Code Configuration
Switch only
Switch with Integrated
Control Box
DescriptionSize
Medium
40 dia.
Push-lock turn-reset
Push-lock key reset
185
Subassembled
The Pushbutton, Lamp, or Switch can be ordered separately. Use them in combination for models that are not av ailable as assembled Units. These
can also be used as inv entory for maintenance parts.
1. Operation Unit
Lighted/Non-lighted
2. Lamp
Unit Combinations
Non-lighted Operation Unit
Operation Unit
Operation Unit
Lamp
Lamp
Switch (without Voltage Reduction Unit)
Switch (with Voltage Reduction Unit)
Switch
LED
Incandescent
Unit Combinations
LED
Lighted
(without V oltage
Reduction Unit)
Lighted
(with V oltage
Reduction Unit)
1 2
L
MP
LP
S
M
L
SK
MK
A22E@-@
1 Lighted/Non-lighted
Code Description
None Non-lighted
Lighted (See note.)
2 Head Size
Code Description
40 dia. Push-pull
60 dia.
30 dia. Push-lock, turn-reset
40 dia.
60 dia.
30 dia. Push-lock key reset
40 dia.
Note: Lighted Emergency Stop
Switches are available
only for the 40-dia. push-
lock turn-reset models.
1 2
R
6D 6 VDC (6 VDC)
6A 6 V AC (6 V A C)
12A 12 V A C/VDC (12 V A C/VDC)
24A 24 V A C/VDC (24 V A C/VDC)
A22-@@
2 Illumination Color
Code Description
Red
1 Operating Voltage (Rated Voltage)
LED
Incandescent
Code
186
3. Switch
Lighted/Non-lighted
Ordering Information
List of Models
Completely Assembled
Non-lighted Models
1 2 3
L
01
11
02
T1 110 VAC
T2 220 VAC
A22@-@M-@
1 Lighted/Non-lighted
Code Description
None Non-lighted
Lighted
2 Contacts
Code Description
SPST-NC
SPST-NO + SPST-NC
DPST-NC
3 Voltage Reduction Unit (Lighted Models Only)
Code Description
None Without Voltage Reduction Unit
Note: Equipped with 24-VAC/DC LED.
Appearance Output Push-lock turn-reset system Color of cap
40-dia. head
Medium Push-pull
A22E-MP
SPST-NC A22E-MP-01 Red
SPST-NO/SPST-NC A22E-MP-11
DPST-NC A22E-MP-02
60-dia. head
Large Push-pull
A22E-LP
SPST-NC A22E-LP-01
SPST-NO/SPST-NC A22E-LP-11
DPST-NC A22E-LP-02
30-dia. head
Small Push-lock
Turn-reset
A22E-S
SPST-NC A22E-S-01
SPST-NO/SPST-NC A22E-S-11
DPST-NC A22E-S-02
DPST-NC + SPST-NO A22E-S12
TPST-NC A22E-S-03
40-dia. head
Medium Push-lock Turn-reset
A22E-M
SPST-NC A22E-M-01
SPST-NO/SPST-NC A22E-M-11
DPST-NC A22E-M-02
DPST-NC + SPST-NO A22E -M-12
TPST-NC A22E-M-03
60-dia. head
Large Push-lock Tur n -r eset
A22E-L
SPST-NC A22E-L-01
SPST-NO/SPST-NC A22E-L-11
DPST-NC A22E-L-02
30-dia. head
Small Push-lock Key-reset
A22E-SK
SPST-NC A22E-SK-01
SPST-NO/SPST-NC A22E-SK-11
DPST-NC A22E-SK-02
40-dia. head
Medium Push-lock
Key-reset
A22E-MK
SPST-NC A22E-MK-01
SPST-NO/SPST-NC A22E-MK-11
DPST-NC A22E-MK-02
187
Lighted Models
Switch with Integrated Control Box
Operation Units
Non-lighted
Appearance Output Lighting Rated voltage Push-lock turn-
reset system Color of cap
40-dia. head
Push-lock
Turn-reset without voltage Re-
duction Unit
SPST-NC LED 6 VDC A 22EL-M -6D-01 Red
6 VAC A22EL-M-6A -01
12 VAC/VDC A22EL-M-12A -01
24 VAC/VDC A22EL-M-24A -01
SPST-NO/SP ST-NC 6 VDC A22EL-M-6D-11
6 VAC A22EL-M-6A -11
12 VAC/VDC A22EL-M-12A -11
24 VAC/VDC A22EL-M-24A -11
DPST-NC 6 VDC A22EL-M-6D-02
6 VAC A22EL-M-6A -02
12 VAC/VDC A22EL-M-12A -02
24 VAC/VDC A22EL-M-24A -02
40-dia. head
Push-lock
Turn-reset with Voltage Reduc-
tion Unit
SPST-NC 110 VAC A22EL-M -T 1-01
220 VAC A22EL-M -T2-01
SPST-NO/SP ST-NC 110 VAC A22EL-M -T 1-11
220 VAC A22EL-M -T2-11
DPST-NC 110 VAC A22EL-M -T1-02
220 VAC A22EL-M -T2-02
Appearance Output Model
SPST-NC A22E-M-01B
SPST-NO/SPST-NC A22E-M-11B
DPST-NC A22E-M-02B
Sealing capability and size IP65 oil-resistant models
Small (30 dia.) Medium (40 dia.) Large (60 dia.)
Push-pull ---
Push-lock, Tur n-reset
Push-lock, key-reset
(push-lock, turn-reset) ---
A22E-MP A22E-LP
A22E-S A22E-M A22E-L
A22E-SK A22E-MK
188
Lighted
Lamp
LED
Note: For voltage-reduction lighting, use the A22-24AR.
Incandescent
Switch (Standard Load)
Without Voltage Reduction Unit
With Voltage Reduction Unit
Note: 1. The abov e illus trations are for the DPST-NO contact.
2. When using with a Voltage Reduction Unit, use the A22-24AR.
Sealing capability and size IP65
Medium (40 dia.)
Push-lock, Turn-reset
Appearance LED light Rated voltage Model
Red Standard 6 VDC A22-6DR
6 VAC A22-6AR
12 VAC/VDC A22-12AR
24 VAC/VDC A22-24AR
Bright 24 VAC/VDC A22-24ASR
Appearance Rated voltage Model
6 VDC A22-5
14 VAC A22-12
28 VAC A22-24
130 VAC A22-H1
Classification
Appearance
Switch Action Momentary Momentary
Contacts
For standard loads SPST-NO A22-10M A22L-10M
SPST-NC A22-01M A22L-01M
SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22-11M A22L-11M
DPST-NO A22-20M A22L-20M
DPST-NC A22-02M A22L-02M
A22EL-M
Non-lighted Lighted
Classification
Appearance
Switch Action Momentary Momentary
Contacts
For standard loads SPST-NO A22L-10M-T1 A22L-10M-T2
SPST-NC A22L-01M-T1 A22L-01M-T2
SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22L-11M-T1 A22L-11M-T2
DPST-NO A22L-20M-T1 A22L-20M-T2
DPST-NC A22L-02M-T1 A22L-02M-T2
Lighted (110 VAC) Lighted (220 VAC)
189
Accessories (Order Separately)
Item Appearance Classification Model Remarks
Switch Blocks SPST-NO A22-10 Provided as standard. Order Switch
Blocks only when adding or replacing
them.
SPST-NC A22-01
DPST-NO, one-piece A22-20
DPST-NC, one-piece A22-02
Lamp Sockets Direct lighting A 22-T N Used when changing the lighting meth-
od.
Voltage-reduc-
tion lighting 100 VAC A22-T1
220 VAC A22-T2
Mounting Latches --- A22-3200 Provided as standard. Order Mounting
Latches only when mounting Switch
Blocks or Lamp Sockets that are pur-
chased individually.
Lock Ring Rounded shape A22Z-3360 The body is equipped with a Lock Fitting.
This Lock Fitting is used when a more se-
cure lock feature is required. (Refer to
page 194.)
Hole Plug Round A22Z-3530 Can be plugged into pre-cut panel holes
for future e xpansion. The color is black.
Control Boxes (Enclo-
sures) One hole, yellow box (for
emergency stop) A22Z-B101Y Material: Polycarbonate resin
Operation Keys --- A22K-K Two keys are provided.
Connectors Applicab le ca-
ble diameter
(mm)
7 to 9 dia. A22Z-3500-1 Plastic connector used to extend a cable
from the Switch Box.
9 to 11 dia. A22Z-3500-2
25-dia. Ring --- A22Z-R25 Can be fit into a 25-dia. hole in the panel.
Since this is not attached to the main
body, order separately. (Ref er to
page 194.)
30-dia. Resin Attachment --- A22Z-A30 Can be fit into a 30-dia. hole in the panel.
(Refer to page 194.)
Legend Plates for Emer-
gency Stop 60-dia. black letters on yellow
back-ground A22Z-3466-1 “E ME RGENCY STOP” is indicated on
the plate.
90-dia. black letters on yellow
back-ground A22Z-3476-1
60-dia. black letters on yellow
back-ground A22Z-3466-2 “EMERGENCY OFF” is indicated on the
plate.
Lamp Extractor --- A22Z -3901 Rubber tool used to replace Lamps eas-
ily
Tightening T ool --- A22Z-3905 Tool used to tighten n uts from the bac k of
the panel and to attach caps to lighted
models.
Lock Plate --- A22Z-3380 Use to fix the lev er on the Switch.
190
Note: These E-stop Shrouds are designed for use only in semiconductor manufacturing equipment. Do not use them for any other application.
Specifications
Certified Standards
Note: 1. Only models with NC contacts have a direct opening mechan ism.
2. UL-certification for CSA C22.2 No. 14 and bears the mark.
3. Some models have been certified. Contact your OMRON sales representative .
Certified Standard Ratings
UL, cUL (File No.E41515)
6A at 220 VAC, 10 A at 110 VAC
TÜV (EN60947-5-1) (Low Voltage Directive)
3 A at 220VAC
CCC (GB14048.5)
3 A at 240 VAC, 1.5 A at 24 VDC
Ratings
Contacts (Standard Load)
Note: 1. Rated current values are deter mined according to the test-
ing conditions. The abov e ratings were obtained by conduct-
ing tests under the following conditions.
(1)Ambient temperature: 20°±2°C
(2)Ambient humidity: 65±5%
(3)Operating frequency: 20 operations/minute
2. Minimum applicable load: 10 mA at 5 VDC
LED Indicators without Voltage
Reduction Unit
Item Appearance Classification Model Remarks
E-stop Shroud (See note.) --- A22Z-EG1 The SEMI S2-compatible Shroud and
legend plate for EMERGENCY OFF
come as a set. Use with an A22E Emer-
gency Stop Switch.
E-stop Shroud (See note.) --- A22Z-EG2 SEMI-S2/SEMATECH Application Guide
for SEMI 2S-compatible Shroud. Used
together with an A22E Emergency Stop
Pushbutton.
Certification body Standards File No.
UL (See note 2.) UL508 E41515
TÜV Product Service EN60947-5-1,
EN60947-5-5
(certified direct opening
mechanism)
Inquire
CQC (CCC) GB14048.5 2003010303070635
KOSHA (See note 3.) EN60947-5-1 2 004-220
Rated
carry
current
Rated
voltage Rated current (A)
AC15
(induc-
tive load)
AC12
(resistive
load)
DC13
(induc-
tive load)
DC12
(resistive
load)
10 24 VAC 10 10 --- ---
110 VAC 5 10
220 VAC 3 6
380 VAC 2 3
440 VAC 1 2
24 VDC --- -- - 1.5 10
110 VDC 0.5 2
220 VDC 0.2 0.6
380 VDC 0.1 0.2
Rated voltage Rated current Operating voltage
6 VDC 60 mA 6 VDC±5%
6 VAC 60 mA 6 VAC/VDC±5%
12 VAC/VDC 30 mA 12 VAC/VDC±5%
24 VAC/VDC 15 mA 24 VAC/VDC±5%
191
Characteristics
Note: 1. With no icing or condensation.
2. Malfunction within 1 ms.
3. Setting and resetting once is counted as one operation.
4. The degree of protection from the front of the panel.
Item Emergency Stop Switches
Non-lighted model: A22E Lighted model: A22EL
Allowable operating fre-
quency
Mechanical 30 operations/minute max. (See note 3.)
Electrical 30 operations/minute max. (See note 3.)
Insulation resistance 100 M min. (at 500 VDC)
Dielectric strength 2,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of same polarity
2,500 VAC , 50/60 Hz for 1 min betw een terminals of different polarity and also be-
tween each terminal and ground
Vibration resistance Malfunction (See note 2.): 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude
Shock resistance Mechanical 1,000 m/s2
Malfunction (See note 2.) 250 m/s2 max.
Durability Mechanical Moment ary operation: 300,000 operations min. (See note 3.)
Electrical 300,000 operations min. (See note 3.)
Ambient temperature
(See note 1.) Operating: 20°C to 70°C
Storage: 40°C to 70°COperating: 20°C to 55°C
Storage: 40°C to 70°C
Ambient humidity Operating: 35% to 85%
Degree of protection IP65
(oil-resistant) (See note 4.) IP65 (See note 4.)
Electric shock protection class Clas s II
PTI (tracking characteristic) 175
Degree of contamination 3 (IEC60947-5- 1)
192
Nomenclature
Safety Lock Mechanism to Prevent Misuse
This Switch can be intentionally used to stop equipment in an emergency. Even if an object or person touches the Pushbutton by mistake, the
contact will not be released unless the Pushbutton reaches the lock position.
This Switch uses a finger protection mechanism to prevent electrical shocks. Moreover, it is
provided with a mechanism to prevent terminal screws from coming off and also allows
connection to either round or forked crimp terminals.
Pushbutton
Lamp
Light source
Switch
Contact Ratings
Lighting Method
(The above figures are examples of the lighted model.)
Push-lock Turn-reset System
Available Color: Red
Non-lighted
Lighted
LED Lamp
Incandescent Lamp
10 A at 110 VAC (resistive load)
10 A at 24 VDC (resistive load)
Non-lighted
Lighted (without Voltage Reduction Unit)
Lighted (with Voltage Reduction Unit)
Lock position
Finger protection Mechanism for preventing
terminal screws from coming
off (loosening the screws do
not cause them to come off)
193
Dimensions
Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
Non-lighted Models
34
1.8
32 41.2
1.8
1.8 1.8
2
18.5
A22E-MP A22E-LP
A22E-S A22E-M
A22E-L
A22E-SK A22E-MK
40 dia.
60 dia.
40 dia.
30 dia.
60 dia.
30 dia. 22 40 dia. 22
Medium Push-pull (40-dia.) Large Push-pull (60-dia. )
Small Push-lock, Turn-reset (30-dia. ) Medium Push-lock, Turn-reset (40-dia. )
Large Push-lock, Turn-reset (60-dia.)
Small Push-lock, Key-reset (30-dia.) Medium Push-lock, Key-reset (40-dia.)
1.5
194
Lighted Models
Dimensions for Accessories
32 41.2
18.5
A22EL-M
40 dia.
Medium Push-lock, Turn-reset (40-dia. )
30 dia. 1
13
2.5
6
Hole Plug
Round A22Z-3530
6.1
3.8
20.5
2.8
22.2 dia.
34.7 dia.
30-dia. Resin Attachment
A22Z-A30
Legend Plates for Emergency Stop
22.2 dia.
90 dia.
A22Z-3466-1 (φ60)
22.2 dia.
60 dia.
A22Z-3476-1 (φ90) A22Z-3466-2 (φ60)
Black letters
Yellow
Black letters
Yellow
O
F
F
E
M
E
R
G
E
N
C
Y
Black letter
60 dia.
22.2 dia.
t1
Yellow
Lamp Extractor
A22Z-3901
Tightening Wrench
A22Z-3905
8.5 dia. 8 dia.
11 dia.
19.2 dia.
21.2 dia.
25 dia.
30 dia.
Lock Ring
A22Z-3360
22.2 dia.
25-dia. Ring
A22Z-R25
30 dia.
22 dia.
24.8 dia.
27 dia.
Material: Iron, zinc plated Material: NBR (black)
Material: Chloroprene rubber
195
10.6 dia.
9.5 dia.
20.4±1.5
BA9S/13
Model indication
Lamp
LED A22-6@, 12@, 24@
28 max.
10 ±1 dia.
BA9S/13
Incandescent Lamp A22-5, 12, 24, H1
4-4 × 38 tapping screw 22.1±
0.3
0.1
dia.
10
(10 × 36) 0.6 depression
75
20.5±0.1
2.8±0.1
68
36
Two, 21 dia.
Side lead draw-out hole
20 41 69.5
Control Box
A22Z-B101Y (1 hole)
41
16±1 dia.
(Side lead draw-out hole) 32
39 Two, mounting holes
56
Cable Draw-out Hole (Top View)
Lock Plate
A22Z-3380
7.3 dia.
E-stop Shroud
A22Z-EG1
Sunken
section, 0.2 Switch guard
75
2.8
20.5
63
90 dia. 78 dia.
38 52.2 max.
30 40
75 min.
(Determined by the
height of the Switch
surface in the
lock position.)
22.2 dia.
33 dia.
Panel Cutout Dimensions
Allowable panel thickness: 1 to 3 mm
R5
EMERGENCY OFF
inscription plate (t=0.1)
Rubber packing (t=0.5)
Rubber packing (t=0.5)
Locking ring
Mounting panel
21
Panel
Switch Unit
A22E-M
2.5 8
R1.7
22.3
24.2±0.2
Note 1: The dimensions of the Shroud conform to the
specifications of the SEMATECH Application Guide
for SEMI S2-93.
2: These Shrouds are designed for use only in
semiconductor manufacturing equipment.
Do not use them for any other application.
3: The Shroud is not provided with the Switch.
+0.1
0
+0.4
0
+0.5
1.5
196
Terminal Arrangement
Terminal Arrangement (Bottom View)
12
R2
M90
353
20.6
22.2 dia.
2.8
79 dia.
98 dia.
105 dia.
The number of spacers depends
on the model (See note 2.)
Detents
inside
(One on
each side)
95+0.2
0
5.5+0.2
0
90.3+0.4
0 dia.
20
23
10
13 Panel Panel
SpacersSpacer
88 max. 105 max.
DPST-NC One-piece
Contact Unit
NC Contact Unit Position of
detent
notch
Position of
detent
notch
Panel Panel
With 1 Spacer With 2 Spacers
Panel Cutout Dimensions
Mounting a 1-pole Switch Unit
(See note 5.) Mounting a 2-pole Switch Unit
(See note 5.)
E-stop Shroud
A22Z-EG2, A22Z-EG21, A22Z-EG22
Note: 1. These Shrouds are designed for use only in semi-
conductor manufacturing equipment. Do not use
them for any other application.
2. The number of Spacers that are combined de-
pends on the model.
3. Tighten to a torque of 1.96 to 2.94 Nm.
4. The allowable panel thicknesses are as follows:
Without Spacers: t=1.3 to 22.5 mm
With 1 Spacer: t=1.3 to 12.5 mm
With 2 Spacers: t=1.3 to 2.5 mm
5. These are the dimension from the front of the pan-
el when the Switch Unit is attached.
Model No. of Spacers
A22Z-EG2 0
A22Z-EG21 1
A22Z-EG22 2
Non-lighted Lighted
Switch Blocks
M3.5 screws Lamp Socket
Switch
Blocks
197
Terminal Connection
Note: The above term inal connection diagrams are examples for SPST-NO + SPST-NC and DPS T-NC.
Panel Cutouts
A Lock Ring is provided as a standard feature.
Note: 1. When painting or coating the panel, make sure that the
specified panel dimensions apply to the panel after painting
or coating.
2. Use an A22Z-R25 Ring when mounting to a panel with a 25-
mm diameter hole.
Installation
Mounting to the Panel
Preparing the Panel
The panel dimensions are shown below.
The panel thickness must be 1 to 5 mm.
Always use a 25-mm-dia. Lock Ring for a 25-mm-dia. hole.
IP65 degree of protection will be lost if the 25-mm-dia. Lock Ring is
not used because of the larger size of a 25-mm-dia. hole.
When painting or coating the panel, make sure that the specified
panel dimensions apply to the panel after painting or coating.
Mounting the Operation Unit on the
Panel
Insert the Operation Unit (Pushbutton) from the front surface of the
panel, insert the Lock Ring and the mounting nut from the terminal
side, then tighten the nut. Before tightening, check that the rubber
washer is present between the Operation Unit and the panel.
When using a Legend Plate Frame, put one rubber washer each
between the Legend Plate Frame and the panel and between the
Operation Unit and the Legend Plate Frame. (One rubber w asher will
be provided when one Legend Plate Frame is ordered.)
Align the Lock Ring with the groove in the casing, then insert the
Lock Ring so that its edge is located on the panel side.
Tighten the mounting nut at a torque of 0.98 to 1.96 N·m.
When using a Lock Ring, replace with the s upplied Lock Ring, inser t
the projecting part into the lock slot, and then tighten the mounting
nut.
Type Terminal connection (BOTTOM VIEW)
SPST-NO + SPST-NC DPST-NC
Non-lighted
Lighted without Voltage
Reduction Unit
Lighted with Voltage
Reduction Unit
3
4
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2X2
X1
X
3
4
(+)
()
1
2X2
X1
X
1
2
(+)
()
X1
X2
1
2
X
3
4
X1
X2
1
2
X
1
2
Without Lock FittingWith Lock Fitting
R0.8 max.
3.2+0.2
0
24.1+0.4
0
22.3+0.4 dia.
025+0.5 dia.
0
22.3+0.4 dia.
0
22.3+0.4
0 dia. 25+0.5
0 dia.22.3+0.4
0 dia.
24.1+0.4
0
3.2+0.2
0 R0.8 max.
With Lock Rin
g
Without Lock Rin
g
198
1. When the panel cutout dimension is 25 dia., remove the supplied
rubber washer and mount the 25-dia. Ring as shown below.
(Since the A22Z-R25 is not attached to the main body, order sep-
arately.)
2. When the panel cutout dimension is 30 dia., the A22Z-A30
Attachment is not attached to the main body, order separately.
Matrix Mounting
1. The following diagram provides the dimensions for mounting indi-
vidual Switches, Legend Plates, and Lock Rings with leads con-
nected directly to Switch terminals.
2. The following diagram provides the dimensions for mounting
Large Legend Plates with crimp terminals connected to Switch
terminals.
Dimensions A and B between mounting hole centers are given in the
following tables.
For 1., Above
For 2., Above
Note: 1. The above dimens ions are the minimum dimensions when
using the applicable wir ing mater ials listed on page 201. If
any other materials are used, check the suitability of dimen-
sions in advance.
2. When using pushbuttons exceeding 30 mm, adjust dimen-
sion A or B accordingly. (When moun ting the A22-M@ in a
matrix, “30 mm” would have to be increased to 40 mm.
Mounting the Switch on the Operation
Unit
Insert the Operation Unit into the Switch Unit, aligning the arrow
mark inscri bed on the Case with the lever on the Switch Blocks, then
move the lever in the direction indicated by the ar row in the following
figure.
Removing the Switch
Hold here Mounting nut
Lock Ring
Rubber washer Panel
Panel Lock Ring
Pro-
jecting
part
Operation Unit
25-dia. Ring (A22Z-R25)
Panel
Lock Ring
Mounting nut
22.3 dia.
25 dia.
25 dia.
22 dia.
22.3 dia.
Operation Unit
Rubber washer
(mounted to Operation Unit)
30-dia. Resin Attachment
(A22Z-A30)
Rubber washer (included)
Mounting panel
Lock Ring
Mountin
g
Rin
g
30
A
Switch model Dimension A
A22-10, A22-10S, A22-01, A22-01S 45 mm min.
A22-20, A22-20S, A-22-02, A22-02S, A22-11, A22-11S 55 mm min.
Type of crimp
terminal Switch model Dimension B
Naked crimp ter-
minals A22-10, A22-10S, A22-01, A22-01S 51 mm min.
A22-20, A22-20S, A22-02, A22-02S,
A22-11, A22-11S 61 mm min.
Crimp ter minals
with insulating
sheaths
A22-10, A22-10S, A22-01, A22-01S 60 mm min.
A22-20, A22-20S, A22-02, A22-02S,
A22-11, A22-11S 70 mm min.
30
B
Operation Unit
Arrow mark
Lever
199
Move the lever in the direction indicated by the arrow in the following
figure, then pull the Operation Unit or the Switch Blocks.
Since the lever has a hole with an inside diameter of 6.5 mm, the
lever can be moved in the specified direction by inserting a screw-
driver into the hole and then moving the screwdriver.
Assembling the Cap
Emergency Stop Switch
Inser t the protrusion of the Tightening Wrench (A22Z-390 5) into the
Cap slot and then turn to remove the Cap.
Installing/Replacing the Lamp
Installing/Replacing from the Panel
Surface
Inser t the Lamp Ex tractor (A22Z-3901) into the lamp, then rotate the
Extractor while pressing it.
Installing/Replacing on the Switch
Grip the indicator with your fingers, then rotate the indicator while
pressing it against the Switch.
Control Box (Enclosure)
Mounting the Switch
The Standard-s ize Legend Plate Frame can b e mounted. Mount the
Frame as shown in the following diagram. Mount the Switch in the
same way as for an ordinary panel.
Creating a Cable Port Hole
Place the tip of a screwdriver on the surface where the cable port
hole is to be created with the cover attached and strike the screw-
driver to punch a hole. Attempts to punch a hole on the other side of
the case will damage the Box.
Securing the Connector Cable
1. Insert the connector into the cable port hole in the Box and secure
with the fixing nut inside the box.
2. Open a hole in the thin rubber section of the rubber ring.
3. Pass the tightening cap through the cable, insert the cable into
the connector, and tighten the hexagonal nut to secure the cable.
Screwdriver
Cable diameter Connector
7 to 9 dia. A22Z-3500-1
9 to 11 dia. A22Z-3500-2
Snap-in Legend Plate
Lock nut Rubber washer
Connector Tightening cap
Inside Outside
Box
Cable
200
Installing/Removing the Switch
Blocks
Installing the Switch Blocks
Hook the small protrusion on the Mounting Latch into the groove on
the other side of the lev er, then push up the Switch Block in the direc-
tion indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
Removing the Switch Blocks
Insert a screwdriver between the Mounting Latch and the Switch
Block, then push down the screwdriver in the direction indicated by
the arrow in the following figure.
Wiring
Wiring Round Crimp Terminals
Loosen the terminal screw from the Switch Unit until it completely
comes off the groove, insert a s crewdriver as shown in the following
figure, then push up the washer in the direction indicated by the
arrow to temporarily secure it. Now, a round crimp terminal can be
connected. After inserting the terminal, tighten the screws to com-
plete wiring.
Lever
Protrusion
Mounting
Latch
Switch Block
Use either of the following screwdrivers.
Screwdrive
r
3 to 6 mm
3 to 6 mm dia.
Flat-head
screwdriver
Phillips
screwdriver
Screw Screwdriver
Washer
201
Safety Precautions
Ref e r to the Common Precautions for Pushbutton Switches on page 14.
!Caution
Do not apply a voltage exceeding the rated voltage across the incan-
descent lamp terminals.
The lamp may be destroyed and the operation unit may fly out .
Precautions for Correct Use
Mounting
Always make sure that the power is turned OFF before mounting,
removing, or wiring the Switch, or performing maintenance. Electric
shock may occur.
Do not tighten the mounting ring more than necessary using tools
such as pointed-nose pliers. Doing so will damage the mounting ring.
The tightening torque is 0.98 to 1.96 N·m.
Recommended panel thickness: 1 to 5 mm.
Wiring
When DC-specific LEDs are used, wire the Switch so that the X1 ter-
minal is positive.
Terminal screws must be Phillips or slotted M3.5 screws with a
square washer.
The tightening torque is 1.08 to 1.27 N·m.
Single wires, stranded wires, and crimp ter minals can be connected
to the Switch.
Applicable Wiring Materials:
Twisted strands: 2 mm2 max.
Solid wire: 1.6 mm dia.
After wiring the Switch, maintain an appropriate clearance and
creepage distance.
Operating Environment
The IP65 model is des igned with a protective structure so that it will
not sustain damage if it is subjected to water from any direction t o the
front of the panel.
Using the Microload
Contact failure may occur is a Switch designed for a standard load is
used to switch a microload. Use Switches within the application
ranges shown in the following graph. Even within the application
range, insert a contact protection circuit, if necessar y, to prevent the
reduction of life expectancy due to extreme wear on the contacts
caused by loads where inrush current occurs when the contact is
opened and closed.
The minimum applicable load is the N-level reference value. This
value indicate s the malfunction reference level for the reliability level
of 60% (λ 60) (conforming to JIS C5003).
The equation, λ 60 = 0. 5 x 1 0 6/time indicates that the estimated mal-
function rate is less than 1/2,000,000 with a reliability level of 60%.
LEDs
The LED current-limiting resistor is built-in, so internal resistance is
not required.
If commercially available LEDs are used, select the ones that meet
the follo wing condi tions:
Base: BA9S/1 3 @
Overall length: 26 mm max.
Power consumption: 2.6 W max.
Others
The oil-resistant IP65 uses NBR rubber and is resistant to general
cutting oil and cooling oil. Some particular oils cannot be used with
the oil-resistant IP65, however, so contact your OMRON representa-
tive for details.
If the panel is to be finished with coating, etc., make sure that the
panel meets the specified dimensions after the coating.
Do not subject the Switch to extreme shock or vibration. Doing so will
cause malfunctions and damage to the Switch.
Do not let sharp objects come into contact with the Switches that are
made of resin. Doing so will damage the Switches, causing
scratches on the outside of the Pushbuttons, and malfunction.
When handling the Switches, do not throw or drop them.
8 mm max.
16.0 mm max.
8 mm dia. max.
16.0 mm max.
Naked Crimp Terminals
20.2 mm max.
8 mm max.
20.2 mm max.
8 mm dia. max.
Crimp Terminals with
Insulating Sheaths
Invalid
area
0.1 1 10 100 1,000
10 mA
1 mA
5
12
24
30 0.16 mA 1.6 mA 100 mA
0
Voltage (V)
Microload area Area of
use
Standard
load area
Current
(
mA
)
Hammer Screwdriver
Do not allow the
Switch to drop and hit
the ground.
Do not place or drop
heavy objects on the
Switch.
Do not operate the
Switch with hard or
sharp objects.
In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice.
ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.
Cat. No. A119-E1-06
202
Indicator
M22
22-dia. and 25-dia. Round Indicator Series
Easy mounting and removal of Socket Unit.
Use 25-dia. ring to install in 25-dia. panel cutouts.
Finger prot ect ion mec han is m on Lam p provided as a stand ard
feature.
UL and cUL approved (File No. E41515)
Model Number Structure
Model Number Legend
Completely Assembled
Shipped as a set which includes the Display, Lamp, and Socket Unit.
1 2 3
F
C
R
G
Y
W
A
6D 6 VDC
6A 6 VAC
12A 12 VAC/VDC
24A 24 VAC/VDC
5 5 VAC/VDC
12 12 VAC/VDC
24 24 VAC/VDC
T1 100 VAC
T2 200 VAC
M22-@@-@
1 Display Shape
Code Description
Round/Flat
Square/Projection
2 Illumination Color
Code Description
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
3 Light Source
Code Operating voltage
LED
LED
Without Voltage Reduction Unit
With Voltage Reduction Unit
Incandescent
lamp
Note: The LED lamp (24 VAC/VDC) can be lit by
directly applying 110 VAC/VDC (220 VAC/
VDC) to the lamp terminal. LED incorpo-
rates the 24-VAC/VDC type.
203
Subassembled
The Display, Lamp, or Sock et Unit can be ordered separately. Use them in combination f or models that are not a vailable as assembl ed Units. These
can also be used as inv entory for maintenance parts.
1. Display
2. Lamp
3. Socket Unit
1 2
F
C
R
G
Y
W
A
M22-@@
1 Flange Shape
Code Description
Round/Flat
Square/Projection
2 Cap Color
Code Description
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
1 2
R
G
Y
A
5 5 V A C (6 V A C)
12 12 V A C (14 V A C)
24 24 V A C (28 V A C)
6D 6 VDC (6 VDC)
6A 6 VAC (6 V A C)
12A 12 V A C/VDC (12 V A C/VDC)
24A 24 V A C/VDC (24 V A C/VDC)
A22-@@
2 Illumination Color
Code Description
None Incandescent lamp
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
1 Operating Voltage (Rated Voltage)
Code Description
LED
Incandescent
1
T1 110 VAC
T2 220 VAC
M22-00-@
1 Voltage Reduction Unit
Code Description
None Without Voltage Reduction Unit
204
Ordering Information
List of Models
Completely Assembled
Indicator
Appearance Lighting Operating voltage Model Illumination color
LED 6 VDC M22-F@-6D Insert one of the
following letters
into the box @.
R (red)
Y (yellow)
G (green)
W (white)
A (blue)
6 VA C M22-F@-6A
12 VA C/VDC M22-F@-12A
24 VA C/VDC M22-F@-24A
100 VAC M22-F@-T1
200 VAC M22-F@-T2
6 VDC M22-C@-6D
6 VA C M22-C@-6A
12 VA C/VDC M22-C@-12A
24 VA C/VDC M22-C@-24A
100 VAC M22-C@-T1
200 VAC M22-C@-T2
M22-F
Round/Flat
without V oltage
Reduction Unit
M22-F
Round/Flat
with V oltage
Reduction Unit
M22-C
Square/Projection
without V oltage
Reduction Unit
M22-C
Square/Projection
with V oltage
Reduction Unit
205
Subassembled
Display
Appearance IP65 oil-resistant
Color of Display Model
Red M22-FR
Green M22-FG
Yellow M22-FY
White M22-FW
Blue M22-FA
Red M22-CR
Green M22-CG
Yellow M22-CY
White M22-CW
Blue M22-CA
Display
Socket Unit Socket Unit
Lamp Lamp
LED LED
Without Voltage Reduction Unit With Voltage Reduction Unit
Incandescent
lamp
Round/Flat
M22-F
Square/Projection
M22-C
206
Lamp
LED
Note: 1. For voltage-reduction lighting, use the A22-24A@.
2. Used when the Display color is yellow or white.
Incandescent
Socket Unit
Note: For voltage-reduction lighting, use the A22-24A@.
Accessories (Order Separately)
The M22 uses the same accessor ies as the A22. Refer to the relevant infor m ation in the corresponding section for the A22.
Operating voltage 6 V 12 V 24 V 24 V
Super-bright
Appearance AC/DC LED light Model
AC Red A22-6DR --- --- ---
Green A22-6DG --- --- ---
Yellow (see note 2) A22-6DY --- --- ---
Blue A22-6DA --- --- ---
DC Red A22-6AR --- --- ---
Green A22-6AG --- --- ---
Yellow (see note 2) A22-6AY --- --- ---
Blue A22-6AA --- --- ---
AC and DC Red --- A22-12AR A22-24A R A22-24ASR
Green --- A22-12AG A22-24AG A22-24ASG
Yellow (see note 2) --- A22-12AY A22-24AY A22-24ASY
Blue --- A22-12AA A22-24AA A22-24ASA
Operating voltage 6 VAC/VDC 12 VAC/VDC 24 VAC/VDC
A22-5 A22-12 A22-24
Voltage-reduction circuits
Without Voltage Reduction Unit With Voltage Reduction Unit
Without Voltage Reduction Unit With Volt age Reduction Unit (100 VAC) With Voltage Reduction Unit (200 VAC)
M22-00 M22-00-T1 M22-00-T2
207
Specifications
Approved Standards
Note: cUL: CSA C22.2 No. 14
Approved Standard Ratings
UL, cUL (File No. E41515)
2-6W, 120 V max.
Ratings
LED Lamp
Note: The values in parentheses are for blue Indicators.
Super-bright LED Indicator
Incandescent Lamp
Voltage-reduction Lighting
Characteristics
Note: 1. With no icing or condensation.
2. Malfunction within 1 ms.
Recognized
organization Standards File No.
UL, cUL (See note.) UL508 E41515
Rated voltage Rated current Operating voltage
6 VDC 60 mA (20 mA) 6 VDC±5%
6 VAC 60 mA (20 mA) 6 VA C±5%
12 VAC/VDC 30 mA (10 mA) 12 VAC/VDC±5%
24 VAC/VDC 15 mA (10 mA) 24 VAC/VDC±5%
Rated voltage Rated current Operating voltage
24 VAC/VDC 15 mA 24 VAC/VDC±5%
Rated voltage Rated current Operating voltage
6 VAC/VDC 200 mA 5 V
14 VAC/VDC 80 mA 12 V
28 VAC/VDC 40 mA 24 V
130 VAC/VDC 20 mA 100 V
Rated voltage Operational voltage Applicable lamp
(BA9S/13@ gold)
110 VAC 95 to 115 VAC LED lamp (A22-24@)
220 VAC 190 to 230 VAC
Item Indicator
M22
Insulation resistance 100 M min. (at 500 VDC)
Dielectric strength 2,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of same polarity
2,500 VAC , 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of different polarity and also between
each terminal and ground
Vibration resistance Malfunction (See note 2.): 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude
Shock resistance Destruction 1,000 m/s2
Malfunction (See note 2.) 600 m/s2 max.
Ambient temperature (See note 1.) O perating: 20°C to 55°C
Storage: 40°C to 70°C
Ambient humidity Operating: 35°C to 85°C
Degree of protection IP65
Electric shock protection class Class II
PTI (tracking characteristic) 175
Degree of contamination 3 (IEC947-5-1)
208
Nomenclature
Display
Available Colors
Red, green yellow, white, blue
Lamp
Light Source
Socket Unit
Lighting Method
Lock Ring
LED lamp
Incandescent lamp
Lighted (without Voltage Reduction Unit)
Lighted (with Voltage Reduction Unit)
209
Dimensions
Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
Indicators
Accessories
The M22 uses the same accessories as the A22. Refer to the relevant infor mation in the corresponding section for the A22.
Terminal Arrangement (Bottom View)
Terminal Connection Panel Cutouts (Top View)
Note: 1. When applying coating such as paint to the panel, the di-
mensions should be those after the application of coating.
Lock Ring is provided as a standard item.
2. Recommended panel thickness: 1 to 5 mm.
3. Use an A22Z-R25 Ring when mo unting to a panel with 25-
mm holes.
Installation
The M22 uses the same installation method as the A22. Refer to the rele vant information in the Installation section for the A22.
Precautions
The precautions for the M22 are the same as those for the A22. Refer to the relevant inform ation in the Precautions section for the A22 and the
Technical Information for Pushbutton Switches (Cat. No. A143).
With/Without Voltage Reduction Unit
29.8 x 29.8
25.6 x 25.6
Round/Flat
M22-F
Square/Projection
M22-C
29.7 dia.
Lamp Socket
M3.5 screw
Without Voltage Reduction
Unit With Voltage Reduction Unit
Bottom view Top view
22.3+0.4 dia.
025+0.5 dia.
0
In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice.
ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.
Cat. No. A131-E1-03
210
Lighted Pushbutton Switch A3A
Compact Switch Allows Signal and
Power Switching with the Same Model
Compact, high-capacity push-button switch that
has contacts with a 3-mm gap and is ideal as a
power switch.
Capable of switching within the range of 1 mA,
5 VDC to 6 A, 125 VAC.
Requires only 14.5 mm behind the panel.
Options include the following:
Round or square
Momentary or alternate
Surface illumination or non-lighted
UL and CSA approved. RC
Ordering Information
Model Number Legend
A 3 A A - 9 0 K 1 - 00E R
(1) (2) (3) (4)
(1) Shape
Symbol Protection
A Square
T Round
(5)
(3) Switch
Symbol Operation Contact type
A (See note) Momentary SPDT
B (See note) Alternate
K Momentary SPST-NO
L Alternate
(2) Terminal
Symbol
(4) Illumination
Symbol Operation
00 Non-lighted
00E Surface illumination
Type
0 Solder
1 PCB
3 A at 125 VAC,
2 A at 30 VDC
6 A at 125 VAC,
2 A at 250 VAC,
4 A at 30 VDC
(5) Color
Pushbutton (Non-lighted Models)
Symbol Color
L Light gray
R Red (See note)
Y Yellow (See note)
G Green (See note)
A Blue
B Black
D Dark gray
H Gray
LED (Surface Illumination Models)
Symbol Color
R Red
Y Yellow
G Green
Note: Common to both lighted and non-
lighted models.
A3A A3A
211
List of Models
SPST-NO
Appearance Terminal Action Illumination Model Color
Square Solder Momentary Non-lighted A3AA-90K1-00j(Non-lighted)
q
A3AA-9jj1-00jSurface illumination A3AA-90K1-00Ej
(g)
R: red
A3AA 9jj100j
A3AA-9jj1-00EjAlternate Non-lighted A3AA-90L1-00j
R:
red
Y: yellow
Surface illumination A3AA-90L1-00Ej
Y:
yellow
G:
g
reen
PCB Momentary Non-lighted A3AA-91K1-00j
G:
green
L: li
g
ht
g
ra
y
(
see note
)
Surface illumination A3AA-91K1-00Ej
L:
light
gray
(see
note)
A: blue
(
see note
)
Alternate Non-lighted A3AA-91L1-00j
A:
blue
(see
note)
B: black (see note)
Surface illumination A3AA-91L1-00Ej
B:
black
(see
note)
D: dark gray (see note)
Round Solder Momentary Non-lighted A3AT-90K1-00j
D
:
d
ar
k
gray
(
see no
t
e
)
H: gray (see note)
A3AT-9jj1-00jSurface illumination A3AT-90K1-00Ej
H
: gray
(
see no
t
e
)
(Lighted)
A3AT 9jj100j
A3AT-9jj1-00EjAlternate Non-lighted A3AT-90L1-00j(Lighted)
R: red
Surface illumination A3AT-90L1-00EjR: red
Y: yellow
PCB Momentary Non-lighted A3AT-91K1-00jY: yellow
G
Surface illumination A3AT-91K1-00EjG: green
Alternate Non-lighted A3AT-91L1-00j
Surface illumination A3AT-91L1-00Ej
Note: The above models each have a SPST -NO contact that can switch 6 A at 125 VAC, 2 A at 250 VAC, and 4 A at 30 VDC. When ordering
any of the above models, replace j of the model number with a code to indicate the pushbutton color of the model (i.e., replace j with
R, Y, G, L, A, B, D, H, and L). The pushbutton of an A3A does not illuminate if the color of the pushbutton is dark gray, gray, light gray,
blue, or black.
SPDT
Appearance Terminal Action Illumination Model Color
Square Solder Momentary Non-lighted A3AA-90A1-00jR: red
Square
A3AA-9jj1-00j
A3AA 9jj1 00Ej
y
Surface illumination A3AA-90A1-00EjY: yellow
A3AA-9jj1-00EjAlternate Non-lighted A3AA-90B1-00j
Y:
yellow
G: green
Surface illumination A3AA-90B1-00Ej
G:
green
L: li
g
ht
g
ra
y
(
see note
)
PCB Momentary Non-lighted A3AA-91A1-00j
L:
light
gray
(see
note)
A: blue
(
see note
)
y
Surface illumination A3AA-91A1-00Ej
A:
blue
(see
note)
B: black
(
see note
)
Alternate Non-lighted A3AA-91B1-00j
B:
black
(see
note)
D: dark gray (see note)
Surface illumination A3AA-91B1-00Ej
D:
dark
gray
(see
note)
H: gray (see note)
Round
A3AT 9jj100j
Solder Momentary Non-lighted A3AT-90A1-00j
H
: gray
(
see no
t
e
)
(Lighted)
A3AT-9jj1-00j
A3AT-9jj1-00Ej
y
Surface illumination A3AT-90A1-00Ej
(Li
g
ht
e
d)
R: red
A3AT
-
9jj1
-
00Ej
Alternate Non-lighted A3AT-90B1-00jR: red
Y: yellow
Surface illumination A3AT-90B1-00EjY: yellow
G: green
PCB Momentary Non-lighted A3AT-91A1-00jG: green
y
Surface illumination A3AT-91A1-00Ej
Alternate Non-lighted A3AT-91B1-00j
Surface illumination A3AT-91B1-00Ej
Note: The above models each have a SPDT contact that can switch 3 A at 125 VAC and 2 A at 30 VDC. When ordering any of the above
models, replace j of the model number with a code to indicate the pushbutton color of the model (i.e., replace j with R, Y, G, L, A, B, D,
H, and L). The pushbutton of an A3A does not illuminate if the color of the pushbutton is dark gray, gray, light gray, blue, or black.
A3A A3A
212
Accessories (Order Separately)
Flange
Select according to panel color.
Name Shape Classification Model
Flange Square, 12.7 x 12.7 Flange alone Black A3A-241
Light gray A3A-242
Round, 12.7 dia. Black A3A-251
Light gray A3A-252
Leaf spring A3A-200
Square, 12.7 x 12.7 Flange and leaf spring
(
one each
)
Black A3A-211
(one
each)
Light gray A3A-212
Round, 12.7 dia. Black A3A-221
Light gray A3A-222
Note: An A3A with solder terminals is provided with a round or square black flange and leaf spring for the switching mechanism of the A3A. A
round black flange is provided with each A3A having solder terminals and a round pushbutton. A square black flange is provided with
each A3A having solder terminals and a square pushbutton.
Specifications
Contact Ratings
Type Contact form Resistive load
High capacity SPST-NO 6 A at 125 VAC
2 A at 250 VAC 4 A at 30 VDC
Note: 1. Minimum allowable load: 5 VDC 1 mA (Resistive)
2. The ratings given above are for testing under the following conditions:
1. Ambient temperature: 20 ±2°C
2. Ambient humidity: 65 ±5%
3. Operating frequency: 20 times/minute
LED Ratings
Item Surface illumination
Red Yellow Green
Forward voltage VFStandard value 2.0 V 2.1 V 2.1 V
Maximum value 3 V
Forward current IFStandard value 10 mA
Maximum value 20 mA 25 mA 25 mA
Permissible loss PD Absolute max. value 60 mW 75 mW 75 mW
Reverse voltage VRAbsolute max. value 3 V
Note: 1. The above built-in LEDs do not have a resistor . Connect to each of the above built-in LEDs a resistor that satisfies the above condi-
tions.
2. Refer to the VF – IF characteristic graphs on page 219.
A3A A3A
213
Characteristics
Operating frequency Mechanical:
Momentary action: 120 operations/minute max.
Alternate action: 60 operations/minute max. (See note 1.)
Electrical: 20 operations/minute max.
Insulation resistance 100 M min. (at 500 VDC)
Contact resistance 100 m max. (initial value)
Dielectric strength 600 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of same polarity
2,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between each terminal and ground
600 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between LED terminals (See note 2.)
Vibration resistance Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude (See note 3.)
Shock resistance Destruction: 500 m/s2
Malfunction: 150 m/s2 (See note 3.)
Life expectancy Mechanical:
Momentary action: 1,000,000 operations min.
Alternate action: 50,000 operations min. (See note 1.)
Electrical: 50,000 operations min.
Weight Approx. 3.2 g
Ambient temperature Operating: –10°C to 55°C (with no icing)
Storage: –25°C to 65°C
Ambient humidity Operating: 35% to 85%
Degree of protection IP00
Electric shock protection class Class II
PTI (proof tracking index) 175
Pollution degree 3 (IEC947-5-1)
Note: 1. With alternate-action models, a setting and resetting is regarded as one operation.
2. The figure for the dielectric strength between LED terminals in the above table is for when the LED is not installed in the Switch.
3. The figures for malfunctions in the above table are for malfunctions of at least 1 ms.
Approved Standards
UL (File No. E41515)/CSA (File No. LR45258)
SPST-NO: 6 A at 125 VAC, 2 A at 250 VAC, 4 A at 30 VDC
SPDT: 3 A at 125 VAC, 2 A at 30 VDC
Operating Characteristics
OF max. 2.45 N
RF min. 0.15 N
TT Approx. 2 mm
PT max. 1.5 mm
LTA min. (See note.) 0.5 mm
Note: The above lock stroke figure applies to A3A alternate
operation models only.
A3A A3A
214
Nomenclature
Pushbutton
Square (A3AA) Round (A3AT) Color cap
Color
Non-lighted Model
Red, yellow, light gray, gray, dark gray, green blue,
black
Surface Illumination Model
Red, yellow, green
Flange
Leaf spring
Switch
Ratings (Standard load)
6 A at 125 VAC
2 A at 250 VAC
4 A at 30 VDC
Minimum applicable load:
1 mA at 5 VDC (resistive load)
Terminals
Solder terminal
PCB terminal
Diffusion sheet (milky white)
Contact Form
Contact Type
Contact form Contact type
SPST-NO NO NO
SPDT NC
NOCOM
Note: 1. The above is for the A3AA.
2. An A3A with solder terminals is provided with a black flange and leaf spring for the switching mechanism, however an A3A with PCB
terminals is not provided with them. If a black flange and leaf spring are required for an A3A with PCB terminals, order them from
your OMRON representative.
A3A A3A
215
Dimensions
Note: 1. All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
2. The illustrations below show switches with solder terminals, without a flange or leaf spring.
Non-lighted Model
Square Pushbutton
Round Pushbutton
Surface Illumination Model
Square Pushbutton
Round Pushbutton
Square push-button
8.9 × 8.9
Round push-button
8.9 dia.
8.9 × 8.9
Square push-button
Round push-button Two, t0.4 terminals
Surface illumination
Surface illumination
Two, t0.3 LED terminals
8.9 dia.
Two, t0.4
terminals
Three, t0.4
terminals
SPST-NO SPDT
SPST-NO SPDT
Three, t0.4
terminals
Two, t0.3 LED terminals
15.2
15.2
Accessories (Order Separately)
Note: Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.
Leaf Spring
A3A-200 Flange (Square)
A3A-24j
Flange (Round)
A3A-25j
12.7
9.1
t = 0.3
12.7 dia.
9.1 dia.
1.0 1.0
9.112.7
A3A A3A
216
Panel Cutouts
Square Pushbutton
Round Pushbutton
11.5+0.2
0
11.5+0.2
0
11.5+0.2
0 dia.
14.5 max.
Flange
Panel (See note.)
Leaf spring
Note: 1. Recommended panel
thickness: 1 to 1.6 mm
2. The diagram shows the
lighted SPST-NO model.
Panel Mounting Dimensions
For Side-by-side Mounting
Mounting Square pushbutton Round pushbutton
Horizontal multiple mounting
3.8 min
15.3 min.
11.5+0.2
–0
11.5+0.2
–0 15.3 min.
11.5+0.2
0 dia.
Vertical multiple mounting
11.5+0.2
–0
11.5+0.2
0 dia.
12.7 min.
A3A A3A
217
Terminals
Solder terminal PCB terminal
SPST-
NO Non-lighted Models
Lighted Models
Terminal Arrangement
(Bottom View)
LED
terminal
Terminal for models
with an illuminating
push-button
0.8 0.8 x 2
10.16
Switch terminal:
t0.4
Switch terminal: t0.4
Lamp terminal: t0.3
Non-lighted Models Lighted Models
Terminal Arrangement
(Bottom View) PCB Dimensions
(Bottom View)
LED
terminal
Terminal for models
with an illuminating
push-button
Four,
1 dia.
holes
Holes for models
with illuminating
push-button
10.16
4.48
(0.67)
(1.87)
10.16
Switch terminal: t0.4 Switch terminal: t0.4
Lamp terminal: t0.3
SPDT Non-lighted Models
Lighted Models
Terminal Arrangement
(Bottom View)
LED
terminal
Switch terminal: t0.4
Lamp terminal: t0.3
Switch terminal:
t0.4
1.95
Non-lighted Models Lighted Models
Terminal Arrangement
(Bottom View) PCB Dimensions
(Bottom View)
LED
terminal Five,
1-dia.
holes Holes for models
with illuminating
push-button
Switch terminal: t0.4 Switch terminal: t0.4
LED terminal: t0.3
A3A A3A
218
Installation
Mounting and Replacing the Pushbutton
Mounting Direction for the Pushbutton and Switch
Insert the catches of the Pushbutton into the grooves of the
Switch and push down on the Pushbutton until it is fixed securely
to the Switch.
With lighted models, the LED is built into the Switch and cannot
be replaced.
Catches on the Pushbutton
Grooves in the Switch
LED terminals
Removing the Pushbutton (Non-lighted Models Only)
To remove the Pushbutton, hold both the Pushbutton and the
Switch on the longer sides and pull the Pushbutton away from
the Switch. (If the catches on the Pushbutton are bent outwards,
it may result in malfunction.)
Catch
When replacing the Pushbutton, if the cap is held on the sides
with catches, internal components (e.g., plate) may come loose.
Be sure to hold the Pushbutton by the sides without catches (i.e.,
the longer sides of the Switch) when removing.
Mounting Switch on a Panel
Mount Leaf Spring
Press the leaf spring into the fitted groove on the upper surface of
the Switch. For an easier fitting, first fit one side of the leaf spring,
then press the other side into the fitting groove.
Leaf spring
Leaf spring
fitting groove
Switch
Note: Be sure to fit the leaf spring exactly into the groove, and do
not allow it to slip out of the groove.
Mount Flange on Panel
Insert the flange from the front surface of the panel.
Panel
Flange
Guide
The flange has two opposing guides to facilitate its insertion into the
panel cutout hole. Be sure the flange does not remain tilted with re-
spect to the panel surface after being installed.
Cross Section
Flange
Panel (t = 1 to 1.6 mm)
Note: The mounting direction of the flange determines the
orientation of the Switch.
Fit Flange with Switch
While holding the flange, insert the opposing supports into the gaps
between the leaf spring and Switch on the longer sides of the hous-
ing, and fit the rectangular hole of the flange with the projections of
the switch housing.
Support
Panel
Projection
Note: Completely remove any burrs on the panel cutout surface;
otherwise, the flange and Switch will not attach solidly.
Removing Switch
Insert a small flat-bladed screwdriver or tweezers into the flange
support exposed on the rear of the panel. Pry up on each side to pull
out the Switch.
Panel Flat-bladed screwdriver
or tweezers
Note: Do not pry up the flange support more than necessary or
the switch holding portions may be damaged.
A3A A3A
219
Precautions
Operation
When operating an A3A, make sure that the A3A has a pushbutton.
Do not operate the A3A with a screwdriver or tweezers without
mounting a pushbutton to the A3A, otherwise the A3A may malfunc-
tion.
Mounting
When opening a hole on a panel to mount an A3A to the panel, make
sure that the hole has no burr.
When mounting a flange to the switching mechanism of an A3A,
make sure that the flange and the casing of the switching mecha-
nism are engaged securely.
Wiring
When soldering the terminals of an A3A, refer to the following.
1. For manual soldering: Use a soldering iron with the terminals
at a temperature of 350°C maximum within three seconds.
2. Do not impose any external force on the terminals for one
minute after the terminals are soldered.
Do not pull the terminals of any A3A with a force exceeding 5.34 N,
otherwise the joint part of the A3A may be damaged.
When soldering the terminals of an A3A, apply non-corrosive rosin
flux to the terminals.
After soldering the terminals of an A3A, do not wash the A3A with
any solvent.
When mounting an A3A to a PCB and soldering the terminals of the
A3A to the PCB, make sure that the flux will not rise above the sur-
face of the PCB.
Operating Environment
When using an A3A, make sure that dust, metal powder, or oil will
not penetrate into the interior of the A3A.
LED
The polarity of the LED is indicated on the back of the Switch. Wire
the LED correctly according to the polarity.
An A3A with a built-in LED does not have a limiting resistor. Connect
a limiting resistor.
The resistance can be calculated by using the following expression.
R = (E –VF)/IF ()
E: Applied voltage (V)
VF: LED forward voltage (V)
IF: LED forward current (A)
Note: Make sure that the limiting resistor connected to the built-in
LED of an A3A satisfies the characteristics of the built-in
LED. The mean forward current of the built-in LED must be
8 mA minimum.
Example
Conditions: Red LED with an IF of –10 mA at 24 V and a Ta of 25°C.
From the red LED characteristic below, VF will be 2 V when IF is
10 mA. Therefore, R = (24 V – 2 V)/0.01 A = 2,200 .
Thus the recommended resistance is 2.2 k at 0.5 W (2* x IF2R).
Note: A factor of 2 (marked with an asterisk) is applied because
the permissible wattage of the resistor must be twice as
large as the required wattage.
LED Characteristics (VF – IF Characteristics)
Ta: Ambient Temperature
Red
Green
Yellow
Ta = 25°C
Forward Current: Ir (mA)
Forward Voltage: Vr (V)
Ta = 25°C
Forward Current: Ir (mA)
Forward Voltage: Vr (V)
Ta = 25°C
Forward Current: Ir (mA)
Forward Voltage: Vr (V)
Pushbutton
When exchanging the Pushbutton (except the ones for the mechan-
ical indicator models) with a new one, pull out the Pushbutton from
the Switch, holding the Pushbutton in the longitudinal direction.
Do not remove the Pushbutton of the mechanical indicator model.
Engraving of Pushbutton
Depth of engraving:
0.3 mm max. for illuminating pushbutton
Since the Pushbutton is made of polycarbonate, use an alcohol-
based solvent when cleaning the Unit.
Pressing of Pushbutton
Apply firm pressure to the Pushbutton when operating it. In doing
so, however, do not apply a pressure greater than 11.8 N.
ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.
Cat. No. A25-E1-06
220
Lighted Pushbutton Switches A3P
Large Rectangular-bodied Lighted
Pushbutton Switches
Excellent operating sensitivity.
Good illumination with even surface brightness.
Three-color models (green, orange, red; chame-
leon lighting) included in lineup.
UL and CSA approved.
RC
Ordering Information
Model Number Legend
The model numbers used to order sets of Units are illustrated below. One set comprises the Pushbutton, Lamp, and Switch.
A 3 P J - 90 B 1 1 - 24E RW
24E R
(1) (2) (3) (4)
(5) (6)
Upper Lower
Single screen
Horizontal 2-split screen
R (Red)
W (White)
Upper
Lower
(1) Shape of Pushbutton
Symbol Shape
J Rectangular
A Square
T Round
Momentary operation: Self-resetting
Alternate operation: Self-holding
(2) Switch Specifications
Symbol Operation
A Momentary
B Alternate
C Momentary
D Alternate
Standard Load
Symbol Operation
E Momentary
F Alternate
G Momentary
H Alternate
Microload
(3) Screen Pattern
SPDT
DPDT
SPDT
DPDT
Standard Load
250 VAC, 3 A
30 VDC, 3 A
Microload
125 VAC, 0.1 A
30 VDC, 0.1 A
Minimum applicable load
5 VDC, 1 mA
3PDT models are also available.
Select from among the individual
products shown on page 233.
Symbol Screen pattern
1Single
screen
22-split
screen
GChameleon
(see note
1, 2, 3)
Note: 1. The chameleon screen pattern is
not available with A3PT models.
2. The chameleon screen pattern is
only available with 12 or 24-VDC
models.
3 With chameleon models, the whole
screen lights red, green, or orange.
When not lit, the display is white.
The available rectangular models are shown
below. Select from among the individual prod-
ucts shown on page 231.
Vertical 2-split
screen models
Horizontal 3-split
screen models
4-split screen
models
Vertical 3-split
screen models
The above diagrams show the Switches
with the “ ” mark facing down.
Colored-illumination models up to the
4-split screen models are available as
individual Units. Refer to page 229.
“Colored-illumination” models oper-
ate in the way shown below:
Unlit Lit
White Color
The built-in LED
is colored.
(4) Case Color
Symbol Color
1 Black
2 Light gray
Note: A3PT models are
available in light
gray only.
(5) Lighting Method
Symbol Rated voltage
05E 5 VDC
12E 12 VDC
24E 24 VDC
LED-lighted Models
(A3PJ and A3PA
Models Only)
LED Lamp-lighted Models
(A3PT Only)
Symbol Rated voltage
05C 5 VDC
12C 12 VDC
24C 24 VDC
A3PJ and A3PA can also
be ordered separately. Re-
fer to page 231 for details.
Incandescent Lamp-
lighted Models
Symbol Rated voltage
06 6 VAC/VDC
14 14 VAC/VDC
28 28 VAC/VDC
(6) Color of Pushbutton
Symbol Color
R Red
O Orange
G Green
W White
K Chameleon
The chameleon screen
pattern is not available
with A3PT models.
The chameleon screen
pattern is only available
with 12 or 24-VDC
models.
For Incandescent
Lamp
Symbol Color
No symbol Red,
orange,
white,
blue,
green
Includes colored plate.
Refer to page 232 for
details.
For LED
Illumination-only models
A3P A3P
221
Number of LED Lamps
Screen pattern A3PJ A3PA A3PT
Single screen Models with built-in LED 2
Horizontal 2-split screen 2
Vertical 2-split screen 4 (See note.) --- ---
Horizontal 3-split screen
()
--- ---
Vertical 3-split screen --- ---
4-split screen --- ---
Note: These split screen models are available only as individual
Units. They cannot be ordered as sets.
Number of Incandescent Lamps
Screen pattern A3PJ A3PA A3PT
Single screen 2 1 2
Horizontal 2-split screen 4
(L
2 2
Vertical 2-split screen (Low-po
wer
--- ---
Horizontal 3-split screen wer
incandes --- ---
Vertical 3-split screen
incandes
cent
lamp)
--- ---
4-split screen lamp) --- ---
List of Models
Model A3PJ (Rectangular) A3PA (Square) A3PT (Round)
Appearance 52 max.
6.7
25
32
52 max.
25
25
6.7 52 max.
32 dia.
6.4
A3P A3P
222
Construction
Lighting
method LED-lighted models
(LED is built-in.) LED lamp-lighted models (LED lamp is not built-in.) Incandescent lamp-lighted models
(Incandescent lamp is not built-in.)
Models A3PJ A3PA A3PJ A3PA A3PT A3PJ A3PA A3PT
Screen
patterns Single screen
Horizontal 2-split
screen
Chameleon
(3-color)
Single screen
Horizontal 2-split
screen
Chameleon
(3-color)
Horizontal 2-split
screen
Vertical 2-split
screen
Single screen
Horizontal 3-split
screen
4-split screen
Vertical 3-split
screen Single screen
Horizontal 2-split
screen
Single screen
Horizontal 2-split
screen
Vertical 2-split
screen
Single screen
4-split screen
Horizontal 3-split
screen
Vertical 3-split
screen Single screen
Horizontal 2-split
screen
Single screen
LED-lighted models LED lamp-lighted models Incandescent lamp-lighted models
LED-lighted models Chameleon models (full screen
illumination in one of three colors)
Cap
(transparent)
Legend plate
(transparent)
Colored plate
LED Unit LED Unit
3-color emitter Lamp holder
Pushbutton
(Split-screen models
contain a light baffle.)
Pushbutton colors
LED-lighted models and
LED lamp-lighted models
White, Red, Green, Orange
Lamp
Switch
Switch Specifications
Standard load
250 VAC, 3 A
30 VDC, 4A
Microload
125 VAC, 0.1 A
30 VDC, 0.1 A
Case Color
Built-in LED
Cap
(transparent)
Legend plate
(transparent)
Colored plate
Cap
(transparent)
Legend plate
(transparent)
(See note.)
Colored plate
Minimum applicable load: 5 VDC, 1 mA
Select either black or light
gray to suit your panel de-
sign. (The round A3PT
models are available in
light gray only.)
Note: The above diagram for LED lamp-lighted models and incandescent lamp-lighted models shows the A3PJ model.
Incandescent lamp-lighted model
White, Red, Green, Blue,
Orange
Note: Incandescent lamp-lighted A3PT models
do not contain a legend plate.
A3P A3P
223
A3P Lighting Method Diagram
The following diagram shows
the Switches with the
mark facing down.
A3PJ (rectangular)
LED models
Incandescent lamp-
lighted models
LED-lighted models
LED lamp-lighted models
Chameleon models (Full screen illumination
in one of three colors)
Single screen
models Horizontal 2-split
screen models
Single screen
models Horizontal 2-split
screen models Vertical 2-split
screen models
4-split screen
Single screen
Single screen
models Horizontal 2-split
screen models Vertical 2-split
screen models*
4-split screen
models*
A3PA (square)
A3PT (round)
LED models
Incandescent lamp-
lighted models
LED-lighted models
LED lamp-lighted models
Chameleon models
Single screen
models Horizontal 2-split
screen models
Single screen
models Horizontal 2-split
screen models
Single screen
models
Single screen
models Horizontal 2-split
screen models
Single screen
models
LED models LED lamp-lighted models
Incandescent lamp-
lighted models
Single screen
models
Horizontal 3-split
screen models
Vertical 3-split
screen models
Horizontal 3-split
screen models*
Vertical 3-split
screen models*
As a set: See page 224.
Individually: See page 230.
Individually: See page 230.
(Not available as a set.)
As a set: See page 224.
Individually: See page 230.
As a set: See page 224.
Individually: See page 230.
*Models indicated with an asterisk
are only available individually.
As a set: See page 224.
Individually: See page 230.
Individually: See page 230.
(Not available as a set.)
As a set: See page 224.
Individually: See page 230.
As a set: See page 224.
Individually: See page 230.
As a set: See page 224.
Individually: See page 230.
As a set: See page 224.
Individually: See page 230.
Ordering Information
A3P A3P
224
Ordering as a Set
The model numbers used to order sets of Units are given in the following tables. One set comprises the Pushbutton, Lamp, and Switch.
A3PJ (Rectangular) Single Screen Models
Standard Loads
Contact type Standard load (250 VAC, 3 A; 30 VDC, 4 A) Pushbutton
color
Contact
type
Operation
Cl
Momentary operation (Self-resetting) Alternate operation (Self-holding)
color
symbol
Case color
Rated voltage
Output Lighting
Black Li
g
ht
g
ra
y
Black Li
g
ht
g
ra
y
Rated voltage
Output Lighting
Black
Light
gray
Black
Light
gray
SPDT LED 5 VDC A3PJ-90A11-05E(1) A3PJ-90A12-05E(1) A3PJ-90B11-05E(1) A3PJ-90B12-05E(1) R
O
S
12 VDC A3PJ-90A11-12E(1) A3PJ-90A12-12E(1) A3PJ-90B11-12E(1) A3PJ-90B12-12E(1) O
G
24 VDC A3PJ-90A11-24E(1) A3PJ-90A12-24E(1) A3PJ-90B11-24E(1) A3PJ-90B12-24E(1)
G
W
Chameleon 12 VDC A3PJ-90AG1-12EK --- A3PJ-90BG1-12EK A3PJ-90BG2-12EK (See note 1.)
C
24 VDC A3PJ-90AG1-24EK A3PJ-90AG2-24EK A3PJ-90BG1-24EK A3PJ-90BG2-24EK
(S )
Incandescent
l
6 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90A11-06 A3PJ-90A12-06 A3PJ-90B11-06 A3PJ-90B12-06 (See note 2.)
lamp 14 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90A11-14 A3PJ-90A12-14 A3PJ-90B11-14 A3PJ-90B12-14
(S )
28 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90A11-28 A3PJ-90A12-28 A3PJ-90B11-28 A3PJ-90B12-28
DPDT LED 5 VDC A3PJ-90C11-05E(1) A3PJ-90C12-05E(1) A3PJ-90D11-05E(1) A3PJ-90D12-05E(1) R
O
12 VDC A3PJ-90C11-12E(1) A3PJ-90C12-12E(1) A3PJ-90D11-12E(1) A3PJ-90D12-12E(1) O
G
24 VDC A3PJ-90C11-24E(1) A3PJ-90C12-24E(1) A3PJ-90D11-24E(1) A3PJ-90D12-24E(1)
G
W
Chameleon 12 VDC A3PJ-90CG1-12EK A3PJ-90CG2-12EK A3PJ-90DG1-12EK --- (See note 1.)
C
24 VDC A3PJ-90CG1-24EK A3PJ-90CG2-24EK A3PJ-90DG1-24EK A3PJ-90DG2-24EK
(S )
Incandescent
l
6 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90C11-06 A3PJ-90C12-06 A3PJ-90D11-06 A3PJ-90D12-06 (See note 2.)
lamp 14 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90C11-14 A3PJ-90C12-14 A3PJ-90D11-14 A3PJ-90D12-14
(S )
28 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90C11-28 A3PJ-90C12-28 A3PJ-90D11-28 A3PJ-90D12-28
Enter the desired color symbol for the Pushbutton in (1). (R) = Red, (O) = Orange, (G) = Green, (W) = White.
Example: Red A3PJ-90A11-24E R
Microloads
Contact type Microload (125 VAC, 0.1 A; 30 VDC, 0.1 A) Pushbutton
color
Contact
type
Operation
Case color
Momentary operation (Self-resetting)
color
symbol
Case color
Output Rated voltageLighting
Black
Light gray
Output Rated voltageLighting
Black
Light
gra
y
SPDT LED 5 VDC A3PJ-90E11-05E(1) A3PJ-90E12-05E(1) R
O
S
12 VDC A3PJ-90E11-12E(1) A3PJ-90E12-12E(1) O
G
24 VDC A3PJ-90E11-24E(1) A3PJ-90E12-24E(1)
G
W
Chameleon 12 VDC A3PJ-90EG1-12EK --- (See note 1.)
C
24 VDC A3PJ-90EG1-24EK A3PJ-90EG2-24EK
(S )
Incandescent
l
6 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90E11-06 A3PJ-90E12-06 (See note 2.)
lamp 14 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90E11-14 A3PJ-90E12-14
(S )
28 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90E11-28 A3PJ-90E12-28
DPDT LED 5 VDC A3PJ-90G11-05E(1) A3PJ-90G12-05E(1) R
O
12 VDC A3PJ-90G11-12E(1) A3PJ-90G12-12E(1) O
G
24 VDC A3PJ-90G11-24E(1) A3PJ-90G12-24E(1)
G
W
Chameleon 12 VDC A3PJ-90GG1-12EK --- (See note 1.)
C
24 VDC A3PJ-90GG1-24EK ---
(S )
Incandescent
l
6 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90G11-06 A3PJ-90G12-06 (See note 2.)
lamp 14 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90G11-14 A3PJ-90G12-14
(S )
28 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90G11-28 A3PJ-90G12-28
Enter the desired color symbol for the Pushbutton in (1). (R) = Red, (O) = Orange, (G) = Green, (W) = White.
Example: A3PJ-90E11-24E R
Red
Note: 1. You can change the screen colors of chameleon models between red, green, and orange, by changing the terminal wiring. Refer to
page 240 for details.
2. Incandescent lamps are supplied with colored plates (white, red, green, blue, and orange) and legend plates (milk-white and trans-
parent). Use the appropriate combination.
(1)
A3P A3P
225
A3PJ (Rectangular) Horizontal 2-split Screen Models (1)
(2)
Standard Loads
Contact type Standard load (250 VAC, 3 A; 30 VDC, 4 A) Pushb
utton
Contact
type
Operation
Cl
Momentary operation (Self-resetting) Alternate operation (Self-holding)
u
tton
color
s
y
mbol
Case color
Rated voltage
Output Lighting
Black Li
g
ht
g
ra
y
Black Li
g
ht
g
ra
y
symbol
Rated voltage
Output Lighting
Black
Light
gray
Black
Light
gray
SPDT LED 24 VDC A3PJ-90A21-24E(1)(2) A3PJ-90A22-24E(1)(2) A3PJ-90B21-24E(1)(2) A3PJ-90B22-24E(1)(2) R
O
G
W
Incandescent
l
6 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90A21-06 A3PJ-90A22-06 A3PJ-90B21-06 A3PJ-90B22-06 (See
t)
lamp 14 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90A21-14 A3PJ-90A22-14 A3PJ-90B21-14 A3PJ-90B22-14
(S
note)
28 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90A21-28 A3PJ-90A22-28 A3PJ-90B21-28 A3PJ-90B22-28
DPDT LED 24 VDC A3PJ-90C21-24E(1)(2) A3PJ-90C22-24E(1)(2) A3PJ-90D21-24E(1)(2) A3PJ-90D22-24E(1)(2) R
O
G
W
Incandescent
l
6 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90C21-06 A3PJ-90C22-06 A3PJ-90D21-06 A3PJ-90D22-06 (See
t)
lamp 14 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90C21-14 A3PJ-90C22-14 A3PJ-90D21-14 A3PJ-90D22-14
(S
note)
28 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90C21-28 A3PJ-90C22-28 A3PJ-90D21-28 A3PJ-90D22-28
Enter the desired color symbols for the Pushbutton in (1) and (2). (R) = Red, (O) = Orange, (G) = Green, (W) = White.
Example: Red Upper
White Lower A3PJ-90A21-24E R W
Red White
Microloads
Contact type Microload (125 VAC, 0.1 A; 30 VDC, 0.1 A) Pushb
utton
Operation
Momentary operation (Self-resetting)
u
tton
color
s
y
mbol
Case color
Black Li
g
ht
g
ra
y
symbol
Rated voltage
Output Lighting
Black
Light
gray
SPDT LED 24 VDC A3PJ-90E21-24E(1)(2) A3PJ-90E22-24E(1)(2) R
O
G
W
Incandescent
l
6 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90E21-06 A3PJ-90E22-06 (See
t)
lamp 14 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90E21-14 A3PJ-90E22-14
(S
note.)
28 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90E21-28 A3PJ-90E22-28
DPDT LED 24 VDC A3PJ-90G21-24E(1)(2) A3PJ-90G22-24E(1)(2) R
O
G
W
Incandescent
l
6 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90G21-06 A3PJ-90G22-06 (See
t)
lamp 14 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90G21-14 A3PJ-90G22-14
(S
note.)
28 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90G21-28 A3PJ-90G22-28
Enter the desired color symbols for the Pushbutton in (1) and (2). (R) = Red, (O) = Orange, (G) = Green, (W) = White.
Example: Red Upper
White Lower A3PJ-90E21-24E R W
Red White
Note: Incandescent lamps are supplied with colored plates (white, red, green, blue, and orange) and legend plates (milk-white and transpar-
ent). Use the appropriate combination.
A3P A3P
226
A3PA (Square) Single Screen Models
Standard Loads
Contact type Standard load (250 VAC, 3 A; 30 VDC, 4 A) Pushbutton
color
Contact
type
Operation
Cl
Momentary operation (Self-resetting) Alternate operation (Self-holding)
color
symbol
Case color
Rated voltage
Output Lighting
Black Li
g
ht
g
ra
y
Black Li
g
ht
g
ra
y
Rated voltage
Output Lighting
Black
Light
gray
Black
Light
gray
SPDT LED 5 VDC A3PA-90A11-05E(1) A3PA-90A12-05E(1) A3PA-90B11-05E(1) A3PA-90B12-05E(1) R
O
S
12 VDC A3PA-90A11-12E(1) A3PA-90A12-12E(1) A3PA-90B11-12E(1) A3PA-90B12-12E(1) O
G
24 VDC A3PA-90A11-24E(1) A3PA-90A12-24E(1) A3PA-90B11-24E(1) A3PA-90B12-24E(1)
G
W
Chameleon 12 VDC A3PA-90AG1-12EK A3PA-90AG2-12EK A3PA-90BG1-12EK A3PA-90BG2-12EK (See note 1.)
C
24 VDC A3PA-90AG1-24EK A3PA-90AG2-24EK A3PA-90BG1-24EK A3PA-90BG2-24EK
(S )
Incandescent
l
6 VDC/VAC A3PA-90A11-06 A3PA-90A12-06 A3PA-90B11-06 A3PA-90B12-06 (See note 2.)
lamp 14 VDC/VAC A3PA-90A11-14 A3PA-90A12-14 A3PA-90B11-14 A3PA-90B12-14
(S )
28 VDC/VAC A3PA-90A11-28 A3PA-90A12-28 A3PA-90B11-28 A3PA-90B12-28
DPDT LED 5 VDC A3PA-90C11-05E(1) A3PA-90C12-05E(1) A3PA-90D11-05E(1) A3PA-90D12-05E(1) R
O
12 VDC A3PA-90C11-12E(1) A3PA-90C12-12E(1) A3PA-90D11-12E(1) A3PA-90D12-12E(1) O
G
24 VDC A3PA-90C11-24E(1) A3PA-90C12-24E(1) A3PA-90D11-24E(1) A3PA-90D12-24E(1)
G
W
Chameleon 12 VDC A3PA-90CG1-12EK A3PA-90CG2-12EK A3PA-90DG1-12EK A3PA-90DG2-12EK (See note 1.)
C
24 VDC A3PA-90CG1-24EK A3PA-90CG2-24EK A3PA-90DG1-24EK A3PA-90DG2-24EK
(S )
Incandescent
l
6 VDC/VAC A3PA-90C11-06 A3PA-90C12-06 A3PA-90D11-06 A3PA-90D12-06 (See note 2.)
lamp 14 VDC/VAC A3PA-90C11-14 A3PA-90C12-14 A3PA-90D11-14 A3PA-90D12-14
(S )
28 VDC/VAC A3PA-90C11-28 A3PA-90C12-28 A3PA-90D11-28 A3PA-90D12-28
Enter the desired color symbol for the Pushbutton in (*). (R) = Red, (O) = Orange, (G) = Green, (W) = White.
Example: Red A3PA-90A11-24E R
Microloads
Contact type Microload (125 VAC, 0.1 A; 30 VDC, 0.1 A) Pushbutton
color
Contact
type
Operation
Cl
Momentary operation (Self-resetting)
color
symbol
Case color
Rated voltage
Output Lighting
Black Li
g
ht
g
ra
y
Rated voltage
Output Lighting
Black
Light
gray
SPDT LED 5 VDC A3PA-90E11-05E(1) A3PA-90E12-05E(1) R
O
S
12 VDC A3PA-90E11-12E(1) A3PA-90E12-12E(1) O
G
24 VDC A3PA-90E11-24E(1) A3PA-90E12-24E(1)
G
W
Chameleon 12 VDC A3PA-90EG1-12EK --- (See note 1.)
C
24 VDC A3PA-90EG1-24EK A3PA-90EG2-24EK
(S )
Incandescent
l
6 VDC/VAC A3PA-90E11-06 A3PA-90E12-06 (See note 2.)
lamp 14 VDC/VAC A3PA-90E11-14 A3PA-90E12-14
(S )
28 VDC/VAC A3PA-90E11-28 A3PA-90E12-28
DPDT LED 5 VDC A3PA-90G11-05E(1) A3PA-90G12-05E(1) R
O
12 VDC A3PA-90G11-12E(1) A3PA-90G12-12E(1) O
G
24 VDC A3PA-90G11-24E(1) A3PA-90G12-24E(1)
G
W
Chameleon 12 VDC A3PA-90GG1-12EK --- (See note 1.)
C
24 VDC A3PA-90GG1-24EK ---
(S )
Incandescent
l
6 VDC/VAC A3PA-90G11-06 A3PA-90G12-06 (See note 2.)
lamp 14 VDC/VAC A3PA-90G11-14 A3PA-90G12-14
(S )
28 VDC/VAC A3PA-90G11-28 A3PA-90G12-28
Enter the desired color symbol for the Pushbutton in (1). (R) = Red, (O) = Orange, (G) = Green, (W) = White.
Example: Red A3PA-90E11-24E R
Note: 1. You can change the screen colors of chameleon models between red, green, and orange, by changing the terminal wiring. Refer to
page 240 for details.
2. Incandescent lamps are supplied with colored plates (white, red, green, blue, and orange) and legend plates (milk-white and trans-
parent). Use the appropriate combination.
(1)
A3P A3P
227
A3PA (Square) Horizontal 2-split Screen Models
Standard Loads
Contact type Standard load (250 VAC, 3 A; 30 VDC, 4 A) Push-
button
Operation
Momentary operation (Self-resetting) Alternate operation (Self-holding)
b
u
tton
color
s
y
mbol
Case color
Black Li
g
ht
g
ra
y
Black Li
g
ht
g
ra
y
symbol
Rated voltage
Output Lighting
Black
Light
gray
Black
Light
gray
SPDT LED 24 VDC A3PA-90A21-24E(1)(2) A3PA-90A22-24E(1)(2) A3PA-90B21-24E(1)(2) A3PA-90B22-24E(1)(2) R
O
G
W
Incandescent
l
6 VDC/VAC A3PA-90A21-06 A3PA-90A22-06 A3PA-90B21-06 A3PA-90B22-06 (See
t)
lamp 14 VDC/VAC A3PA-90A21-14 A3PA-90A22-14 A3PA-90B21-14 A3PA-90B22-14
(S
note.)
28 VDC/VAC A3PA-90A21-28 A3PA-90A22-28 A3PA-90B21-28 A3PA-90B22-28
DPDT LED 24 VDC A3PA-90C21-24E(1)(2) A3PA-90C22-24E(1)(2) A3PA-90D21-24E(1)(2) A3PA-90D22-24E(1)(2) R
O
G
W
Incandescent
l
6 VDC/VAC A3PA-90C21-06 A3PA-90C22-06 A3PA-90D21-06 A3PA-90D22-06 (See
t)
lamp 14 VDC/VAC A3PA-90C21-14 A3PA-90C22-14 A3PA-90D21-14 A3PA-90D22-14
(S
note.)
28 VDC/VAC A3PA-90C21-28 A3PA-90C22-28 A3PA-90D21-28 A3PA-90D22-28
Enter the desired color symbols for the Pushbutton in (1) and (2). (R) = Red, (O) = Orange, (G) = Green, (W) = White.
Example: Red Upper
White Lower A3PA-90A21-24E R W
Red White
Microloads
Contact type Microload (125 VAC, 0.1 A; 30 VDC, 0.1 A) Push-
button
Contact
type
Operation
Cl
Momentary operation (Self-resetting)
b
u
tton
color
s
y
mbol
Case color
Rated voltage
Output Lighting
Black Li
g
ht
g
ra
y
symbol
Rated voltage
Output Lighting
Black
Light
gray
SPDT LED 24 VDC A3PA-90E21-24E(1)(2) A3PA-90E22-24E(1)(2) R
O
G
W
Incandescent
l
6 VDC/VAC A3PA-90E21-06 A3PA-90E22-06 (See
t)
lamp 14 VDC/VAC A3PA-90E21-14 A3PA-90E22-14
(S
note.)
28 VDC/VAC A3PA-90E21-28 A3PA-90E22-28
DPDT LED 24 VDC A3PA-90G21-24E(1)(2) A3PA-90G22-24E(1)(2) R
O
G
W
Incandescent
l
6 VDC/VAC A3PA-90G21-06 A3PA-90G22-06 (See
t)
lamp 14 VDC/VAC A3PA-90G21-14 A3PA-90G22-14
(S
note.)
28 VDC/VAC A3PA-90G21-28 A3PA-90G22-28
Enter the desired color symbols for the Pushbutton in (1) and (2). (R) = Red, (O) = Orange, (G) = Green, (W) = White.
Example: Red Upper
White Lower
A3PA-90E21-24E R W
Red White
Note: Incandescent lamps are supplied with colored plates (white, red, green, blue, and orange) and legend plates (milk-white and transpar-
ent). Use the appropriate combination.
(1)
(2)
A3P A3P
228
A3PT (Round) Single Screen Models
Standard Loads
Contact type Standard load (250 VAC, 3 A; 30 VDC, 4 A) Pushbutton color
s
y
mbol
Cyp
Operation Momentary operation
(Self-resetting)
Alternate operation
(Self-holding)
symbol
Case color
Light gray
Light gray
Case
color
Rated voltage
Output Lighting
Light
gra
y
Light
gra
y
SPDT LED 24 VDC A3PT-90A12-24C(1) A3PT-90B12-24C(1) R
O
G
W
Incandescent lamp 6 VDC/VAC A3PT-90A12-06 A3PT-90B12-06 (See note.)
p
14 VDC/VAC A3PT-90A12-14 A3PT-90B12-14
(S )
28 VDC/VAC A3PT-90A12-28 A3PT-90B12-28
DPDT LED 24 VDC A3PT-90C12-24C(1) A3PT-90D12-24C(1) R
O
G
W
Incandescent lamp 6 VDC/VAC A3PT-90C12-06 A3PT-90D12-06 (See note.)
p
14 VDC/VAC A3PT-90C12-14 A3PT-90D12-14
(S )
28 VDC/VAC A3PT-90C12-28 A3PT-90D12-28
Enter the desired color symbols for the Pushbutton in (1) and (2). (R) = Red, (O) = Orange, (G) = Green, (W) = White.
Example: A3PT-90A12-24C R
Red
Microloads
Contact type Microload (125 VAC, 0.1 A; 30 VDC, 0.1 A) Pushbutton color
symbol
Operation Momentary operation (Self-resetting)
symbol
Case color Light gray
Case
color
Rated voltage
Output Lighting
Light
gray
SPDT LED 24 VDC A3PT-90E12-24C(1) R
O
G
W
Incandescent lamp 28 VDC/VAC A3PT-90E12-28 (See note.)
DPDT LED 24 VDC A3PT-90G12-24C(1) R
O
G
W
Incandescent lamp 28 VDC/VAC A3PT-90G12-28 (See note.)
Enter the desired color symbols for the Pushbutton in (1). (R) = Red, (O) = Orange, (G) = Green, (W) = White.
Example: A3PT-90E12-24C R
Red
Note: Incandescent lamps are supplied with a colored plates (white, red, green, blue, and orange). Use the appropriate combination. Models
A3PT (round models), however, are not supplied with legend plates.
(1)
A3P A3P
229
Illumination-only and Colored-illumination LED Models
“Illumination only” describes LED models for which the screen color is the same whether the LED is lit or not. The screen simply becomes
brighter when the LED lights.
Example: Red LED
Lit
Not lit
Red
Red
Cap (transparent)
Legend plate (transparent)
Colored plate (red)
Lamp holder
LED lamp (red)
Pushbutton
Lamp
“Colored il lumination” describes LED models for which the screen color is white when the LED is not lit and changes to the color of the LED
lamp when the LED is lit.
Example: Red LED
Lit
Not lit
White
Red
Cap (transparent)
Legend plate (transparent)
Colored plate (white)
Lamp holder
LED lamp (red)
Pushbutton
Lamp
Ordering: With colored-illumination models, order the Pushbutton, Lamp, and Switch as shown in the following table.
Pushbutton Lamp Switch
Select the LED lamp-lighted model required
from the selection on page 231. Each
assembly includes the number of white
colored plates required to enable colored
illumination for the corresponding
screen-split configuration. For example,
4-split screen models include 4 white
colored plates.
Select the LED lamps to suit your desired
coloration from the selection on page 232.
Number of necessary LED lamps
(standard)
A3PJ (rectangular): 4
A3PA (square): 2
A3PT (round): 2
Select from the Switches on page 233.
A3P A3P
230
Ordering Individually
Pushbuttons, Lamps, and Switches can be ordered separately. Combinations that are not available as sets can be created using individual
Units. Also, store the parts as spares for maintenance and repairs.
LED-lighted/Chameleon Models
(LED is built into the Pushbutton.) LED Lamp-lighted Models
(LED lamp and Pushbutton are
separate.)
Incandescent Lamp-lighted Models
(Incandescent lamp and Pushbutton
are separate.)
Pushbutton
Round (A3PT) models not
available.
A3Pj-5jjj-jjE
(for Pushbutton Switch)
Pushbutton
A3Pj-502j
(for Pushbutton Switch)
Pushbutton
A3Pj-501j
(for Pushbutton Switch)
Lamp (LED Lamp)
(See note 2.)
Lamp (Incandescent Lamp)
(See note 3.)
SLL-jjEjStandard lamp: SLL-jj
Low-power lamp: SLL-jjH
Switch (See note 1.)
Round (A3PT) models not
available.
A3Pj-7jjj-j
(for Pushbutton Switch)
Switch (See note 1.) Switch (See note 1.)
A3Pj-7jjj-j
(for Pushbutton Switch)
A3Pj-7jjj-j
(for Pushbutton Switch)
Note: 1. The Switch is compatible with LED-lighted models, LED lamp-lighted models, and incandescent lamp-lighted models.
2. Number of necessary LED lamps.
Screen pattern A3PJ A3PA A3PT
Single screen 42 2
Horizontal 2-split screen 2 2
Vertical 2-split screen --- ---
Vertical 3-split screen
Horizontal 3-split screen --- ---
4-split screen --- ---
3. Number of necessary incandescent lamps.
Screen pattern A3PJ A3PA A3PT
Single screen 2 1 2
Horizontal 2-split screen 4
(l
2 2
Vertical 2-split screen (low-power
incandescent
--- ---
Vertical 3-split screen
Horizontal 3-split screen
i
ncan
d
escen
t
lamp) --- ---
4-split screen --- ---
A3P A3P
231
Pushbutton
LED-lighted Models (LED is built-in.)
Model Split-screen color
(color symbol)
White (W) Red (R) Green (G) Orange (O) Selection
precautions
Rt l
Single
screen A3PJ-5701-jjE A3PJ-5702-jjE A3PJ-5703-jjE A3PJ-5706-jjEEnter the voltage to be
used in the jj at the
dfth dl
Rectangular
models Horizontal
2-split White A3PJ-5711-jjE A3PJ-5712-jjE A3PJ-5713-jjE A3PJ-5716-jjE
used
in
the
jj
at
the
end of the model
number.
2 split
screen Red A3PJ-5721-jjE A3PJ-5722-jjE A3PJ-5723-jjE A3PJ-5726-jjEExamples of voltages
used:
5V= 05E
Green A3PJ-5731-jjE A3PJ-5732-jjE A3PJ-5733-jjE A3PJ-5736-jjE
5
V
=
0
5
E
12 V = 1 2 E
24 V = 2 4 E
Orange A3PJ-5741-jjE A3PJ-5742-jjE A3PJ-5743-jjE A3PJ-5746-jjE
24
V
=
2
4
E
For the color of the
shaded part, select the
Single
screen A3PA-5701-jjE A3PA-5702-jjE A3PA-5703-jjE A3PA-5706-jjE
shaded
part
,
select
the
model according to the
colors given at the top
of the table.
Square
models
Horizontal
2-split
screen
White A3PA-5711-jjE A3PA-5712-jjE A3PA-5713-jjE A3PA-5716-jjE
models
screen
Red A3PA-5721-jjE A3PA-5722-jjE A3PA-5723-jjE A3PA-5726-jjE
Green A3PA-5731-jjE A3PA-5732-jjE A3PA-5733-jjE A3PA-5736-jjE
Orange A3PA-5741-jjE A3PA-5742-jjE A3PA-5743-jjE A3PA-5746-jjE
Note: 1. A cap, legend plate (transparent), colored plate, white plunger case, and LED (with a current-limiting resistor) are built into the stan-
dard lighting unit.
2. Split-screen coloring configurations are given with the mark on the Switch facing down.
3. The LED is built-in and cannot be replaced individually.
LED Lamp-lighted Models (LED is not built-in.)
Model Rectangular models Square models Round models
Screen
pattern Screen Model Screen Model Screen Model
Single screen A3PJ-5021 A3PA-5021 A3PT-5021
Horizontal
2-split screen A3PJ-5022 A3PA-5022 ---
Vertical 2-split
screen A3PJ-5023 --- ---
Horizontal
3-split screen A3PJ-5024 --- ---
Vertical 3-split
screen A3PJ-5025 --- ---
4-split screen A3PJ-5026 --- ---
Note: 1. Colored plates (white, red, green, and orange), a legend plate (transparent), and a light baffle (split-screen models only) are
included. Use the appropriate combination for the LED coloring required.
2. The number of white colored plates required to enable colored illumination for the corresponding screen-split configuration is
included. (For example, 4-split screen models include 4 white colored plates). The number of colored plates included for each
model are shown in the following table.
Screen pattern White Red Green Orange
Single screen 1 1 1 1
Horizontal 2-split screens
Vertical 2-split screens 2 1 1 1
Horizontal 3-split screens
Vertical 3-split screens 3 2 2 2
4-split screen 4 1 1 1
A3P A3P
232
Incandescent Lamp-lighted Models (Incandescent lamp is not built-in.)
Model Rectangular models Square models Round models
Screen pattern Screen Model Screen Model Screen Model
Single screen A3PJ-5011 A3PA-5011 A3PT-5011
Horizontal 2-split
screen A3PJ-5012 A3PA-5012 ---
Vertical 2-split
screen A3PJ-5013 --- ---
Horizontal 3-split
screen A3PJ-5014 --- ---
Vertical 3-split
screen A3PJ-5015 --- ---
4-split screen A3PJ-5016 --- ---
Note: 1. Colored plates (white, red, green, orange, and blue), a legend plate (transparent), and a light baffle (split-screen models only) are
supplied.
2. A3PT (round) models do not contain a legend plate.
3. The number of colored plates included is shown in the following table.
Screen pattern White Red Green Orange Blue
Single screen 1 1 1 1 1
Horizontal and
vertical 2-split
screens
1 1 1 1 1
Horizontal and
vertical 3-split
screens
2 2 2 2 2
4-split screen 2 2 2 2 2
Chameleon Models (with Built-in LED)
Shape Rated voltage Chameleon
pushbutton
switch
Rectangular 12 VDC A3PJ-5800-12E
24 VDC A3PJ-5800-24E
Square 12 VDC A3PA-5800-12E
24 VDC A3PA-5800-24E
Note: 1. With chameleon models the whole screen lights red, green, or orange (i.e., red and green simultaneously).
2. A cap, legend plate (transparent), white colored plate, and LED (with a current-limiting resistor) are built into the Pushbutton.
Lamp (For details on mounting, refer to page 246.)
LED Lamp
Voltage 5 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC Applicable cap (color)
( l d lt)
Selection
ti
Color Model (DC only) Model (DC only) Model (DC only)
pp p ( )
(colored plate) precautions
Red SLL-05ER SLL-12ER SLL-24ER Red In the standard
setu
p
, 4 LED
Yellow SLL-05EY SLL-12EY SLL-24EY Orange
setup
,
4
LED
lamps are used
with A3PJ models
Green SLL-05EG SLL-12EG SLL-24EG Green
with
A3PJ
models
and 2 LED lamps
are used with
A3PA d A3PT
White SLL-05EW SLL-12EW SLL-24EW White A3PA and A3PT
models.
A3P A3P
233
Incandescent Lamp
Lamp type Standard lamp Low-voltage lamp Selection precautions
Voltage
p
gp
p
5 VAC/VDC SLL-06 SLL-06H In the standard setup for A3PJ models, 2 lamps are
used with single screen models, and 4 lamps are
used with split-screen models. If 3 or 4 lamps are lit
ti l l l
12 VAC/VDC SLL-14 SLL-14H
pp
continuously, use low-power lamps.
In the standard setup for A3PA models, 1 lamp is
used with single screen models, and 2 lamps are
d ith lit d l
24 VAC/VDC SLL-28 SLL-28H
g,p
used with split-screen models.
In the standard setup for A3PT models, 2 lamps are
used.
Switch (common to both incandescent lamp-lighted models and LED models)
Contact
type Switch Number of
outputs Operation Rectangular models Square models Round models Selection
precautions
Standard
load Silver
alloy
contact
1Momentary
operation A3PJ-7010-1 A3PA-7010-1 A3PT-7010-2 The end digit
denotes the color of
the flange: -1
contact Alternate
operation A3PJ-7020-1 A3PA-7020-1 A3PT-7020-2 the flange: -1
denotes a black
flange, and -2
d t li ht
2Momentary
operation A3PJ-7030-1 A3PA-7030-1 A3PT-7030-2
g,
denotes a light gray
flange. Round
switches are
Alternate
operation A3PJ-7040-1 A3PA-7040-1 A3PT-7040-2
switches
are
available only in
light gray, and not in
black
3Momentary
operation A3PJ-7150-1 --- ---
bl
ac
k
.
Use the Switch in
combination with the
Alternate
operation A3PJ-7160-1 --- ---
combination
with
the
same shape Lamp
(rectangular,
square or round)
Microload Gold
alloy
contact
1Momentary
operation A3PJ-7050-1 A3PA-7050-1 A3PT-7050-2 square, or roun
d)
.
Example: For
rectangular Lamp
A3PJ 5011 l t
contact Alternate
operation A3PJ-7060-1 A3PA-7060-1 A3PT-7060-2
gp
A3PJ-5011, select
Switch
A3PJ-7jj0-j. On
2Momentary
operation A3PJ-7070-1 A3PA-7070-1 A3PT-7070-2
A3PJ 7jj0j
.
On
the Switch itself,
however, only 3
digits are shown as
Alternate
operation A3PJ-7080-1 A3PA-7080-1 A3PT-7080-2
digits
are
shown
,
as
follows: A3PJ-7jj.
Momentar
y
3Momentary
operation A3PJ-7170-1 --- ---
Momentary
operation is
self-resetting, and
alternate operation
Alternate
operation A3PJ-7180-1 --- --- a
lt
erna
t
e opera
ti
on
is self-holding (i.e.,
push-on, push-off).
A3P A3P
234
Accessories
Name Appearance Classification Rectangular Square Application precautions
Socket Wire-wrap terminal A3PJ-4101 A3PA-4101 Multiple sockets cannot be
mounted.
PCB terminal A3PJ-4102 A3PA-4102
.
Solder terminal A3PJ-4103 A3PA-4103
Barrier Short edge
barrier
(Horizontal
Black A3PJ-4001 A3PA-4001 The purpose of the barrier is to
prevent malfunctioning and to
(Horizontal
mounting)
(1 pair) Light gray A3PJ-4002 A3PA-4002 improve design image of the
mounting panel.
Long edge
barrier
(
Vertical
Black A3PJ-4004 ---
.
Edge barriers x 1 pair (2 Units).
(Vertical
mounting)
(1 pair) Light gray A3PJ-4005
.
Mount long barriers vertically.
For details on mountin
refer to
Short
intermediate
barrier
Black A3PJ-4007 A3PA-4007
,
page 246.
barrier
(Horizontal
mounting) Light gray A3PJ-4008 A3PA-4008
Long
intermediate
barrier
Black A3PJ-4010 ---
barrier
(Vertical
mounting) Light gray A3PJ-4011
Switch guard For horizontal mounting (with
OMRON logo facing down) A3PJN-5050 A3PAN-5050 Can be used by exchanging with
the cap.
Cannot be used with seal cover.
Can be used with barrier.
For vertical mounting (with
OMRON logo facing to the
right)
A3PJN-5055 A3PAN-5055
.
Use horizontal mounting guard for
consecutive horizontal mounting,
and use vertical mounting guard
for consecutive vertical mounting.
Seal cover --- A3PJ-5060 A3PA-5060 Cannot be used with barrier and/or
switch guard.
For details on mounting, refer to
page 246.
Cap is manufactured from vinyl
chloride.
Character
lt
1 sheet (for
20
Printed A3PJ-5205 A3PA-5205 Words printed are ON, OFF,
plate
(character
film)
(
20
Switches) Non-printed
(transparent
film)
A3PJ-5207 A3PA-5207
START, ST OP, RESET, OK, OUT,
POWER, COOL, and MOTOR.
Other characters can be printed by
1 sheet (for
1 S it h)
Printed A3PJ-5206 A3PA-5206 reques
.
(
1 Switch) Non-printed
(transparent
film)
A3PJ-5208 A3PA-5208
Long
mounting
plate
--- A3PJ-3002 --- Use when vertically mounting
individual (with barrier) or multiple
Switches (in standard mounting
style and with barrier). Since a
short mounting plate is attached to
the Switch, replace it with the long
one.
A3P A3P
235
Parts
Name Appearance Screen pattern and color Rectangular Square Application precautions
Colored plate
f
Single screen White A3PJ-5101 A3PA-5101 Keep mounted at all times. If
th l d l t b
p
for
incandescent
g
Red A3PJ-5102 A3PA-5102
p
the colored plate becomes
discolored contact OMRON
i
ncan
d
escen
t
lamp Green A3PJ-5103 A3PA-5103
di
sco
l
ore
d
, con
t
ac
t
OMRON
.
For details on mounting
lamp
Blue A3PJ-5104 A3PA-5104
F
or
d
eta
il
s on mount
i
ng,
refer to
p
a
g
e 246.
Yellow A3PJ-5105 A3PA-5105
refer
to
page
246
.
Orange A3PJ-5106 A3PA-5106
Horizontal
2 lit
White A3PJ-5121 A3PA-5121
2-split screen Red A3PJ-5122 A3PA-5122
Green A3PJ-5123 A3PA-5123
Blue A3PJ-5124 A3PA-5124
Yellow A3PJ-5125 A3PA-5125
Orange A3PJ-5126 A3PA-5126
Vertical
2 lit
White A3PJ-5131 ---
2-split screen Red A3PJ-5132 ---
Green A3PJ-5133 ---
Blue A3PJ-5134 ---
Yellow A3PJ-5135 ---
Orange A3PJ-5136 ---
4-split screen White A3PJ-5161 ---
p
Red A3PJ-5162 ---
Green A3PJ-5163 ---
Blue A3PJ-5164 ---
Yellow A3PJ-5165 ---
Orange A3PJ-5166 ---
Colored plate
f LED
Single screen White A3PJ-5301 A3PA-5301 Keep mounted at all times. If
th l d l t i l t
p
for LED
g
Red A3PJ-5302 A3PA-5302
p
the colored plate is lost or
damaged contact OMRON
Green A3PJ-5303 A3PA-5303
d
amage
d
, con
t
ac
t
OMRON
.
Use in accordance with
Yellow A3PJ-5305 A3PA-5305
U
se
i
n accor
d
ance w
i
t
h
colorin
g
of the built-in LED.
Orange A3PJ-5306 A3PA-5306
coloring
of
the
built-in
LED
.
For details on mountin
g,
Horizontal
2 lit
White A3PJ-5321 A3PA-5321
For
details
on
mounting
,
refer to page 246.
2-split screen Red A3PJ-5322 A3PA-5322
pg
Green A3PJ-5323 A3PA-5323
Yellow A3PJ-5325 A3PA-5325
Orange A3PJ-5326 A3PA-5326
Vertical
2 lit
White A3PJ-5331 ---
2-split screen Red A3PJ-5332 ---
Green A3PJ-5333 ---
Yellow A3PJ-5335 ---
Orange A3PJ-5336 ---
4-split screen White A3PJ-5361 ---
p
Red A3PJ-5362 ---
Green A3PJ-5363 ---
Yellow A3PJ-5365 ---
Orange A3PJ-5366 ---
Light baffle Horizontal 2-split screen A3PJ-4302 A3PA-4302 Keep mounted at all times. If
th li ht b ffl i l t t t
g
Vertical 2-split screen A3PJ-4303 ---
p
the light baffle is lost, contact
OMRON
Horizontal
3 lit
Long axis A3PJ-4304 ---
OMRON
.
Used in LED lamp-lighted
3-split screen Short axis A3PJ-4305 ---
U
se
d
i
n
LED
l
amp-
li
g
h
te
d
models. Cannot be used in
Vertical
3 lit
Long axis A3PJ-4306 ---
models
.
Cannot
be
used
in
LED-lighted models.
3-split screen Short axis A3PJ-4307 ---
g
4-split screen Long axis A3PJ-4304 ---
p
Short axis A3PJ-4308
A3P A3P
236
Name Application precautionsSquareRectangularScreen pattern and colorAppearance
Legend plate Transparent legend plate A3PJ-5202 A3PA-5202 A transparent legend plate is
td th P hbtt
gp
Milk-white legend plate A3PJ-5201 A3PA-5201
pgp
mounted on the Pushbutton.
Cap Transparent cap A3PJ-5600 A3PA-5600 ---
p
Crimp-processed transparent
cap A3PJ-5600-A A3PA-5600-A The surface is
crimp-processed, so there is
no reflection.
Smokey-blue transparent cap A3PJ-5600-SB A3PA-5600-SB You can easily tell if the
button is lit, even in bright
locations.
Tools
Name Appearance Classification Model Application precautions
Extractor --- A3PJ-5080 Use to extract components when replacing
the Pushbutton.
A3P A3P
237
Specifications
Ratings
Contact Ratings
Silver Alloy Contacts (for Standard Loads)
Rated
lt (V)
Non-inductive load (A) Inductive load (A)
voltage (V) Resistive load Lamp load Inductive load Motor load
NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO
125 VAC
250 VAC 5
30.7
0.5 3
21.3
0.8
8 VDC
14 VDC
30 VDC
125 VDC
250 VDC
5
5
4
0.4
0.2
2
2
2
0.05
0.03
4
4
3
0.4
0.2
3
3
3
0.05
0.03
Note: 1. The above values are for steady-state currents.
2. Inductive load: Power factor = 0.4; time constant = 7 ms.
3. The lamp load has an inrush current of 10 times the steady-state current.
4. The motor load has an inrush current of 6 times the steady-state current.
The above ratings conform to JIS C4505, for testing under the following conditions.
(1) Ambient temperature: 20 $2_C.
(2) Ambient humidity: 65 $5%
(3) Operating frequency: 20 times/min.
Gold Alloy Contacts (for Microloads)
Rated voltage (V) 0.1 A at 30 VDC (resistive load);
0.1 A at 125 VAC (resistive load)
Minimum applicable load 1 mA at 5 VDC
LED and Incandescent Lamp Ratings
LED for LED-lighted Models
Model A3PJ/M2PJ A3PA/M2PA
Rated current
Applicable
voltage Rated voltage Single screen 2-split screen 3-split screen 4-split screen Single screen 2-split screen
5 VDC $5% 5 VDC 80 mA 40 mA x 2 20 mA x 2 20 mA x 4 80 mA 40 mA x 2
12 VDC $5% 12 VDC 40 mA 20 mA x 2 15 mA x 2 15 mA x 4 40 mA 20 mA x 2
24 VDC $5% 24 VDC 20 mA 15 mA x 2 15 mA x 2 15 mA x 2 20 mA 13 mA x 2
LED for Chameleon Models
Applied voltage Rated voltage Rated current
pp g
g
Green Red
12 VDC $5% 12 VDC 26 mA 20 mA
24 VDC $5% 24 VDC 13 mA 10 mA
Incandescent Lamp
Item Standard lamp Low-power lamp
Applied voltage Rated voltage Rated current Model Rated current Model
5 VDC 6 V 200 mA SLL-06 100 mA SLL-06H
12 VDC 14 V 80 mA SLL-14 40 mA SLL-14H
24 VDC 28 V 40 mA SLL-28 25 mA SLL-28H
LED Lamp (for LED Lamp-lighted Models)
Applied voltage Rated voltage Rated current Model
5 VDC $5% 5 VDC 30 mA SLL-05Ej
12 VDC $5% 12 VDC 15 mA SLL-12Ej
24 VDC $5% 24 VDC 12.5 mA SLL-24Ej
Note: Only DC LED lamps are available.
A3P A3P
238
Characteristics
Operating frequency Mechanical: 120 operations/minute max. (See note 1.)
Electrical: 30 operations/minute max.
Insulation resistance 100 M min. (at 500 VDC)
Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between terminals of same polarity (See note 2.)
2,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between terminals of different polarity, between current-carrying
metal part and ground, and between each terminal and non-current-carrying metal part.
1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between lamp terminals (See note 3.)
Vibration resistance Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude
Shock resistance Destruction: 500 m/s2
Malfunction: 200 m/s2
Life expectancy Mechanical:
Momentary operation models: 1,000,000 operations min.
Alternate operation models: 200,000 operations min.
(One operation consists of set and reset operations.)
Electrical: 100,000 operations min.
Weight Approx. 30 g
Inrush current NC: Silver alloy contact: 10 A max.
NO: Silver alloy contact: 10 A max.
Ambient operating temperature LED-lighted models: –10_C to 40_C (with no icing or condensation)
Incandescent lamp-lighted models: –10_C to 50_C (with no icing or condensation)
Ambient operating humidity 35% to 85%
Ambient storage temperature –25_C to 65_C
Degree of protection IP40
Electric shock protection class Class II
PTI (proof tracking index) 175
Pollution degree 3 (IEC947-5-1)
Note: 1. With alternate operation models, 60 operations/minute max. One operation cycle consists of set and reset operations.
2. 600 VAC for microloads.
3. With no incandescent lamp or LED lamp mounted.
Approved Standard Ratings
UL508 General Use: 5A at 125 V
CSA C22 No. 14 General Use: 5 A at 125 VAC, 3 A at 250 VAC
Operating Characteristics
Operating
htiti
A3PJ series A3PA series A3PT series
pg
characteristics Momentary
operation
models
Alternate
operation
models
Momentary
operation
models
Alternate
operation
models
Momentary
operation
models
Alternate
operation
models
OF max. 5.88 N 6.86 N 5.88 N 6.86 N 3.92 N 4.90 N
RF min. 0.39 N 0.29 N 0.39 N 0.29 N 0.39 N 0.29 N
TT Approx. 3.5 mm Approx. 3.5 mm Approx. 3.5 mm Approx. 3.5 mm Approx. 3.5 mm Approx. 3.5 mm
PT max. 3 mm 3 mm 3 mm 3 mm 3 mm 3 mm
LTA min. --- 0.5 mm --- 0.5 mm --- 0.5 mm
A3P A3P
239
Operation
Terminal connections
LED-lighted Models
(The terminal arrangement diagram shows a 1-switch output. Connections to terminals from the lighting block are the same for 2 outputs.)
Rated voltage 5 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC
Model Screen
pattern
A3PJ Single screen Bottom view Top view
Terminal
arrangement Lighting block
+
Bottom view Top view
Terminal
arrangement Lighting block
+
Bottom view Top view
Terminal
arrangement Lighting block
+
2-split screen Bottom view Top view
Terminal
arrangement Lighting block
+
Bottom view Top view
Terminal
arrangement Lighting block
+
A3PA Single screen Bottom view Top view
Terminal
arrangement Lighting block
+
Bottom view Top view
Terminal
arrangement Lighting block
+
Bottom view Top view
Terminal
arrangement Lighting block
+
2-split screen Bottom view Top view
Terminal
arrangement Lighting block
+
Bottom view Top view
Terminal
arrangement Lighting block
+
Incandescent Lamp-lighted/LED Lamp-lighted Models
(All are shown with the OMRON logo facing down. The terminal arrangements are the same as for the LED-lighted models.)
Model Rectangular A3PJ models Square A3PA models Round A3PT models
Silver/gold alloy
contacts
(1 output)
Bottom view Top view
Terminal
arrangement Lighting block
Bottom view Top view
Terminal
arrangement Lighting block
Bottom view Top view
Terminal
arrangement Lighting block
Silver/gold alloy
contacts
(2 outputs)
Bottom view Top view
Terminal
arrangement Lighting block
Bottom view Top view
Terminal
arrangement Lighting block
Bottom view Top view
Terminal
arrangement Lighting block
Silver/gold alloy
contacts
(3 outputs)
Bottom view Top view
Terminal
arrangement Lighting block
--- ---
A3P A3P
240
LED Chameleon Models
(The terminal arrangement diagram shows a 1-switch output. Connections to terminals from the lighting block are the same for 2 outputs.)
Rated voltage 24 VDC
Rectangular A3PJ
model
+
Square A3PA
model
Terminal Arrangement and Coloring
Chameleon Models
Wiring LC+ LC+ LC+
g
L1– L2– L1– and L2–
shorted
Coloring Green Red Orange
Panel Cutout
(If using a Switch Guard or Seal Cover, refer to the panel cutout diagrams on page 244.)
A3PJ (Rectangular) Models
Classification Mounting design Panel cutout Remarks
Flange
mount
models
Individual
mounting
(Horizontal)
25±0.1
32±0.1 23.5±0.3
30.5±0.3 Panel cutout spacing between rows
of Units:
3 min.
Multiple
mounting
(Horizontal)
12 n
25±0.1
32n±0.5 23.5±0.3
32n–1.5±0.3 6 min.
Individual
mounting
(Vertical)
Mount to long mounting plate
(A3PJ-3002) before use.
32±0.1
25±0.1
30.5±0.3
23.5±0.3
Multiple
mounting
(Vertical)
Mount to long
mounting plate
(A3PJ-3002)
before use.
12 n
32±0.1
25n±0.5
30.5±0.3
25n–1.5±0.3
Barrier
mount
models
Individual
mounting
(Horizontal)
27
39 23.5±0.3
36.4±0.3 For barrier mount models, refer to
Accessories on page 234.
Panel cutout spacing between rows
of Units:
Multiple
mounting
(Horizontal) 12 n
27
33n+6±1
23.5±0.3
32.9n+3.5±0.3 o
f
U
n
it
s:
(Dotted line indicates the position
of each mounting barrier.)
Individual
mounting
(Vertical)
Mount to long
mounting plate
(A3PJ-3002)
before use.
34
32±0.1
30.5±0.3
29.4±0.3
6 min.
6 min.
Multiple
mounting
(Vertical)
Mount to long
mounting plate
(A3PJ-3002)
before use.
12 n
34
26n+6±1
30.5±0.3
25.9n+3.5±0.3
Note: 1. n: Number of Units
2. Recommended panel thickness: 1 to 5 mm
3. Mount the panel before mounting the Switch Guard.
4. If the panel is to be finished (e.g., coated), make sure that the panel meets the specified dimensions after the coating.
A3P A3P
241
A3PA (Square) Models
Classification Mounting design Panel cutout Remarks
Flange mount
models Individual
mounting 25±0.1
25±0.1
23.5±0.3
22.5±0.3
Panel cutout spacing between rows
of Units: 3 min.
Multiple mounting 12 n
25±0.1
25n±0.1
23.5±0.3
25n–2.5±0.3
6 min.
Barrier mount
models Individual
mounting 27
32
23.5±0.3
27.8±0.3
Panel cutout spacing between rows
of Units:
(Dotted line indicates the position of
each mounting barrier.)
Multiple mounting 12 n
27
26n+6.5±126n+2.5±0.3
23.5±0.3 6 min.
6 min.
Note: 1. n: Number of Units
2. Recommended panel thickness: 1 to 5 mm
3. Mount the panel before mounting the Switch Guard.
4. If the panel is to be finished (e.g., coated), make sure that the panel meets the specified dimensions after the coating.
A3PT (Round) Models
4 min.
6.4 dia.
R11.8 +0.2
–0
29±0.3 dia.
A3P A3P
242
Dimensions
Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
A3PJ (Rectangular) Models A3PA (Square) Models
A3PT (Round) Models
OMRON logo #110 quick connect terminal/
solder terminal
Separator
52 max.
OMRON logo #110 quick connect ter-
minal/solder terminal
Separator
52 max.
OMRON logo
#110 quick connect terminal/solder terminal
52 max.
25±0.1
32±0.1
29.9±0.2
22.9±0.2 22.9±0.2
25±0.1
25±0.1
19.1 19.1
43.6
32 dia.
24.9 dia. 23.8
22.4 28.5 dia.
6.4
Accessory Mounting Dimensions
DLegend Plate
Rectangular Models
A3PJ-5201/-5202
Square Models
A3PA-5201/-5202
Plate surface
Extractor
A3PJ-5080
Note: Made from stainless steel.
25±2
A3P A3P
243
DSocket-mounting Dimensions
Rectangular Models
A3PJ (M2PJ)
Square Models
A3PA (M2PA)
Wire-wrap Terminal
A3PJ-4101
1 x 1 Wire-wrap Terminal
PCB Terminal
A3PJ-4102
Solder Terminal
A3PJ-4103
PCB Cutout (bottom view)
Eleven, 1.5-dia. holes
Terminal Hole
Dimensions
Wire-wrap Terminal
A3PA-4101
PCB Terminal
A3PA-4102
Solder Terminal
A3PA-4103
PCB Cutout (bottom view)
Nine, 1.5-dia. holes
18.5±0.8
1 x 1 Wire-wrap Terminal
Terminal Hole
Dimensions
18.5±0.8
Note: PCB cutout dimensions show the switch mounted to the socket with the OMRON logo facing down.
A3P A3P
244
DSwitch and Guard Mounting Dimensions
Rectangular Models
A3PJN-5050 (Horizontal Mounting)
A3PJN-5055 (Vertical Mounting)
52 max.
Spring
Switch Guard (A3PJ-5050) OMRON logo
n = Number of mountings
Note: Multiple vertical mounting is not possible.
Individual Mounting
(Horizontal)
Multiple Mounting
(Horizontal)
Note: Multiple vertical mounting is not possible.
Square Models
A3PAN-5050 (Horizontal Mounting)
A3PAN-5055 (Vertical Mounting)
52 max.
Spring
OMRON logo
n = Number of mountings
Individual Mounting
(Horizontal) Multiple Mounting
(Horizontal)
25±0.1
26.2±0.2
32±0.1
30.5±0.3
23.5±0.3 23.5±0.3
32n–1.5±0.3
Card
Switch Guard (A3PJ-5050)
22.5±0.3
23.5±0.3 23.5±0.3
25n–2.5±0.3
25±0.1
25±0.1
Panel Cutouts
Panel Cutouts
9.6 9.6
DSeal Cover Mounting Dimensions
Rectangular Models
A3PJ-5060
Square Models
A3PA-5060
Cover A (transparent) Cover B (black)
OMRON logo
Seal Cover (A3PJ-5060)
51.3 max.
Individual Mounting
(Horizontal)
Multiple Mounting
(Horizontal)
9.5 min.
Cover A (transparent) Cover B (black)
OMRON logo
Seal cover (A3PA-5060)
51.3 max.
Individual Mounting Multiple Mounting
10.5 min.
30.5±0.3
23.5±0.3
23.5±0.3
9.5 min.
30.5±0.3
23.5±0.3
9.5 min.
23.5±0.3
22.5±0.3
22.5±0.3
Panel Cutouts Panel Cutouts
Note: 1. Recommended panel thickness: 1 to 5 mm
2. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of $0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.
A3P A3P
245
Precautions
Caution
Do not apply a voltage higher than the maximum rated operat-
ing voltage between the lamp terminals, as there is a risk that
the incandescent lamp or LED will be damaged, and the Push-
button will be ejected.
When replacing the incandescent lamp, first turn OFF the
power supply, and then wait 10 minutes before performing re-
placement, as the lamp is still hot immediately after the power
is turned OFF, so there is a risk of burns.
Refer to the Common Precautions for Pushbutton Switches on
page 14.
Correct Use
Mounting
Always make sure that the power is turned OFF before mounting,
removing, or wiring the Switch, or performing maintenance.
After wiring the Switch, make sure that there is a suitable isolation
distance.
Wiring
Perform soldering promptly and correctly at 60 W maximum and
within 3 seconds. (Dip soldering temperature 280_C max.) W ait for
one minute after soldering before exerting any external force on the
solder.
Operating Environment
Do not use in locations that are subject to dust, oil, or metal filings as
these may penetrate the interior of the Switch and cause malfunc-
tion.
LED (for VDC)
Check the terminal polarity when wiring.
The rated voltage is shown on the plate on the back of the lighting
unit, so be sure to use within the voltage shown.
An LED current-limiting resistor is built in, so there is no need to
mount an external resistor.
Incandescent Lamp
Apply 80% of the rated voltage (operating voltage) to the incandes-
cent lamp to improve life expectancy and incandescence.
Character Plate (Character Film)
If preparing the character plate separately, use a heat-resistant film
with a thickness of 0.1 to 0.3 mm.
23±0.1 dia.
24.8 dia.
+0.
–0.3
Using Microloads
Using a standard load switch when a microload circuit is opened or
closed may cause wear on the contacts. Use the switch within the
operating range. (Refer to the diagram below.) Even when using mi-
croload models within the operating range shown below, if inrush
current occurs when the contact is opened or closed, it may cause
the contact surface to become rough, and so decrease life expec-
tancy. Therefore, insert a contact protection circuit where neces-
sary. The minimum applicable load is the N-level reference value.
This value indicates the malfunction reference level for the reliability
level o f 60% (λ 60) (conforming to JIS C5003). The equation, λ 60 =
0.5 x 10–4/time indicates that the estimated malfunction rate is less
than 1/2,000,000 with a reliability level of 60%.
Standard
load area
Microload
area
Invalid
area
Voltage (V)
Current (mA)
Others
If the panel is to be finished (e.g., coated), make sure that the panel
meets the specified dimensions after the coating.
!
A3P A3P
246
Assembly/Disassembly
A3PJ/M2PJ (Rectangular Models)
A3PA/M2PA (Square Models)
1. Locking/Unlocking Positive Cap Lock Mechanism
Unlock Lock
Positive cap stopper
2. Mounting Pushbutton
Be sure to mount the Pushbutton with the correct orienta-
tion. Align the groove on the Pushbutton, the projections
in the Switch, and the LED contact piece before pushing
the Pushbutton into the Switch.
When dismounting the Pushbutton, use the Extractor
(A3PJ-5080) for easy dismounting.
OMRON logo
LED contact piece
Groove
Diagram shows A3PA model.
3. Removing/Mounting Cap
Insert the A3PA from the open side into the theft-preven-
tion stopper.
4. Mounting Colored Plate
Place the colored plate on the plunger case with the dull
side of the colored plate facing downward. With A3PJ
split-screen models, be sure that the projections on the
upper surface of the colored plate face outward. For the
A3PA, make sure that the flat plate is facing upwards.
Projection Flat plate
A3PJ
A3PA
5. Mounting Character Plate (Character Frame) and Legend
Plate
Mount the legend plate for the A3PJ under the layered
surfaces and mount the cap, as shown below.
Legend plate
(Character plate)
Colored plate
(Light baffle)
Transparent cap
6. Mounting and Replacing LED and Incandescent Lamps
If using an A3PA (square) model with one incandescent
lamp, insert the lamp in the center hole.
Note: Built-in LEDs cannot be replaced.
7. LED Rated Voltage Display (LED Models Only)
The LED rated voltage is shown between the built-in re-
sistors on the back of the lighting unit. Use within a range
of $ 5%.
Rated voltage display
A3PJ
A3PA
Note: Display is on the back.
8. Mounting Switch onto Panel
Individual Mounting and Barrier Mounting
When mounting the Switch, push it into the panel cutout
from the front of the mounting panel by holding it with the
logo mark ‘ ‘OMRON” facing downward.
OMRON logo
Multiple Barrier Mounting (A3PJ)
When mounting a number of Switches in line on the pan-
el, link the Switches with spacing barriers in between,
attach mounting barriers at both sides of this block of
Switches and, pushing in on the mounting barriers at the
side, insert the Switches into the panel cutout together.
A3P A3P
247
OMRON
logo
9. Mounting Barriers
Mount each part by pushing it in the direction of the arrow
shown in the corresponding illustration below.
Barrier mounting
10.Mounting Seal Cover
After mounting the seal cover onto the flange of the
Switch, push the Switch into the panel cutout.
11.Inscribing the Legend Plate
Inscribe the legend plate to a depth of 0.5 mm max.
The legend plate is made from polycarbonate resin. To
coat the legend plate, use an alcohol-based coating such
as melamine, phthalic acid, or acrylic.
ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.
Cat. No. A135-E1-02
248
Indicators M2P
Large Rectangular-bodied Indicators
Good illumination with even surface brightness.
Three-color models (green, orange, red; chame-
leon lighting) included in lineup.
UL and CSA approved.
RC
Ordering Information
Model Number Legend
The model numbers used to order sets of Units are illustrated below. One set comprises the Display, Lamp, and Socket.
M 2 P J - 90 A 1 1 - 24E RW
24E R
(1) (2) (3) Upper Lower
Single screen
Horizontal 2-split screen
R (Red)
W (White) Upper
Lower
(4) (5)
(2) Screen Pattern
Illumination-only models
Symbol Screen pattern
1
Single screen
2
2-split screen
G
Chameleon
(see note 1, 2)
Note: 1. The chameleon screen pat-
tern is not available with
M2PT models.
2. The chameleon screen pat-
tern is only available with 12
or 24-VDC models.
3. With chameleon models, the
whole screen lights red,
green, or orange. When not
lit, the display is white.
(1) Shape of Display
Symbol Shape
J Rectangular
A Square
T Round
Horizontal 3-split
screen models
4-split screen
models
Vertical 3-split
screen models
Unlit Lit
White Color
The built-in LED
is colored.
Colored-illumination models
up to the 4-split screen mod-
els are available as individu-
al Units. Refer to page 255.
Vertical 2-split
screen models
(3) Case Color
Symbol Color
1 Black
2 Light gray
Note: M2PT model is avail-
able in light gray only.
(4) Lighting Method
Symbol Rated voltage
05E 5 VDC
12E 12 VDC
24E 24 VDC
LED-lighted Models (M2PJ
and M2PA Only)
LED Lamp-lighted Models
(M2PT Only)
Symbol Rated voltage
05C 5 VDC
12C 12 VDC
24C 24 VDC
M2PJ and M2PA can also be
ordered separately. Refer to
page 257 for details.
Incandescent Lamp-
lighted Models
Symbol Rated voltage
06 6 VAC/VDC
14 14 VAC/VDC
28 28 VAC/VDC
(5) Color of Display
Symbol Color
The chameleon screen
pattern is not available
with M2PT models.
The chameleon screen
pattern is only available
with 12 or 24-VDC models.
For Incandescent Lamp
Symbol Color
No symbol Red,
orange,
white,
blue,
green
Includes colored plate.
Refer to page 258 for details.
For LED
R Red
O Orange
G Green
W White
K Chameleon
“Colored-illumination” models
operate in the way shown
below:
The available rectangular models
are shown below. Select from
among the individual products
shown on page 257.
The above diagrams show the Sockets
with the “ ” mark facing down.
M2P M2P
249
Number of Built-in LED Lamps
Screen pattern A3PJ A3PA A3PT
Single screen Built-in LED models 2
Horizontal 2-split screen 2
Vertical 2-split screen 4
(S t )
--- ---
Horizontal 3-split screen (See note.) --- ---
Vertical 3-split screen --- ---
4-split screen --- ---
Number of Built-in Incandescent Lamps
Screen pattern A3PJ A3PA A3PT
Single screen 2 1 2
Horizontal 2-split screen 4
(L
2 2
Vertical 2-split screen (Low-power
incandescent
--- ---
Horizontal 3-split screen
i
ncan
d
escen
t
lamp) --- ---
Vertical 3-split screen
lamp)
--- ---
4-split screen --- ---
Note: These split screen models are available only as individual Units. They cannot be ordered as sets.
List of Models
Model M2PJ (Rectangular) M2PA (Square) M2PT (Round)
Appearance 52 max. 52 max.
6.7 52 max.
32 dia.
M2P M2P
250
Construction
Lighting
method LED-lighted models
(LED is built-in.) LED lamp-lighted models (LED is not built-in.) Incandescent lamp-lighted models
(Incandescent lamp is not built-in.)
Models M2PJ M2PA M2PJ M2PA M2PT M2PJ M2PA M2PT
Screen
pattern Single screen
Horizontal 2-split
screen
Chameleon
(3-color)
Single screen
Horizontal 2-split
screen
Chameleon
(3-color)
Horizontal 2-split
screen
Vertical 2-split
screen
Single screen
Horizontal 3-split
screen
4-split screen
Vertical 3-split
screen Single screen
Horizontal 2-split
screen
Single screen
Horizontal 2-split
screen
Vertical 2-split
screen
Single screen
4-split screen
Horizontal 3-split
screen
Vertical 3-split
screen Single screen
Horizontal 2-split
screen
Single screen
LED-lighted models LED lamp-lighted models Incandescent lamp-lighted models
LED-lighted models Chameleon models (full screen
illumination in one of three colors)
Cap
(transparent)
Legend plate
(transparent)
Colored plate
LED Unit LED Unit
3-color emitter Lamp holder
Display
(Split-screen models
contain light baffles.)
LED-lighted and LED
lamp-lighted models
White, Red, Green, Orange
Lamp
Socket
Case Color
Built-in LED
Cap (transparent)
Legend plate
(transparent)
Colored plate
Cap
(transparent)
Legend plate
(transparent)
(See note.)
Colored plate
Select either black or light gray
to suit your panel design. (The
round M2PT models are avail-
able in light gray only.)
Note: The above diagram for LED lamp-lighted and incandescent lamp-lighted models shows the M2PJ model.
Incandescent lamp-lighted models
White, Red, Green, Blue, Orange
Note: Incandescent lamp-lighted
M2PT models do not con-
tain legend plates.
Display Colors:
M2P M2P
251
M2P Lighting Method Diagram
M2PJ (rectangular)
LED models
Incandescent lamp-
lighted models
LED-lighted models
LED lamp-lighted models
Chameleon models (Full screen illumination
in one of three colors)
Single screen
models Horizontal 2-split
screen models
Single screen
models Horizontal 2-split
screen models Vertical 2-split
screen models
4-split screen
models
Single screen
models
Single screen
models Horizontal 2-split
screen models Vertical 2-split
screen models*
4-split screen
models*
M2PA (square)
M2PT (round)
LED models
Incandescent lamp-
lighted models
LED-lighted models
LED lamp-lighted models
Chameleon models
Single screen
models Horizontal 2-split
screen models
Single screen
models Horizontal 2-split
screen models
Single screen
models
Single screen
models Horizontal 2-split
screen models
Single screen
models
LED models LED lamp-lighted models
Incandescent lamp-
lighted models
Single screen
models
Horizontal 3-split
screen models
Vertical 3-split
screen models
Horizontal 3-split
screen models*
Vertical 3-split
screen models*
As a set: See page 252.
Individually: See page 256.
Individually: See page 256.
(Not available as a set.)
As a set: See page 252.
Individually: See page 256.
As a set: See page 252.
Individually: See page 256.
*Models indicated with an asterisk
are only available individually.
As a set: See page 252.
Individually: See page 256.
Individually: See page 256.
(Not available as a set.)
As a set: See page 252.
Individually: See page 256.
As a set: See page 252.
Individually: See page 256.
As a set: See page 252.
Individually: See page 256.
As a set: See page 252.
Individually: See page 256.
Ordering Information
M2P M2P
252
Ordering as a Set
The model numbers used to order sets of Units are given in the following tables. One set comprises the Display, Lamp, and Socket.
M2PJ (Rectangular) Single Screen Models
(1)
Lighting method
Case color Black Light gray Display color symbol
LED 5 VDC M2PJ-90A11-05E(1) M2PJ-90A12-05E(1) R
O
12 VDC M2PJ-90A11-12E(1) M2PJ-90A12-12E(1) O
G
24 VDC M2PJ-90A11-24E(1) M2PJ-90A12-24E(1)
G
W
Chameleon 12 VDC M2PJ-90AG1-12EK M2PJ-90AG2-12EK (See note 1.)
24 VDC M2PJ-90AG1-24EK M2PJ-90AG2-24EK
()
Incandescent lamp 6 VDC/VAC M2PJ-90A11-06 M2PJ-90A12-06 (See note 2.)
p
14 VDC/VAC M2PJ-90A11-14 M2PJ-90A12-14
()
28 VDC/VAC M2PJ-90A11-28 M2PJ-90A12-28
Enter the desired color symbol for the Display in (1). (R) = Red, (O) = Orange, (G) = Green, (W) = White.
Example: Red MPJ-90A11-24E R
Note: 1. You can change the screen colors of chameleon models between red, green, and orange by changing the terminal wiring. Refer to
page 260 for details.
2. Incandescent lamps are supplied with colored plates (white, red, green, blue, and orange) and legend plates (milk-white and trans-
parent). Use the appropriate combination.
M2PJ (Rectangular) Horizontal 2-split Screen Models
(1)
(2)
Lighting method
Case color Black Light gray Display color symbol
LED 24 VDC M2PJ-90A21-24E(1)(2) M2PJ-90A22-24E(1)(2) R
O
G
W
Incandescent lamp 6 VDC/VAC M2PJ-90A21-06 M2PJ-90A22-06 (See note.)
p
14 VDC/VAC M2PJ-90A21-14 M2PJ-90A22-14
()
28 VDC/VAC M2PJ-90A21-28 M2PJ-90A22-28
Enter the desired color symbols for the Display in (1) and (2). (R) = Red, (O) = Orange, (G) = Green, (W) = White.
Example: Red Upper
White Lower M2PJ-90A21-24E R W
Red White
Note: Incandescent lamps are supplied with colored plates (white, red, green, blue, and orange) and legend plates (milk-white and transpar-
ent). Use the appropriate combination.
M2P M2P
253
M2PA (Square) Single Screen Models
(1)
Case color
Lighting method
Black Light gray Display color symbol
LED 5 VDC M2PA-90A11-05E(1) M2PA-90A12-05E(1) R
O
12 VDC M2PA-90A11-12E(1) M2PA-90A12-12E(1) O
G
24 VDC M2PA-90A11-24E(1) M2PA-90A12-24E(1)
G
W
Chameleon 12 VDC M2PA-90AG1-12EK M2PA-90AG2-12EK (See note 1.)
24 VDC M2PA-90AG1-24EK M2PA-90AG2-24EK
()
Incandescent lamp 6 VDC/VAC M2PA-90A11-06 M2PA-90A12-06 (See note 2.)
p
14 VDC/VAC M2PA-90A11-14 M2PA-90A12-14
()
28 VDC/VAC M2PA-90A11-28 M2PA-90A12-28
Enter the desired color symbol for the Display in (1). (R) = Red, (O) = Orange, (G) = Green, (W) = White.
Example: Red M2PA-90A11-24E R
Note: 1. You can change the screen colors of chameleon models between red, green, and orange, by changing the terminal wiring. Refer to
page 260 for details.
2. Incandescent lamps are supplied with colored plates (white, red, green, blue, and orange) and legend plates (milk-white and trans-
parent). Use the appropriate combination.
M2PA (Square) Horizontal 2-split Screen Models
(1)
(2)
Case color
Lighting method
Black Light gray Display color symbol
LED 24 VDC M2PA-90A21-24E(1)(2) M2PA-90A22-24E(1)(2) R
O
G
W
Incandescent lamp 6 VDC/VAC M2PA-90A21-06 M2PA-90A22-06 (See note.)
p
14 VDC/VAC M2PA-90A21-14 M2PA-90A22-14
()
28 VDC/VAC M2PA-90A21-28 M2PA-90A22-28
Enter the desired color symbols for the Display in (1) and (2). (R) = Red, (O) = Orange, (G) = Green, (W) = White.
Example: Red Upper
White Lower M2PA-90A21-24E R W
Red White
Note: Incandescent lamps are supplied with colored plates (white, red, green, blue, and orange) and legend plates (milk-white and transpar-
ent). Use the appropriate combination.
M2P M2P
254
M2PT (Round) Single Screen Models
(1)
Case color Li
g
ht
g
ra
y
Dis
p
la
y
color s
y
mbol
Case
color
Light
gray
Display
color
symbol
Lighting method
LED 5 VDC M2PT-90A12-05C(1) R
O
12 VDC M2PT-90A12-12C(1) O
G
24 VDC M2PT-90A12-24C(1)
G
W
Incandescent lamp 6 VDC/VAC M2PT-90A12-06 (See note.)
p
14 VDC/VAC M2PT-90A12-14
()
28 VDC/VAC M2PT-90A12-28
Enter the desired color symbol for the Display in (1). (R) = Red, (O) = Orange, (G) = Green, (W) = White.
Example: M2PT-90A12-24C R
Red
Note: Incandescent lamps are supplied with a colored plates (white, red, green, blue, and orange). Use the appropriate combination. Models
A3PT and M2PT (round models), however, are not supplied with legend plates.
M2P M2P
255
Illumination-only and Colored-illumination LED Models
“Illumination only” describes LED models for which the screen color is the same whether the LED is lit or not. The screen simply becomes
brighter when the LED lights.
Example: Red LED
Lit
Not lit
Red
Red
Cap (transparent)
Legend plate (transparent)
Colored plate (red)
Lamp holder
LED lamp (red)
Display
Lamp
“Colored il lumination” describes LED models for which the screen color is white when the LED is not lit and changes to the color of the LED
lamp when the LED is lit.
Example: Red LED
Lit
Not lit
White
Red
Cap (transparent)
Legend plate (transparent)
Colored plate (white)
Lamp holder
LED lamp (red)
Display
Lamp
Ordering: For a colored-illumination Indicator, order the Display, Lamp, and Socket as shown in the following table.
Display Lamp Socket
Select the LED lamp-lighted model required
from the selection on page 257. Each
assembly includes the number of white
colored plates required to enable colored
illumination for the corresponding
screen-split configuration. For example,
4-split screen models includes 4 white
colored plates.
Select the LED lamps to suit your desired
coloration from the selection on page 258.
Number of necessary LED lamps
(standard):
M2PJ (rectangular): 4
M2PA (square): 2
M2PT (round): 2
Select from the Sockets on page 259.
M2P M2P
256
Ordering Individually
Displays, Lamps, and Sockets can be ordered separately. Combinations that are not available as sets can be created using individual Units.
Also, store the parts as spares for maintenance and repairs.
LED-lighted/Chameleon Models
(LED is built into the Display.) LED Lamp-lighted Models
(LED lamp and Display are
separate.)
Incandescent Lamp-lighted Models
(Incandescent lamp and Display are
separate.)
Display
Round (M2PT) models not
available.
M2Pj-5jjj-jjE
(for Indicator)
Display
M2Pj-502j
(for Indicator)
Display
M2Pj-501j
(for Indicator)
Lamp (LED Lamp)
(See note 2.)
Lamp (Incandescent Lamp)
(See note 3.)
SLL-jjEjStandard lamp: SLL-jj
Low-power lamp: SLL-jjH
Socket (See note 1.)
M2Pj-7jjj-j
(for Indicator)
Socket Socket
M2Pj-7jjj-j
(for Indicator)
M2Pj-7jjj-j
(for Indicator)
Note: 1. The Socket is compatible with LED-lighted, LED lamp-lighted, and incandescent lamp-lighted models.
2. Number of necessary LED lamps.
Screen pattern M2PJ M2PA M2PT
Single screen 42 2
Horizontal 2-split screen 2 2
Vertical 2-split screen --- ---
Vertical 3-split screen
Horizontal 3-split screen --- ---
4-split screen --- ---
3. Number of necessary incandescent lamps.
Screen pattern M2PJ M2PA M2PT
Single screen 2 1 2
Horizontal 2-split screen 4
(l
2 2
Vertical 2-split screen (low-power
incandes
---- ---
Vertical 3-split screen
Horizontal 3-split screen
i
ncan
d
es-
cent lamp) --- ---
4-split screen --- ---
M2P M2P
257
Display
LED-lighted Models (LED is built-in.)
Appearance Split-screen color
(color symbol)
White (W) Red (R) Green (G) Orange (O) Selection precautions
Rt l
Single
screen M2PJ-5701-jjE M2PJ-5702-jjE M2PJ-5703-jjE M2PJ-5706-jjEEnter the voltage to be
used in the j j at the
dfth dl
Rectangular
models Horizontal
2-split White M2PJ-5711-jjE M2PJ-5712-jjE M2PJ-5713-jjE M2PJ-5716-jjE
used
in
the
j
j
at
the
end of the model
number.
2 split
screen Red M2PJ-5721-jjE M2PJ-5722-jjE M2PJ-5723-jjE M2PJ-5726-jjEExamples of voltage
used:
5V=05E
Green M2PJ-5731-jjE M2PJ-5732-jjE M2PJ-5733-jjE M2PJ-5736-jjE
5
V
=
0
5
E
12 V = 1 2 E
24 V = 2 4 E
Orange M2PJ-5741-jjE M2PJ-5742-jjE M2PJ-5743-jjE M2PJ-5746-jjE
24
V
=
2
4
E
For the color of the
shaded part, select the
Single
screen M2PA-5701-jjE M2PA-5702-jjE M2PA-5703-jjE M2PA-5706-jjE
shaded
part
,
select
the
model according to the
colors given at the top of
the table.
Square
models
Horizontal
2-split
screen
White M2PA-5711-jjE M2PA-5712-jjE M2PA-5713-jjE M2PA-5716-jjE
models
screen
Red M2PA-5721-jjE M2PA-5722-jjE M2PA-5723-jjE M2PA-5726-jjE
Green M2PA-5731-jjE M2PA-5732-jjE M2PA-5733-jjE M2PA-5736-jjE
Orange M2PA-5741-jjE M2PA-5742-jjE M2PA-5743-jjE M2PA-5746-jjE
Note: 1. A cap, legend plate (transparent), colored plate, white plunger case, and LED (with a current-limiting resistor) are built into the stan-
dard lighting unit.
2. Split-screen coloring configurations are given with the mark on the Sockets facing down.
LED Lamp-lighted Models (LED is not built-in.)
Model Rectangular models Square models Round models
Screen
pattern Screen Model Screen Model Screen Model
Single screen M2PJ-5021 M2PA-5021 M2PT-5021
Horizontal
2-split screen M2PJ-5022 M2PA-5022 ---
Vertical 2-split
screen M2PJ-5023 --- ---
Horizontal
3-split screen M2PJ-5024 --- ---
Vertical 3-split
screen M2PJ-5025 --- ---
4-split screen M2PJ-5026 --- ---
Note: 1. Colored plates (white, red, green, and orange), a legend plate (transparent), and a light baffle (split-screen models only) are
included. Use the appropriate combination for the LED coloring required.
2. The number of white colored plates required to enable colored illumination for the corresponding screen-split configuration is
included. (For example, 4-split screen models include 4 white colored plates). The number of colored plates included for each
model are shown in the following table.
Screen pattern White Red Green Orange
Single screen 1 1 1 1
Horizontal 2-split screen
Vertical 2-split screen 2 1 1 1
Horizontal 3-split screen
Vertical 3-split screen 3 2 2 2
4-split screen 4 1 1 1
M2P M2P
258
Display
Incandescent Lamp-lighted Models (Incandescent lamp is not built-in.)
Model Rectangular models Square models Round models
Screen pattern Screen Model Screen Model Screen Model
Single screen M2PJ-5011 M2PA-5011 M2PT-5011
Horizontal 2-split
screen M2PJ-5012 M2PA-5012 ---
Vertical 2-split
screen M2PJ-5013 --- ---
Horizontal 3-split
screen M2PJ-5014 --- ---
Vertical 3-split
screen M2PJ-5015 --- ---
4-split screen M2PJ-5016 --- ---
Note: 1. Colored plates (white, red, green, orange, and blue), a legend plate (transparent), and a light baffle (split-screen models only) are
supplied.
2. M2PT (round) models do not contain a legend plate.
3. The number of colored plates supplied is shown in the following table.
Screen pattern White Red Green Orange Blue
Single screen 11111
Horizontal 2-split screen
Vertical 2-split screen 11111
Horizontal 3-split screen
Vertical 3-split screen 22222
4-split screen 22222
Chameleon Models (with Built-in LED)
Shape Rated voltage Chameleon
indicator
Rectangular 12 VDC M2PJ-5800-12E
24 VDC M2PJ-5800-24E
Square 12 VDC M2PA-5800-12E
24 VDC M2PA-5800-24E
Note: 1. With the chameleon models, the whole screen lights red, green, or orange (i.e., red and green simultaneously).
2. A cap, legend plate (transparent), white colored plate, and LED (with a current-limiting resistor) are built into the Display.
Lamp (For mounting, refer to page 246.)
LED Lamp
Voltage 5 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC Applicable cap (color)
( l d lt)
Selection
ti
Color Model (DC only) Model (DC only) Model (DC only)
pp p ( )
(colored plate) precautions
Red SLL-05ER SLL-12ER SLL-24ER Red In the standard
setu
p
, 4 LED
Yellow SLL-05EY SLL-12EY SLL-24EY Orange
setup
,
4
LED
lamps are used
with M2PJ models
Green SLL-05EG SLL-12EG SLL-24EG Green
with
M2PJ
models
and 2 LED lamps
are used with
M2PA d M2PT
White SLL-05EW SLL-12EW SLL-24EW White M2PA and M2PT
models.
M2P M2P
259
Incandescent Lamp
Lamp type Standard lamp Low-voltage lamp Selection precautions
Voltage
p
gp
p
5 VAC/VDC SLL-06 SLL-06H In the standard setup for M2PJ models, 2 lamps are
used with single screen models, and 4 lamps are
used with split-screen models. If 3 or 4 lamps are lit
ti l l l
12 VAC/VDC SLL-14 SLL-14H
pp
continuously, use low-power lamps.
In the standard setup for M2PA models, 1 lamp is
used with single screen models, and 2 lamps are
d ith lit d l
24 VAC/VDC SLL-28 SLL-28H
g,p
used with split-screen models.
In the standard setup for M2PT models, 2 lamps are
used.
Socket (common to both incandescent lamp-lighted and LED-lighted models)
Rectangular Square Round Selection precautions
M2PJ-7010-1 M2PA-7010-1 M2PT-7010-2 The end digit denotes the color
of the flange: -1 denotes a
black flange, and -2 denotes a
light gray flange. Round
switches are available only in
light gray, and not in black.
Accessories
Accessories are the same as those for the A3P Lighted Pushbutton Switches. Refer to page 234.
LED and Incandescent Lamp Ratings and Characteristics
Ratings and characteristics the same as those for the A3P Lighted Pushbutton Switches. Refer to page 237.
M2P M2P
260
Operation
Terminal connections
LED-lighted Models
Rated voltage 5 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC
Model Screen pattern
M2PJ Single screen Bottom view Top view
Terminal
arrangement Lighting block
+
Bottom view Top view
Terminal
arrangement Lighting block
+
Bottom view Top view
Terminal
arrangement Lighting block
–+
2-split screen Bottom view Top view
Terminal
arrangement Lighting block
–+
Bottom view Top view
Terminal
arrangement Lighting block
–+
M2PA Single screen Bottom view Top view
Terminal
arrangement Lighting block
+
Bottom view Top view
Terminal
arrangement Lighting block
+
Bottom view Top view
Terminal
arrangement Lighting block
+
2-split screen Bottom view Top view
Terminal
arrangement Lighting block
+
Bottom view Top view
Terminal
arrangement Lighting block
+
Incandescent Lamp-lighted/LED Lamp-lighted Models
(All are shown with the OMRON logo facing down. The terminal arrangements are the same as for the LED-lighted models.)
Model Rectangular M2PJ models Square M2PA models Round M2PT models
Indicator Bottom view Top view
Terminal
arrangement Lighting block
Bottom view Top view
Terminal
arrangement Lighting block
Bottom view Top view
Terminal
arrangement Lighting block
LED Chameleon Models
Rated voltage
Model
24 VDC
Rectangular M2PJ
model
Square M2PA
model
Terminal Arrangement and Coloring
Chameleon Models
Wiring LC+ LC+ LC+
g
L1– L2– L1– and L2–
shorted
Coloring Green Red Orange
M2P M2P
261
Panel Cutout
(If using a Switch Guard or Seal Cover, refer to the panel cutout diagrams.)
M2PJ (Rectangular) Models
Classification Mounting design Panel cutout Remarks
Flange
mount
models
Individual
mounting
(Horizontal)
25±0.1
32±0.1 23.5±0.3
30.5±0.3 Panel cutout spacing between rows
of Units:
3 min.
Multiple
mounting
(Horizontal)
12 n
25±0.1
32n±0.5 23.5±0.3
32n–1.5±0.3 6 min.
Individual
mounting
(Vertical)
Mount to long mounting
plate (A3PJ-3002) be-
fore use.
32±0.1
25±0.1
30.5±0.3
23.5±0.3
Multiple
mounting
(Vertical)
Mount to long
mounting plate
(A3PJ-3002)
before use.
12 n
32±0.1
25n±0.5
30.5±0.3
25n–1.5±0.3
Barrier
mount
models
Individual
mounting
(Horizontal)
27
39 23.5±0.3
36.4±0.3 For barrier mount models, refer to
Accessories on page 234.
Panel cutout spacing between rows
of Units:
Multiple
mounting
(Horizontal) 12 n
27
33n+6±1
23.5±0.3
32.9n+3.5±0.3 o
f
U
n
it
s:
(Dotted line indicates the position
of each mounting barrier.)
Individual
mounting
(Vertical)
Mount to long
mounting plate
(A3PJ-3002)
before use.
34
32±0.1
30.5±0.3
29.4±0.3
6 min.
6 min.
Multiple
mounting
(Vertical)
Mount to long
mounting plate
(A3PJ-3002)
before use.
12 n
34
26n+6±1
30.5±0.3
25.9n+3.5±0.3
Note: 1. n: Number of Units
2. Recommended panel thickness: 1 to 5 mm
3. Mount the panel before mounting the Switch Guard.
4. If the panel is to be finished (e.g., coated), make sure that the panel meets the specified dimensions after the coating.
M2PA (Square) Models
Classification Mounting design Panel cutout Remarks
Flange mount
models Individual
mounting 25±0.1
25±0.1
23.5±0.3
22.5±0.3
Panel cutout spacing between rows
of Units: 3 min.
Multiple mounting 12 n
25±0.1
25n±0.1
23.5±0.3
25n–2.5±0.3
6 min.
Barrier mount
models Individual
mounting 27
32
23.5±0.3
27.8±0.3
Panel cutout spacing between rows
of Units:
(Dotted line indicates the position of
each mounting barrier.)
Multiple mounting 12 n
27
26n+6.5±126n+2.5±0.3
23.5±0.3 6 min.
6 min.
Note: 1. n: Number of Units
2. Recommended panel thickness: 1 to 5 mm
3. If the panel is to be finished (e.g., coated), make sure that the panel meets the specified dimensions after the coating.
M2P M2P
262
M2PT (Round) Models
4 min.
R11.8+0.2
–0
29±0.3 dia.
6.4 dia.
Dimensions
Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
M2PJ (Rectangular) Models M2PA (Square) Models
M2PT (Round) Models
OMRON logo #110 quick connect terminal
/soldered terminal
52 max.
OMRON logo #110 quick connect terminal
/soldered terminal
OMRON logo
#110 quick connect terminal/soldered terminal
26.1
25±0.1
43.66.7
18.9
32±0.1
0.5
22.9±0.2
29.9±0.2
2.8
52 max.
43.6
6.7
22.9±0.2
22
19.1 19.1
25±0.1
52 max.
43.6
6.4
24.9 dia.
32 dia.
22.4 28.5 dia.
23.8
25±0.1
Accessory Mounting Dimensions
Dimensions for mounting accessories are the same as those for the A3P Lighted Pushbutton Switches. Refer to page 242.
Precautions
Correct Use
Refer to the Common Precautions for Pushbutton Switches on page 14.
Refer to Correct Use for A3P on page 245.
ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.
Cat. No. A137-E1-02
Specifications subject to change without notice.
Printed in the U.S.A.
OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
1 Commerce Drive
Schaumburg, IL 60173
847.843.7900
For US technical support or
other inquiries: 800.556.6766
OMRON CANADA, INC.
885 Milner Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M
1
B
5
V
8
416.286.6465
OMRON ON-LINE
Global - www.omron.com
USA - www.omron247.com
Canada - www.omron.ca
Brazil - www.omron.com.br
Latin America - www.espanol.omron.com
X032-E1-08 ©2007 OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
UNITED STATES
To locate a Regional Sales Oce, local Distributor or
to obtain product information, call: 847.843.7900
MEXICO SALES OFFICES
Mexico, D.F. 555.660.3144
Ciudad Juárez 656.623.7083
Monterrey, N.L 818.377.4281
Querétaro 442.135.4510
BRAZIL SALES OFFICE
Sao Paulo 55.11.2101.6310
ARGENTINA SALES OFFICE
Cono Sur 54.114.787.1129
OTHER LATIN AMERICAN SALES
mela@omron.com
Mouser Electronics
Authorized Distributor
Click to View Pricing, Inventory, Delivery & Lifecycle Information:
Omron:
M2PA-5702-24E M2PA-5706-05E M2PA-5711-24E M2PA-7010-1 M2PA-90A12-24EG M2PA-90A12-24EW M2PJ-
5011 M2PJ-5012 M2PJ-5021 M2PJ-5022 M2PJ-5701-24E M2PJ-5702-24E M2PJ-5703-24E M2PJ-5706-24E
M2PJ-5722-24E M2PJ-5723-24E M2PJ-5726-24E M2PJ-5736-24E M2PJ-7010-1 M2PJ-7010-2 M2PJ-90A11-24EG
M2PJ-90A11-24EO M2PJ-90A11-24ER M2PJ-90A11-24EW M2PJ-90A21-24EWW M2PA-5011 M2PA-5706-24E
M2DA-500GY M2DT-500Y M2DJ-500R M2DT-500GY M2DT-500R M2DT-7002 M2DJ-500GY M2DA-500Y M2DA-
500R M2DA-7001 M2DJ-7001 M2DT-7001 M2DJ-500Y